[Title 49 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - October 1, 2017 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Publishing Office]
[[Page i]]
Title 49
Transportation
________________________
Parts 572 to 999
Revised as of October 1, 2017
Containing a codification of documents of general
applicability and future effect
As of October 1, 2017
Published by the Office of the Federal Register
National Archives and Records Administration as a
Special Edition of the Federal Register
[[Page ii]]
U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE
Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos
The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as
the official codification of Federal regulations established
under the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44
U.S.C. 1507, the contents of the CFR, a special edition of the
Federal Register, shall be judicially noticed. The CFR is
prima facie evidence of the original documents published in
the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).
It is prohibited to use NARA's official seal and the stylized Code
of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this
material without the express, written permission of the
Archivist of the United States or the Archivist's designee.
Any person using NARA's official seals and logos in a manner
inconsistent with the provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is
subject to the penalties specified in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and
1017.
Use of ISBN Prefix
This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication
and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of
the 0-16 ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Publishing Office
Official Editions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the
U.S. Government Publishing Office requests that any reprinted
edition clearly be labeled as a copy of the authentic work
with a new ISBN.
U . S . G O V E R N M E N T P U B L I S H I N G O F F I C E
------------------------------------------------------------------
U.S. Superintendent of Documents Washington, DC 20402-
0001
http://bookstore.gpo.gov
Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
[[Page iii]]
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation................................................. v
Title 49:
SUBTITLE B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation
(Continued)
Chapter V--National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, Department of Transportation,
(Continued) 5
Chapter VI--Federal Transit Administration,
Department of Transportation 447
Chapter VII--National Railroad Passenger Corporation
(AMTRAK) 597
Chapter VIII--National Transportation Safety Board 615
Finding Aids:
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................ 713
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR...... 733
List of CFR Sections Affected........................... 743
[[Page iv]]
----------------------------
Cite this Code: CFR
To cite the regulations in
this volume use title,
part and section number.
Thus, 49 CFR 572.1 refers
to title 49, part 572,
section 1.
----------------------------
[[Page v]]
EXPLANATION
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each
volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its
revision date (in this case, October 1, 2017), consult the ``List of CFR
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be
inserted following the text.
OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information
collection request.
[[Page vi]]
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting
requirements.
PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of
the revision date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried.
Code users may find the text of provisions in effect on any given date
in the past by using the appropriate List of CFR Sections Affected
(LSA). For the convenience of the reader, a ``List of CFR Sections
Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume. For changes to
the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume, consult
previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published
for 1949-1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.
``[RESERVED]'' TERMINOLOGY
The term ``[Reserved]'' is used as a place holder within the Code of
Federal Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a
``[Reserved]'' location at any time. Occasionally ``[Reserved]'' is used
editorially to indicate that a portion of the CFR was left vacant and
not accidentally dropped due to a printing or computer error.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)).
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which
approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of
material published in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative
process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as
an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency that
issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after
contacting the agency, you find the material is not available, please
notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives and
Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001,
or call 202-741-6010.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities
and Rules. A list of CFR titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an
alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in
this volume.
[[Page vii]]
An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within
that volume.
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form.
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in
the daily Federal Register.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing
in the Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at
the top of odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National
Archives and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD
20740-6001 or e-mail [email protected].
SALES
The Government Publishing Office (GPO) processes all sales and
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free,
866-512-1800, or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or
fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours a day. For payment by check,
write to: US Government Publishing Office - New Orders, P.O. Box 979050,
St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of
CFR Sections Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal
Register, Public Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United
States, Compilation of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act
Compilation are available in electronic format via www.ofr.gov. For more
information, contact the GPO Customer Contact Center, U.S. Government
Publishing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-512-1800 (toll-free). E-
mail, [email protected].
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.archives.gov/federal-
register.
The e-CFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation
of CFR material and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office
of the Federal Register and the Government Publishing Office. It is
available at www.ecfr.gov.
Oliver A. Potts,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register.
October 1, 2017.
[[Page ix]]
THIS TITLE
Title 49--Transportation is composed of nine volumes. The parts in
these volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 1-99, parts
100-177, parts 178-199, parts 200-299, parts 300-399, parts 400-571,
parts 572-999, parts 1000-1199, and part 1200 to end. The first volume
(parts 1-99) contains current regulations issued under subtitle A--
Office of the Secretary of Transportation; the second volume (parts 100-
177) and the third volume (parts 178-199) contain the current
regulations issued under chapter I--Pipeline and Hazardous Materials
Safety Administration (DOT); the fourth volume (parts 200-299) contains
the current regulations issued under chapter II--Federal Railroad
Administration (DOT); the fifth volume (parts 300-399) contains the
current regulations issued under chapter III--Federal Motor Carrier
Safety Administration (DOT); the sixth volume (parts 400-571) contains
the current regulations issued under chapter IV--Coast Guard (DHS), and
some of chapter V--National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (DOT);
the seventh volume (parts 572-999) contains the rest of the regulations
issued under chapter IV, and the current regulations issued under
chapter VI--Federal Transit Administration (DOT), chapter VII--National
Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK), and chapter VIII--National
Transportation Safety Board; the eighth volume (parts 1000-1199)
contains the current regulations issued under chapter X--Surface
Transportation Board and the ninth volume (part 1200 to end) contains
the current regulations issued under chapter X--Surface Transportation
Board, chapter XI--Research and Innovative Technology Administration,
and chapter XII--Transportation Security Administration, Department of
Transportation. The contents of these volumes represent all current
regulations codified under this title of the CFR as of October 1, 2017.
In the volume containing parts 100-177, see Sec. 172.101 for the
Hazardous Materials Table. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
appear in part 571.
For this volume, Susannah C. Hurley was Chief Editor. The Code of
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of John
Hyrum Martinez, assisted by Stephen J. Frattini.
[[Page 1]]
TITLE 49--TRANSPORTATION
(This book contains parts 572 to 999)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBTITLE B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation (Continued)
Part
chapter v--National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
Department of Transportation (Continued).................. 572
chapter vi--Federal Transit Administration, Department of
Transportation............................................ 601
chapter vii--National Railroad Passenger Corporation
(AMTRAK).................................................. 700
chapter viii--National Transportation Safety Board.......... 800
[[Page 3]]
Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation (Continued)
[[Page 5]]
CHAPTER V--NATIONAL HIGHWAY TRAFFIC SAFETY ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION (CONTINUED)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Part Page
572 Anthropomorphic test devices................ 7
573 Defect and noncompliance responsibility and
reports................................. 173
574 Tire identification and recordkeeping....... 188
575 Consumer information........................ 198
576 Record retention............................ 256
577 Defect and noncompliance notification....... 257
578 Civil and criminal penalties................ 268
579 Reporting of information and communications
about potential defects................. 274
580 Odometer disclosure requirements............ 300
581 Bumper standard............................. 309
582 Insurance cost information regulation....... 313
583 Automobile parts content labeling........... 314
585 Phase-in reporting requirements............. 326
586 [Reserved]
587 Deformable barriers......................... 344
588 Child restraint systems recordkeeping
requirements............................ 354
589-590 [Reserved]
591 Importation of vehicles and equipment
subject to Federal safety, bumper and
theft prevention standards.............. 355
592 Registered importers of vehicles not
originally manufactured to conform to
the Federal motor vehicle safety
standards............................... 367
593 Determinations that a vehicle not originally
manufactured to conform to the Federal
motor vehicle safety standards is
eligible for importation................ 381
594 Schedule of fees authorized by 49 U.S.C.
30141................................... 394
595 Make inoperative exemptions................. 398
596-598 [Reserved]
[[Page 6]]
599 Requirements and procedures for Consumer
Assistance to Recycle and Save Act
program................................. 415
[[Page 7]]
PART 572_ANTHROPOMORPHIC TEST DEVICES--Table of Contents
Subpart A_General
Sec.
572.1 Scope.
572.2 Purpose.
572.3 Application.
572.4 Terminology.
Subpart B_50th Percentile Male
572.5 General description.
572.6 Head.
572.7 Neck.
572.8 Thorax.
572.9 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis.
572.10 Limbs.
572.11 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Subpart C_3-Year-Old Child
572.15 General description.
572.16 Head.
572.17 Neck.
572.18 Thorax.
572.19 Lumbar spine, abdomen and pelvis.
572.20 Limbs.
572.21 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Subpart D_6-Month-Old Infant
572.25 General description.
Subpart E_Hybrid III Test Dummy
572.30 Incorporated materials.
572.31 General description.
572.32 Head.
572.33 Neck.
572.34 Thorax.
572.35 Limbs.
572.36 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Subpart F_Side Impact Dummy 50th Percentile Male
572.40 Incorporated materials.
572.41 General description.
572.42 Thorax.
572.43 Lumbar spine and pelvis.
572.44 Instrumentation and test conditions.
Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 572
Subparts G-H [Reserved]
Subpart I_6-Year-Old Child
572.70 Incorporation by reference.
572.71 General description.
572.72 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.73 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.74 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.75 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly and test procedure.
572.76 Limbs assembly and test procedure.
572.77 Instrumentation.
572.78 Performance test conditions.
Figures to Subpart I of Part 572
Subpart J_9-Month Old Child
572.80 Incorporated materials.
572.81 General description.
572.82 Head.
572.83 Head-neck.
572.84 Thorax.
572.85 Lumbar spine flexure.
572.86 Test conditions and dummy adjustment.
Subpart K_Newborn Infant
572.90 Incorporation by reference.
572.91 General description.
Subpart L_Free Motion Headform
572.100 Incorporation by reference.
572.101 General description.
572.102 Drop test.
572.103 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Subpart M_Side Impact Hybrid Dummy 50th Percentile Male
572.110 Materials incorporated by reference.
572.111 General description.
572.112 Head assembly.
572.113 Neck assembly.
572.114 Thorax.
572.115 Lumbar spine and pelvis.
572.116 Instrumentation and test conditions.
Subpart N_Six-year-old Child Test Dummy, Beta Version
572.120 Incorporation by reference.
572.121 General description.
572.122 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.123 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.124 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.125 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.
572.126 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
572.127 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Figures to Subpart N of Part 572
Subpart O_Hybrid III 5th Percentile Female Test Dummy, Alpha Version
572.130 Incorporation by reference.
572.131 General description.
572.132 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.133 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.134 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.135 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.
572.136 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
[[Page 8]]
572.137 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Figures to Subpart O of Part 572
Subpart P_Hybrid III 3-Year-Old Child Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version
572.140 Incorporation by reference.
572.141 General description.
572.142 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.143 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.
572.144 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.145 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.
572.146 Test condition and instrumentation.
Figures to Subpart P of Part 572
Subpart R_CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version
572.150 Incorporation by reference.
572.151 General description.
572.152 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.153 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.
572.154 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.155 Test condition and instrumentation.
Figures to Subpart R of Part 572
Subpart S_Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy
572.160 Incorporation by reference.
572.161 General description.
572.162 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.163 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.164 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.165 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.
572.166 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
572.167 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Figures to Subpart S of Part 572
Subpart T_Hybrid III 10-Year-Old Child Test Dummy (HIII 10C)
572.170 Incorporation by reference.
572.171 General description.
572.172 Head assembly and test procedure.
572.173 Neck assembly and test procedure.
572.174 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
572.175 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.
572.176 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
572.177 Test conditions and instrumentation.
Figures to Subpart T of Part 572
Subpart U_ ES 2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult
Male
572.180 Incorporated materials.
572.181 General description.
572.182 Head assembly.
572.183 Neck assembly.
572.184 Shoulder assembly.
572.185 Thorax (upper torso) assembly.
572.186 Abdomen assembly.
572.187 Lumbar spine.
572.188 Pelvis.
572.189 Instrumentation and test conditions.
Appendix A to Subpart U of Part 572--Figures
Subpart V_SID IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, Small Adult Female
572.190 Incorporated materials.
572.191 General description.
572.192 Head assembly.
572.193 Neck assembly.
572.194 Shoulder.
572.195 Thorax with arm.
572.196 Thorax without arm.
572.197 Abdomen.
572.198 Pelvis acetabulum.
572.199 Pelvis iliac.
572.200 Instrumentation and test conditions.
Appendix A to Subpart V of Part 572--Figures
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117 and 30166; delegation
of authority at 49 CFR 1.95
Editorial Notes: 1. For compliance provisions relating to a
vehicle's conformance with the performance requirements of Standard No.
208 (Sec. 571.208) relating to the part 572 test dummy, see the
``Effective Date Note'' at subpart E of this part.
2. Nomenclature changes to part 572 appear at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9,
2004.
Subpart A_General
Sec. 572.1 Scope.
This part describes the anthropo- morphic test devices that are to
be used for compliance testing of motor vehicles and motor vehicle
equipment with motor vehicle safety standards.
[60 FR 43058, Aug. 18, 1995]
Sec. 572.2 Purpose.
The design and performance criteria specified in this part are
intended to describe measuring tools with sufficient precision to give
repetitive and correlative results under similar test conditions and to
reflect adequately the protective performance of a vehicle
[[Page 9]]
or item of motor vehicle equipment with respect to human occupants.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7151, Feb. 7, 1977]
Sec. 572.3 Application.
This part does not in itself impose duties or liabilities on any
person. It is a description of tools that measure the performance of
occupant protection systems required by the safety standards that
incorporate it. It is designed to be referenced by, and become a part
of, the test procedures specified in motor vehicle safety standards such
as Standard No. 208, Occupant Crash Protection.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]
Sec. 572.4 Terminology.
(a) The term dummy, when used in this subpart A, refers to any test
device described by this part. The term dummy, when used in any other
subpart of this part, refers to the particular dummy described in that
part.
(b) Terms describing parts of the dummy, such as head, are the same
as names for corresponding parts of the human body.
(c) The term unimodal, when used in subparts C and I, refers to an
acceleration-time curve which has only one prominent peak.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977; 44
FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991]
Subpart B_50th Percentile Male
Sec. 572.5 General description.
(a) The dummy consists of the component assemblies specified in
Figure 1, which are described in their entirety by means of
approximately 250 drawings and specifications that are grouped by
component assemblies under the following nine headings:
SA 150 M070--Right arm assembly
SA 150 M071--Left arm assembly
SA 150 M050--Lumbar spine assembly
SA 150 M060--Pelvis and abdomen assembly
SA 150 M080--Right leg assembly
SA 150 M081--Left leg assembly
SA 150 M010--Head assembly
SA 150 M020--Neck assembly
SA 150 M030--Shoulder-thorax assembly.
(b) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation
that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by
reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The
Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated
by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version
approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the
regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in
the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials
incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at
the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.
(c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for
examination in Docket 73-08, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, Room 5109, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington,
DC, 20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc.,
1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The drawings
and specifications are also on file in the reference library of the
Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records
Administration, Washington, DC.
(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout
the range of motion and also under crash impact conditions there is no
contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under
static conditions.
(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 208 of this chapter
(571.208).
(f) A specimen of the dummy is available for surface measurements
and access can be arranged by contacting: Office of Vehicle Safety
Standards, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
[50 FR 25423, June 19, 1985]
Sec. 572.6 Head.
(a) The head consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M010 in
Figure
[[Page 10]]
1 and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150 M010.
(b) When the head is dropped from a height of 10 inches in
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant
accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head
form in accordance with Sec. 572.11(b) shall be not less than 210g, and
not more than 260g. The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be
unimodal and shall lie at or above the 100g level for an interval not
less than 0.9 milliseconds and not more than 1.5 milliseconds. The
lateral acceleration vector shall not exceed 10g.
(c) Test procedure:
(1) Suspend the head as shown in Figure 2, so that the lowest point
on the forehead is 0.5 inches below the lowest point on the dummy's nose
when the midsagittal plane is vertical.
(2) Drop the head from the specified height by means that ensures
instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, 2
inches thick and 2 feet square, which has a clean, dry surface and any
microfinish of not less than 8 microinches (rms) and not more than 80
microinches (rms).
(3) Allow a time period of at least 2 hours between successive tests
on the same head.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]
Sec. 572.7 Neck.
(a) The neck consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M020 in
Figure 1 and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150
M020.
(b) When the neck is tested with the head in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section, the head shall rotate in reference to the
pendulum's longitudinal centerline a total of 68 5 about its center
of gravity, rotating to the extent specified in the following table at
each indicated point in time, measured from impact, with a chordal
displacement measured at its center of gravity that is within the limits
specified. The chordal displacement at time T is defined as the straight
line distance between (1) the position relative to the pendulum arm of
the head center of gravity at time zero, and (2) the position relative
to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at time T as
illustrated by Figure 3. The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the
location of the accelerometers mounted in the head form in accordance
with Sec. 572.11(b) shall not exceed 26g. The pendulum shall not reverse
direction until the head's center of gravity returns to the original
zero time position relative to the pendulum arm.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chordal
Time (ms) Displacement
Rotation (degrees) (2 + .08T) (inches
0.5)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0............................................ 0 0.0
30........................................... 30 2.6
60........................................... 46 4.8
Maximum...................................... 60 5.5
60........................................... 75 4.8
30........................................... 95 2.6
0............................................ 112 0.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Test procedure: (1) Mount the head and neck on a rigid pendulum
as specified in Figure 4, so that the head's midsagittal plane is
vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline. Mount the neck directly to the pendulum as
shown in Figure 4.
(2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height
such that the velocity at impact is 23.5 2.0 feet per second (fps),
measured at the center of the accelerometer specified in Figure 4.
(3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time
pulse described as follows:
(i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.
(ii) Establish t1 at the point where the rising a-t curve
first crosses the 5g level, t2 at the point where the rising
a-t curve first crosses the 20g level, t2 at the point where
the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level, and t4 at
the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.
(iii) t2-t1 shall be not more than 3
milliseconds.
(iv) t3-t2 shall be not less than 25
milliseconds and not more than 30 milliseconds.
(v) t4-t3 shall be not more than 10
milliseconds.
(vi) The average deceleration between t2 and
t3 shall be not less than 20g and not more than 24g.
[[Page 11]]
(4) Allow the neck to flex without impact of the head or neck with
any object other than the pendulum arm.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977; 42
FR 12176, Mar. 3, 1977; 45 FR 40596, June 16, 1980]
Sec. 572.8 Thorax.
(a) The thorax consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M030
in Figure 1, and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA
150 M030.
(b) The thorax contains enough unobstructed interior space behind
the rib cage to permit the midpoint of the sternum to be depressed 2
inches without contact between the rib cage and other parts of the dummy
or its instrumentation, except for instruments specified in paragraph
(d)(7) of this section.
(c) When impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec. 572.11(a) at 14
fps and at 22 fps in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section, the
thorax shall resist with forces measured by the test probe of not more
than 1450 pounds and 2250 pounds, respectively, and shall deflect by
amounts not greater than 1.1 inches and 1.7 inches, respectively. The
internal hysteresis in each impact shall not be less than 50 percent and
not more than 70 percent.
(d) Test procedure: (1) With the dummy seated without back support
on a surface as specified in Sec. 572.11(i) and in the orientation
specified in Sec. 572.11(i), adjust the dummy arms and legs until they
are extended horizontally forward parallel to the midsagittal plane.
(2) Place the longitudinal center line of the test probe so that it
is 17.7 0.1 inches above the seating surface at impact.
(3) Align the test probe specified in Sec. 572.11(a) so that at
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(4) Adjust the dummy so that the surface area on the thorax
immediately adjacent to the projected longitudinal center line of the
test probe is vertical. Limb support, as needed to achieve and maintain
this orientation, may be provided by placement of a steel rod of any
diameter not less than one-quarter of an inch and not more than three-
eighths of an inch, with hemispherical ends, vertically under the limb
at its projected geometric center.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that its longitudinal
centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy's
midsagittal plane at the moment of impact.
(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
(7) Measure the horizontal deflection of the sternum relative to the
thoracic spine along the line established by the longitudinal centerline
of the probe at the moment of impact, using a potentiometer mounted
inside the sternum.
(8) Measure hysteresis by determining the ratio of the area between
the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the
area under the loading portion of the curve.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]
Sec. 572.9 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis.
(a) The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the assemblies
designated as numbers SA 150 M050 and SA 150 M060 in Figure 1 and
conform to the drawings subtended by these numbers.
(b) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by
an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from its
initial position in accordance with Figure 11 by the number of degrees
shown below at each specified force level, and straighten upon removal
of the force to within 12 degrees of its initial position in accordance
with Figure 11.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Force (6
Flexion (degrees) pounds)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0........................................................... 0
20.......................................................... 28
30.......................................................... 40
40.......................................................... 52
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Test procedure: (1) Assemble the thorax, lumbar spine, pelvic,
and upper leg assemblies (above the femur force transducers), ensuring
that all component surfaces are clean, dry, and untreated unless
otherwise specified, and attach them to the horizontal fixture
[[Page 12]]
shown in Figure 5 at the two link rod pins and with the mounting
brackets for the lumbar test fixtures illustrated in Figures 6 to 9.
(2) Attach the rear mounting of the pelvis to the pelvic instrument
cavity rear face at the four \1/4\" cap screw holes and attach the front
mounting at the femur axial rotation joint. Tighten the mountings so
that the pelvic-lumbar adapter is horizontal and adjust the femur
friction plungers at each hip socket joint to 240 inch-pounds torque.
(3) Flex the thorax forward 50 and then rearward as necessary to
return it to its initial position in accordance with Figure 11
unsupported by external means.
(4) Apply a forward force perpendicular to the thorax instrument
cavity rear face in the midsagittal plane 15 inches above the top
surface of the pelvic-lumbar adapter. Apply the force at any torso
deflection rate between .5 and 1.5 degrees per second up to 40 of
flexion but no further, continue to apply for 10 seconds that force
necessary to maintain 40 of flexion, and record the force with an
instrument mounted to the thorax as shown in Figure 5. Release all force
as rapidly as possible and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the
release.
(d) When the abdomen is subjected to continuously applied force in
accordance with paragraph (e) of this section, the abdominal force-
deflection curve shall be within the two curves plotted in Figure 10.
(e) Test procedure: (1) Place the assembled thorax, lumbar spine and
pelvic assemblies in a supine position on a flat, rigid, smooth, dry,
clean horizontal surface, ensuring that all component surfaces are
clean, dry, and untreated unless otherwise specified.
(2) Place a rigid cylinder 6 inches in diameter and 18 inches long
transversely across the abdomen, so that the cylinder is symmetrical
about the midsagittal plane, with its longitudinal centerline horizontal
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane at a point 9.2 inches above
the bottom line of the buttocks, measured with the dummy positioned in
accordance with Figure 11.
(3) Establish the zero deflection point as the point at which a
force of 10 pounds has been reached.
(4) Apply a vertical downward force through the cylinder at any rate
between 0.25 and 0.35 inches per second.
(5) Guide the cylinder so that it moves without significant lateral
or rotational movement.
[42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]
Sec. 572.10 Limbs.
(a) The limbs consist of the assemblies shown as numbers SA 150
M070, SA 150 M071, SA 150 M080, and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and conform
to the drawings subtended by these numbers.
(b) When each knee is impacted at 6.9 ft/sec. in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section, the maximum force on the femur shall be
not more than 2500 pounds and not less than 1850 pounds, with a duration
above 1000 pounds of not less than 1.7 milliseconds.
(c) Test procedure: (1) Seat the dummy without back support on a
surface as specified in Sec. 572.11(i) that is 17.3 0.2 inches above a
horizontal surface, oriented as specified in Sec. 572.11(i), and with
the hip joint adjustment at any setting between 1g and 2g. Place the
dummy legs in planes parallel to its midsagittal plane (knee pivot
centerline perpendicular to the midsagittal plane) and with the feet
flat on the horizontal surface. Adjust the feet and lower legs until the
lines between the midpoints of the knee pivots and the ankle pivots are
at any angle not less than 2 degrees and not more than 4 degrees rear of
the vertical, measured at the centerline of the knee pivots.
(2) Reposition the dummy if necessary so that the rearmost point of
the lower legs at the level one inch below the seating surface remains
at any distance not less than 5 inches and not more than 6 inches
forward of the forward edge of the seat.
(3) Align the test probe specified in Sec. 572.11(a) so that at
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 with the
longitudinal centerline of the femur.
(4) Impact the knee with the test probe moving horizontally and
parallel to the midsagittal plane at the specified velocity.
[[Page 13]]
(5) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7153, Feb. 7, 1977]
Sec. 572.11 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The test probe used for thoracic and knee impact tests is a
cylinder 6 inches in diameter that weighs 51.5 pounds including
instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right face that is rigid
and that has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.
(b) Accelerometers are mounted in the head on the horizontal
transverse bulkhead shown in the drawings subreferenced under assembly
No. SA 150 M010 in Figure 1, so that their sensitive axes intersect at a
point in the midsagittal plane 0.5 inches above the horizontal bulkhead
and 1.9 inches ventral of the vertical mating surface of the skull with
the skull cover. One accelerometer is aligned with its sensitive axis
perpendicular to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane and
with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 0.3 inches superior
to the axial intersection point. Another accelerometer is aligned with
its sensitive axis parallel to the horizontal bulkhead and perpendicular
to the midsagittal plane, and with its seismic mass center at any
distance up to 1.3 inches to the left of the axial intersection point
(left side of dummy is the same as that of man). A third accelerometer
is aligned with its sensitive axis parallel to the horizontal bulkhead
in the midsagittal plane, and with its seismic mass center at any
distance up to 1.3 inches dorsal to the axial intersection point.
(c) Accelerometers are mounted in the thorax by means of a bracket
attached to the rear vertical surface (hereafter ``attachment surface'')
of the thoracic spine so that their sensitive axes intersect at a point
in the midsagittal plane 0.8 inches below the upper surface of the plate
to which the neck mounting bracket is attached and 3.2 inches
perpendicularly forward of the surface to which the accelerometer
bracket is attached. One accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented
parallel to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane, with its
seismic mass center at any distance up to 1.3 inches inferior to the
intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. Another
accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented parallel to the attachment
surface and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with its seismic
mass center at any distance up to 0.2 inches to the right of the
intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. A third
accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented perpendicular to the
attachment surface in the midsagittal plane, with its seismic mass
center at any distance up to 1.3 inches dorsal to the intersection of
the sensitive axes specified above. Accelerometers are oriented with the
dummy in the position specified in Sec. 572.11(i).
(d) A force-sensing device is mounted axially in each femur shaft so
that the transverse centerline of the sensing element is 4.25 inches
from the knee's center of rotation.
(e) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of
SAE Recommended Practice J211a, December 1971, with channel classes as
follows:
(1) Head acceleration--Class 1000.
(2) Pendulum acceleration--Class 60.
(3) Thorax acceleration--Class 180.
(4) Thorax compression--Class 180.
(5) Femur force--Class 600.
(f) The mountings for sensing devices have no resonance frequency
within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel
class.
(g) Limb joints are set at 1g, barely restraining the weight of the
limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb
segment does not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.
(h) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 F to
78 F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after
exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than
4 hours.
(i) For the performance tests specified in Secs. 572.8, 572.9, and
572.10, the dummy is positioned in accordance with Figure 11 as follows:
[[Page 14]]
(1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, smooth, clean, dry,
horizontal, steel test surface whose length and width dimensions are not
less than 16 inches, so that the dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical
and centered on the test surface and the rearmost points on its lower
legs at the level of the test surface are at any distance not less than
5 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the forward edge of the
test surface.
(2) The pelvis is adjusted so that the upper surface of the lumbar-
pelvic adapter is horizontal.
(3) The shoulder yokes are adjusted so that they are at the midpoint
of their anterior-posterior travel with their upper surfaces horizontal.
(4) The dummy is adjusted so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders
and buttocks are tangent to a transverse vertical plane.
(5) The upper legs are positioned symmetrically about the
midsagittal plane so that the distance between the knee pivot bolt heads
is 11.6 inches.
(6) The lower legs are positioned in planes parallel to the
midsagittal plane so that the lines between the midpoint of the knee
pivots and the ankle pivots are vertical.
(j) The dummy's dimensions, as specified in drawing number SA 150
M002, are determined as follows:
(1) With the dummy seated as specified in paragraph (i) of this
section, the head is adjusted and secured so that its occiput is 1.7
inches forward of the transverse vertical plane with the vertical mating
surface of the skull with its cover parallel to the transverse vertical
plane.
(2) The thorax is adjusted and secured so that the rear surface of
the chest accelerometer mounting cavity is inclined 3 forward of
vertical.
(3) Chest and waist circumference and chest depth measurements are
taken with the dummy positioned in accordance with paragraphs (j) (1)
and (2) of this section.
(4) The chest skin and abdominal sac are removed and all following
measurements are made without them.
(5) Seated height is measured from the seating surface to the
uppermost point on the head-skin surface.
(6) Shoulder pivot height is measured from the seating surface to
the center of the arm elevation pivot.
(7) H-point locations are measured from the seating surface to the
center of the holes in the pelvis flesh covering in line with the hip
motion ball.
(8) Knee pivot distance from the backline is measured to the center
of the knee pivot bolt head.
(9) Knee pivot distance from floor is measured from the center of
the knee pivot bolt head to the bottom of the heel when the foot is
horizontal and pointing forward.
(10) Shoulder width measurement is taken at arm elevation pivot
center height with the centerlines between the elbow pivots and the
shoulder pivots vertical.
(11) Hip width measurement is taken at widest point of pelvic
section.
(k) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than
30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
(l) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified
in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.
[[Page 15]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.152
[[Page 16]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.153
[[Page 17]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.154
[[Page 18]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.155
[[Page 19]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.156
[[Page 20]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.157
[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7153, Feb. 7, 1977]
Subpart C_3-Year-Old Child
Source: 44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.15 General description.
(a) The dummy consists of the component assemblies specified in
drawing SA 103C 001, which are described in their entirety by means of
approximately 122 drawings and specifications
[[Page 21]]
and an Operation and Maintenance Manual, dated May 28, 1976. The
drawings and specifications are grouped by component assemblies under
the following thirteen headings:
SA 103C 010 Head Assembly
SA 103C 020 Neck Assembly
SA 103C 030 Torso Assembly
SA 103C 041 Upper Arm Assembly Left
SA 103C 042 Upper Arm Assembly Right
SA 103C 051 Forearm Hand Assembly Left
SA 103C 052 Forearm Hand Assembly Right
SA 103C 061Upper Leg Assembly Left
SA 103C 062 Upper Leg Assembly Right
SA 103C 071 Lower Leg Assembly Left
SA 103C 072 Lower Leg Assembly Right
SA 103C 081 Foot Assembly left
SA 103C 082 Foot Assembly Right.
(b) The drawings, specifications, and operation and maintenance
manual referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are
hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are
thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal
Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For
materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the
Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are
incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal
Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by
reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this
volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.
(c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for
examination in Docket 78-09, Room 5109, Docket Section, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC
20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc.,
1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The materials
are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.
(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout
the range of motion and also under simulated crash-impact conditions
there is no contact between metallic elements except for contacts that
exist under static conditions.
(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter
(Sec. 571.213).
(f) The patterns of all cast and molded parts for reproduction of
the molds needed in manufacturing of the dummies can be obtained on a
loan basis by manufacturers of the testes dummies, or others if need is
shown, from: Office of Vehicle Safety Standards, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC
20590.
[50 FR 25423, June 19, 1985]
Sec. 572.16 Head.
(a) The head consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 010 on
drawing No. SA 103C 001, and conforms to either--
(1) Each item specified on drawing SA 103C 002(B), sheet 8; or
(2) Each item specified on drawing SA 103C 002, sheet 8.
(b) When the head is impacted by a test probe specified in
Sec. 572.21(a)(1) at 7 fps, then the peak resultant acceleration
measured at the location of the accelerometer mounted in the headform
according to Sec. 572.21(b) is not less than 95g and not more than 118g.
(1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test is unimodal
at or above the 50g level, and lies at or above that level for
intervals:
(i) In the case of the head assembly specified in paragraph (a)(1)
of this section, not less than 1.3 milliseconds and not more than 2.0
milliseconds;
(ii) In the case of the head assembly specified in paragraph (a)(2)
of this section, not less than 2.0 milliseconds and not more than 3.0
milliseconds.
(2) The lateral acceleration vector does not exceed 7g.
(c) Test procedure. (1) Seat the dummy on a seating surface having a
back support as specified in Sec. 572.21(h) and orient the dummy in
accordance with Sec. 572.21(h) and adjust the joints of the limbs at any
setting between 1g and 2g, which just supports the limbs' weight when
the limbs are extended horizontally forward.
[[Page 22]]
(2) Adjust the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline is at
the forehead at the point of orthogonal intersection of the head
midsagittal plane and the transverse plane which is perpendicular to the
``Z'' axis of the head (longitudinal centerline of the skull anchor) and
is located 0.6 0.1 inches above the centers of the head center of
gravity reference pins and coincides within 2 degrees with the line made
by the intersection of horizontal and midsagittal planes passing through
this point.
(3) Adjust the dummy so that the surface area on the forehead
immediately adjacent to the projected longitudinal centerline of the
test probe is vertical.
(4) Impact the head with the test probe so that at the moment of
impact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(5) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
(6) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive
tests of the head.
[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 45 FR 43353, June 26, 1980, as amended at
45 FR 82267, Dec. 15, 1980; 55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]
Sec. 572.17 Neck.
(a)(1) The neck for use with the head assembly described in
Sec. 572.16(a)(1) consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 020 on
drawing No. SA 103C 001, conforms to each item specified on drawing No.
SA 103C 002(B), sheet 9.
(2) The neck for use with the head assembly described in
Sec. 572.16(a)(2) consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 020 on
drawing No. SA 103C 001, and conforms to each item specified on drawing
No. SA 103C 002, sheet 9.
(b) When the head-neck assembly is tested in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section, the head shall rotate in reference to the
pendulum's longitudinal centerline a total of 84 degrees 8 degrees
about its center of gravity, rotating to the extent specified in the
following table at each indicated point in time, measured from impact,
with the chordal displacement measured at its center of gravity. The
chordal displacement at time T is defined as the straight line distance
between (1) the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head center
of gravity at time zero, and (2) the position relative to the pendulum
arm of the head center of gravity at time T as illustrated by figure 3.
The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the
accelerometers mounted in the headform in accordance with Sec. 572.21(b)
shall not exceed 30g. The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the
head's center of gravity returns to the original zero time position
relative to the pendulum arm.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chordal
Time (ms) displacement
Rotation (degrees) (2 + (inches
.08T) 0.8)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0............................................. 0 0
30............................................ 21 2.2
60............................................ 36 4.3
Maximum....................................... 62 5.8
60............................................ 91 4.3
30............................................ 108 2.2
0............................................. 123 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Test procedure. (1) Mount the head and neck on a rigid pendulum
as specified in Figure 4, so that the head's midsagittal plane is
vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline. Mount the neck directly to the pendulum as
shown in Figure 15.
(2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height
such that the velocity at impact is 17.00 1.0 feet per second (fps),
measured at the center of the accelerometer specified in figure 4.
(3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time
pulse described as follows:
(i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.
(ii) Establish t1 at the point where the a-t curve first
crosses the 5g level, t2 at the point where the rising a-t
curve first crosses the 20g level, t3 at the point where the
decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level, and t4 at the
point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.
(iii) t2-t1, shall be not more than 4
milliseconds.
(iv) t3-t2, shall be not less than 18 and not
more than 21 milliseconds.
(v) t4-t3, shall be not more than 5
milliseconds.
[[Page 23]]
(vi) The average deceleration between t2 and
t3 shall be not less than 20g and not more then 34g.
(4) Allow the neck to flex without contact of the head or neck with
any object other than the pendulum arm.
(5) Allow a time period of at least 1 hour between successive tests
of the head and neck.
[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 45 FR 43353, June 26, 1980, as amended at
55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]
Sec. 572.18 Thorax.
(a) The thorax consists of the part of the torso shown in assembly
drawing SA 103C 001 by number SA 103C 030 and conforms to each of the
applicable drawings listed under this number on drawing SA 103C 002,
sheets 10 and 11.
(b) When impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec. 572.21(a) at 13
fps in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant
accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the chest
cavity in accordance with Sec. 572.21(c) shall be not less than 50g and
not more than 70g. The acceleration-time curve for the test shall be
unimodal at or above the 30g level and shall lie at or above the 30g
level for an interval not less than 2.5 milliseconds and not more than
4.0 milliseconds. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 5g.
(c) Test procedure. (1) With the dummy seated without back support
on a surface as specified in Sec. 572.21(h) and oriented as specified in
Sec. 572.21(h), adjust the dummy arms and legs until they are extended
horizontally forward parallel to the midsagittal plane. The joints of
the limbs are adjusted at any setting between 1g and 2g, which just
supports the limbs' weight when the limbs are extended horizontally
forward.
(2) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that it is 1.5 inches below the longitudinal centerline of the bolt that
attaches the top of the ribcage sternum to the thoracic spine box.
(3) Adjust the dummy so that the tangent plane at the surface on the
thorax immediately adjacent to the designated impact point is vertical
and parallel to the face of the test probe.
(4) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe to coincide
with the designated impact point and align the test probe so that at
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 degrees with the
line formed by intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes
passing through the designated impact point.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
impact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy midsagittal plane.
(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(7) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive
tests of the chest.
Sec. 572.19 Lumbar spine, abdomen and pelvis.
(a) The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the part of the
torso assembly shown by number SA 103C 030 on drawing SA 103C 001 and
conform to each of the applicable drawings listed under this number on
drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 10 and 11.
(b) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by
an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from its
initial position in accordance with Figure 18 of this subpart by 40
degrees at a force level of not less than 34 pounds and not more than 47
pounds, and straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of
its initial position.
(c) Test procedure. (1) The dummy with lower legs removed is
positioned in an upright seated position on a seat as indicated in
Figure 18, ensuring that all dummy component surfaces are clean, dry and
untreated unless otherwise specified.
(2) Attach the pelvis to the seating surface by a bolt C/328,
modified as shown in Figure 18, and the upper legs at the knee axial
rotation joints by the attachments shown in Figure 18. Tighten the
mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal and
adjust the femur ball-flange screws at each hip socket joint to 50 inch
pounds torque. Remove the head and
[[Page 24]]
the neck and install a cylindrical aluminum adapter 2.0 inches in
diameter and 2.80 inches long in place of the neck.
(3) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as
necessary to return to its initial position in accordance with Figure 18
unsupported by external means.
(4) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top
of the neck adapter, so that at 40 degrees of the lumbar spine flexion
the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box. Apply the
force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per
second up to 40 degrees of flexion but no further; continue to apply for
10 seconds the force necessary to maintain 40 degrees of flexion, and
record the highest applied force at that time. Release all force as
rapidly as possible and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the
release.
Sec. 572.20 Limbs.
The limbs consist of the assemblies shown on drawing SA 103C 001 as
Nos. SA 103C 041, SA 103C 042, SA 103C 051, SA 103C 052, SA 103C 061, SA
103C 062, SA 103C 071, SA 103C 072, SA 103C 081, SA 103C 082, and
conform to each of the applicable drawings listed under their respective
numbers of the drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 12 through 21.
Sec. 572.21 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a)(1) The test probe used for head and thoracic impact tests is a
cylinder 3 inches in diameter, 13.8 inches long, and weighing 10 lbs., 6
ozs. Its impacting end has a flat right face that is rigid and that has
an edge radius of 0.5 inches.
(2) The head and thorax assembly may be instrumented with a Type A
or Type C accelerometer.
(i) Type A accelerometer is defined in drawing SA-572 S1.
(ii) Type C accelerometer is defined in drawing SA-572 S2.
(b) Head accelerometers. Install one of the triaxial accelerometers
specified in Sec. 572.21(a)(2) on a mounting block located on the
horizontal transverse bulkhead as shown in the drawings subreferenced
under assembly SA 103C 010 so that the seismic mass centers of each
sensing element are positioned as specified in this paragraph, relative
to the head accelerometer reference point located at the intersection of
a line connecting the longitudinal centerlines of the transfer pins in
the side of the dummy head with the midsagittal plane of the dummy head.
(1) The sensing elements of the Type C triaxial accelerometer are
aligned as follows:
(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and
coincident with the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center
located 0.2 inches dorsal to, and 0.1 inches inferior to the head
accelerometer reference point.
(ii) Align the second sensitive axis with the horizontal plane,
perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center
located 0.1 inches inferior, 0.4 inches to the right of, and 0.9 inches
dorsal to the head accelerometer reference point.
(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the
midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located
0.1 inches inferior to, 0.6 inches dorsal to, and 0.4 inches to the
right of the head accelerometer reference point.
(iv) All seismic mass centers are positioned with 0.05 inches of
the specified locations.
(2) The sensing elements of the Type A triaxial accelerometer are
aligned as follows:
(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and
coincident with midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located
from 0.2 to 0.47 inches dorsal to, from 0.01 inches inferior to 0.21
inches superior, and from 0.0 to 0.17 inches left of the head
accelerometer reference point.
(ii) Align the second sensitive axis with the horizontal plane,
perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center
located 0.1 to 0.13 inches inferior to, 0.17 to 0.4 inches to the right
of, and 0.47 to 0.9 inches dorsal of the head accelerometer reference
point.
(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the
midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located
0.1 to 0.13 inches inferior to, 0.6 to 0.81 inches dorsal to, and from
0.17 inches left to 0.4 inches
[[Page 25]]
right of the head accelerometer reference point.
(c) Thorax accelerometers. Install one of the triaxial
accelerometers specified in Sec. 572.21(a)(2) on a mounting plate
attached to the vertical transverse bulkhead shown in the drawing
subreferenced under assembly No. SA 103C 030 in drawing SA 103C 001, so
that the seismic mass centers of each sensing element are positioned as
specified in this paragraph, relative to the thorax accelerometer
reference point located in the midsagital plane 3 inches above the top
surface of the lumbar spine, and 0.3 inches dorsal to the accelerometer
mounting plate surface.
(1) The sensing elements of the Type C triaxial accelerometer are
aligned as follows:
(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and
midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.2 inches to
the left of, 0.1 inches inferior to, and 0.2 inches ventral to the
thorax accelerometer reference point.
(ii) Align the second sensitive axis so that it is in the horizontal
transverse plane, and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the
seismic mass center located 0.2 inches to the right of, 0.1 inches
inferior to, and 0.2 inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer
reference point.
(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the
midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located
0.2 inches superior to, 0.5 inches to the right of, and 0.1 inches
ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference points.
(iv) All seismic mass centers shall be positioned within 0.05
inches of the specified locations.
(2) The sensing elements of the Type A triaxial accelerometer are
aligned as follows:
(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and
midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located from 0.2 inches
left to 0.28 inches right, from 0.5 to 0.15 inches inferior to, and from
0.15 to 0.25 inches ventral of the thorax accelerometer reference point.
(ii) Align the second sensitive axis so that it is in the horizontal
transverse plane and perpendicular to the midsagital plane, with the
seismic mass center located from 0.06 inches left to 0.2 inches right
of, from 0.1 inches inferior to 0.24 inches superior, and 0.15 to 0.25
inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference point.
(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the
midsagital and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located
0.15 to 0.25 inches superior to, 0.28 to 0.5 inches to the right of, and
from 0.1 inches ventral to 0.19 inches dorsal to the thorax
accelerometer reference point.
(d) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the dummy, and of
test apparatus specified by this part, are recorded in individual data
channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice
J211a, December 1971, with channel classes as follows:
(1) Head acceleration--Class 1000.
(2) Pendulum acceleration--Class 60.
(3) Thorax acceleration--Class 180.
(e) The mountings for accelerometers have no resonance frequency
less than cut-off 3 times the cut-off frequency of the applicable
channel class.
(f) Limb joints are set at the force between 1-2g, which just
supports the limbs' weight when the limbs are extended horizontally
forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2g
throughout the range of limb motion.
(g) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 F to
78 F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after
exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than
4 hours.
(h) For the performance tests specified in Secs. 572.16, 572.18, and
572.19, the dummy is positioned in accordance with Figures 16, 17, and
18 as follows:
(1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, clean, dry, horizontal
surface of teflon sheeting with a smoothness of 40 microinches and whose
length and width dimensions are not less than 16 inches, so that the
dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the test surface.
For head tests, the seat has a vertical back support whose top is 12.4
0.2 inches above the seating surface. The rear surfaces of the dummy's
shoulders and buttocks are touching the back support as
[[Page 26]]
shown in Figure 16. For thorax and lumbar spine tests, the seating
surface is without the back support as shown in Figures 17 and 18,
respectively.
(2) The shoulder yokes are adjusted so that they are at the midpoint
of their anterior-posterior travel with their upper surfaces horizontal.
(3) The dummy is adjusted for head impact and lumbar flexion tests
so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a
transverse vertical plane.
(4) The arms and legs are positioned so that their centerlines are
in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.
(i) The dummy's dimensions are specified in drawings No. SA 103C
002, sheets 22 through 26.
(j) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than
20 minutes unless otherwise specified.
(k) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as
specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.
[[Page 27]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.158
[[Page 28]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.159
[[Page 29]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.160
[[Page 30]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.161
[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979, as amended at 45 FR 82267, Dec. 15, 1980;
55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]
Subpart D_6-Month-Old Infant
Sec. 572.25 General description.
(a) The infant dummy is specified in its entirety by means of 5
drawings (No. SA 1001) and a construction manual, dated July 2, 1974,
which describe in detail the materials and the procedures involved in
the manufacturing of this dummy.
(b) The drawings, specifications, and construction manual referred
to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby
incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby
[[Page 31]]
made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has
approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject
to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the
Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A
notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a
convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are
listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the
Code of Federal Regulations.
(c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for
examination in Docket 78-09, Room 5109, Docket Section, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC,
20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc.,
1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The materials
are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.
(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter
(Sec. 571.213).
[50 FR 25424, June 19, 1985]
Subpart E_Hybrid III Test Dummy
Source: 51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.30 Incorporated materials.
(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation
that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by
reference. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the
materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change,
only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal
Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of
any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience
to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the
Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal
Regulations.
(b) The materials incorporated by reference are available for
examination in the general reference section of docket 74-14, Docket
Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Room 5109, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Copies may be obtained from
Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD
20705, Telephone (301) 210-5600, Facsimile (301) 419-5069, Attn. Mr. Jay
Wall. Drawings and specifications are also on file at the National
Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the
availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1996]
Sec. 572.31 General description.
(a) The Hybrid III 50th percentile size dummy consists of components
and assemblies specified in the Anthropomorphic Test Dummy drawing and
specifications package which consists of the following six items:
(1) The Anthropomorphic Test Dummy Parts List, dated June 26, 1998,
and containing 16 pages, and a Parts List Index, dated June 26, 1998,
containing 8 pages.
(2) A listing of Hybrid III Dummy Transducers-reference document
AGARD-AR-330, ``Anthropomorphic Dummies for Crash and Escape System
Testing'', Chapter 6, Table 6-2, North Atlantic Treaty Organization,
July, 1996.
(3) A General Motors Drawing Package identified by GM Drawing No.
78051-218, revision U, titled ``Hybrid III Anthropomorphic Test Dummy,''
dated August 30, 1998, the following component assemblies, and
subordinate drawings:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Drawing No. Revision
------------------------------------------------------------------------
78051-61X head assembly-complete, (May 20, 1978).............. (T)
78051-90 neck assembly-complete, dated May 20, 1978........... (A)
[[Page 32]]
78051-89 upper torso assembly-complete, dated May 20, 1978.... (K)
78051-70 lower torso assembly-complete, dated June 30, 1998, (F)
except for drawing No. 78051-55, ``Instrumentation Assembly-
Pelvic Accelerometer,'' dated August 2, 1979.................
86-5001-001 leg assembly-complete (LH), dated March 26, 1996.. (A)
86-5001-002 leg assembly-complete (RH), dated March 26, 1996.. (A)
78051-123 arm assembly-complete (LH), dated May 20, 1996...... (D)
78051-124 arm assembly-complete (RH), dated May 20, 1978...... (D)
78051-59 pelvic assembly-complete, dated June 30, 1998........ (G)
78051-60 pelvic structure-molded, dated June 30, 1998......... (E)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Disassembly, Inspection, Assembly and Limbs Adjustment
Procedures for the Hybrid III dummy, dated June 1998.
(5) Sign Convention for signal outputs--reference document SAE J1733
Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash
Testing'', dated 1994-12.
(6) Exterior dimensions of the Hybrid III dummy, dated July 15,
1986.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout
the range of motion and also under crash-impact conditions, there is no
contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under
static conditions.
(d) The weights, inertial properties and centers of gravity location
of component assemblies shall conform to those listed in drawing 78051-
338, revision S, titled ``Segment Weights, Inertial Properties, Center
of Gravity Location--Hybrid III,'' dated May 20, 1978 of drawing No.
78051-218.
(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in vehicle test specified in Standard No. 208 of this chapter
(Sec. 571.208).
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8764, Mar. 17, 1988; 57
FR 47010, Oct. 14, 1992; 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1996; 62 FR 27514, May
20, 1997; 63 FR 5747, Feb. 4, 1998; 63 FR 53851, Oct. 7, 1998]
Sec. 572.32 Head.
(a) The head consists of the assembly shown in drawing 78051-61X,
revision C, and conforms to each of the drawings subtended therein.
(b) When the head (Drawing number 78051-61X, titled ``head
assembly--complete,'' dated March 28, 1997 (Revision C) with six axis
neck transducer structural replacement (Drawing number 78051-383X,
Revision P, titled ``Neck Transducer Structural Replacement,'' dated
November 1, 1995) is dropped from a height of 14.8 inches in accordance
with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at
the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head in accordance
with Sec. 572.36(c) shall not be less than 225g, and not more than 275g.
The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal to the extent
that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse are less
than ten percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The lateral
acceleration vector shall not exceed 15g (zero to peak).
(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head assembly in a test environment
at any temperature between 66 degrees F to 78 degrees F and at a
relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours
prior to its application in a test.
(2) Clean the head's skin surface and the surface of the impact
plate with 1,1,1 Trichlorethane or equivalent.
(3) Suspend the head, as shown in Figure 19, so that the lowest
point on the forehead is 0.5 inches below the lowest point on the
dummy's nose when the midsagittal plane is vertical.
[[Page 33]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.162
(4) Drop the head from the specified height by means that ensure
instant release into a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate,
which is 2 inches thick and 2 feet square. The plate shall have a clean,
dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches (rms) and
not more than 80 microinches (rms).
(5) Allow at least 3 hours between successive tests on the same
head.
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 62 FR 27514, May 20, 1997]
[[Page 34]]
Sec. 572.33 Neck.
(a) The neck consists of the assembly shown in drawing 78051-90,
revision A and conforms to each of the drawings subtended therein.
(b) When the head and neck assembly (consisting of the parts 78051-
61X, revision C; -90, revision A; -84; -94; -98; -104, revision F; -303,
revision E; -305; -306; -307, revision X) which has a six axis neck
transducer (Drawing number C-1709, Revision D, titled ``Neck
transducer,'' dated February 1, 1993.) installed in conformance with
Sec. 572.36(d), is tested in accordance with paragraph (c) of this
section, it shall have the following characteristics:
(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure 20, shall rotate
between 64 degrees and 78 degrees, which shall occur between 57
milliseconds (ms) and 64 ms from time zero. In first rebound, the
rotation of Plane D shall cross 0 degrees between 113 ms and 128 ms.
(ii) The moment measured by the six axis neck transducer (drawing C-
1709, revision D) about the occipital condyles, referenced in Figure 20,
shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (lbs-ft) = My^0.058
x Fx, where My is the moment measured in lbs-ft by the ``Y'' axis
moment sensor of the six axis neck transducer and Fx is the force
measured in lbs by the ``X'' axis force sensor (Channel Class 600) of
the six axis neck transducer. The moment shall have a maximum value
between 65 lbs-ft and 80 lbs-ft occurring between 47ms and 58 ms, and
the positive moment shall decay for the first time to 0 lb-ft between 97
ms and 107 ms.
(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure 21, shall rotate
between 81 degrees and 106 degrees, which shall occur between 72 ms and
82 ms from time zero. In first rebound, rotation of Plane D shall cross
0 degrees between 147 ms and 174 ms.
(ii) The moment measured by the six axis neck transducer (drawing C-
1709, revision D) about the occipital condyles, referenced in Figure 21,
shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (lbs-ft) = My^0.058
x Fx, where My is the moment measured in lbs-ft by the ``Y'' axis
moment sensor of the six axis neck transducer and Fx is the force
measured in lbs by the ``X'' axis force sensor (Channel Class 600) of
the six axis neck transducer. The moment shall have a maximum value
between--39 lbs-ft and -59 lbs-ft, occurring between 65 ms and 79 ms,
and the negative moment shall decay for the first time to 0 lb-ft
between 120 ms and 148 ms.
[[Page 35]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY97.000
[[Page 36]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY97.001
(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the test material in a test environment
at any temperature between 69 degrees F to 72 degrees F and at a
relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours
prior to its application in a test.
(2) Torque the jamnut (78051-64) on the neck cable (78051-301,
revision E) to 1.0 lbs-ft .2 lbs-ft.
(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this
section, on a rigid pendulum as shown in Figure 22 so that the head's
midsagittal plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of
the pendulum's longitudinal axis.
[[Page 37]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR02JN11.011
(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height
such that the tangential velocity at the pendulum accelerometer
centerline at the instance of contact with the honeycomb is 23.0 ft/sec
0.4 ft/sec. for flexion testing and 19.9 ft/sec. 0.4 ft/sec. for
extension testing. The pendulum deceleration vs. time pulse for flexion
testing shall conform to the characteristics shown in Table A and the
decaying deceleration-time curve shall first cross 5g between
34 ms and 42 ms. The pendulum deceleration vs. time pulse for extension
testing shall conform to the characteristics shown in Table B and the
decaying deceleration-time curve shall cross 5g between 38 ms and 46 ms.
[[Page 38]]
Table A--Flexion Pendulum Deceleration vs. Time Pulse
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flexion
Time (ms) deceleration
level (g)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10........................................................ 22.50-27.50
20........................................................ 17.60-22.60
30........................................................ 12.50-18.50
Any other time above 30 ms................................ 29 maximum.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table B--Extension Pendulum Deceleration vs. Time Pulse
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Extension
Time (ms) deceleration
level (g)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10........................................................ 17.20-21.20
20........................................................ 14.00-19.00
30........................................................ 11.00-16.00
Any other time above 30 ms................................ 22 maximum.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(5) Allow the neck to flex without impact of the head or neck with
any object during the test.
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62
FR 27514, May 20, 1997; 76 FR 31864, June 2, 2011]
Sec. 572.34 Thorax.
(a) The thorax consists of the upper torso assembly in drawing
78051-89, revision K and shall conform to each of the drawings subtended
therein.
(b) When impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec. 572.36(a) at 22
fps 0.40 fps in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the
thorax of a complete dummy assembly (78051-218, revision U, without
shoes, shall resist with a force of 1242.5 pounds 82.5 pounds measured
by the test probe and shall have a sternum displacement measured
relative to spine of 2.68 inches 0.18 inches. The internal hysteresis
in each impact shall be more than 69% but less than 85%. The force
measured is the product of pendulum mass and deceleration.
(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the test dummy in an environment with a
relative humidity from 10% to 70% until the temperature of the ribs of
the test dummy have stabilized at a temperature between 69 degrees F and
72 degrees F.
(2) Seat the dummy without back and arm supports on a surface as
shown in Figure 23, and set the angle of the pelvic bone at 13 degrees
plus or minus 2 degrees, using the procedure described in S11.4.3.2 of
Standard No. 208 (Sec. 571.208 of this chapter).
[[Page 39]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.166
(3) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe so that it
is .5 .04 in. below the horizontal centerline of the No. 3 Rib
(reference drawing number 79051-64, revision A-M) as shown in Figure 23.
[[Page 40]]
(4) Align the test probe specified in Sec. 572.36(a) so that at
impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within .5 degree of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that the longitudinal
centerline of the test probe falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line
in the dummy midsagittal plane at the moment of impact.
(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
(7) Measure the horizontal deflection of the sternum relative to the
thoracic spine along the line established by the longitudinal centerline
of the probe at the moment of impact, using a potentiometer (ref.
drawing 78051-317, revision A) mounted inside the sternum as shown in
drawing 78051-89, revision I.
(8) Measure hysteresis by determining the ratio of the area between
the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the
area under the loading portion of the curve.
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62
FR 27518, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 53851, Oct. 7, 1998]
Sec. 572.35 Limbs.
(a) The limbs consist of the following assemblies: leg assemblies
86-5001-001, revision A and -002, revision A, and arm assemblies 78051-
123, revision D and -124, revision D, and shall conform to the drawings
subtended therein.
(b) Femur impact response. (1) When each knee of the leg assemblies
is impacted in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, at 6.9
ft/sec 0.10 ft/sec by the pendulum defined in Sec. 572.36(b), the peak
knee impact force, which is a product of pendulum mass and acceleration,
shall have a minimum value of not less than 1060 pounds and a maximum
value of not more than 1300 pounds.
(2) Test procedure. (i) The test material consists of leg assemblies
(86-5001-001, revision A) left and (-002, revision A) right with upper
leg assemblies (78051-46) left and (78051-47) right removed. The load
cell simulator (78051-319, revision A) is used to secure the knee cap
assemblies (79051-16, revision B) as shown in Figure 24.
(ii) Soak the test material in a test environment at any temperature
between 66 degrees F to 78 degrees F and at a relative humidity from 10%
to 70% for a period of at least four hours prior to its application in a
test.
(iii) Mount the test material with the leg assembly secured through
the load cell simulator to a rigid surface as shown in Figure 24. No
contact is permitted between the foot and any other exterior surfaces.
(iv) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe so that at
contact with the knee it is collinear within 2 degrees with the
longitudinal centerline of the femur load cell simulator.
(v) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral,
vertical or rotational movement at time zero.
(vi) Impact the knee with the test probe so that the longitudinal
centerline of the test probe at the instant of impact falls within .5
degrees of a horizontal line parallel to the femur load cell simulator
at time zero.
(vii) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the test
probe and the knee.
(c) Hip joint-femur flexion. (1) When each femur is rotated in the
flexion direction in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section,
the femur torque at 30 deg. rotation from its initial horizontal
orientation will not be more than 70 ft-lbf, and at 150 ft-lbf of torque
will not be less than 40 deg. or more than 50 deg.
(2) Test procedure. (i) The test material consists of the assembled
dummy, part No. 78051-218 (revision S) except that (1) leg assemblies
(86-5001-001 and 002) are separated from the dummy by removing the 3/8-
16 Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) (78051-99) but retaining the structural
assembly of the upper legs (78051-43 and -44), (2) the abdominal insert
(78051-52) is removed and (3) the instrument cover plate (78051-13) in
the pelvic bone is replaced by a rigid pelvic bone stabilizer insert
(Figure 25a) and firmly secured.
(ii) Seat the dummy on a rigid seat fixture (Figure 25) and firmly
secure it to the seat back by bolting the stabilizer insert and the
rigid support device (Figure 25b) to the seat back of the test fixture
(Figures 26 and 27) while
[[Page 41]]
maintaining the pelvis (78051-58) ``B'' plane horizontal.
(iii) Insert a lever arm into the femur shaft opening of the upper
leg structure assembly (78051-43/44) and firmly secure it using the 3/8-
16 socket head cap screws.
(iv) Lift the lever arm parallel to the midsagittal plane at a
rotation rate of 5 to 10 deg. per second while maintaining the \1/2\ in.
shoulder bolt longitudinal centerline horizontal throughout the range of
motion until the 150 ft-lbf torque level is reached. Record the torque
and angle of rotation of the femur.
(v) Operating environment and temperature are the same as specified
in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.167
[[Page 42]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.004
[[Page 43]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.005
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.006
[[Page 44]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.007
[[Page 45]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26DE96.008
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 61
FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1997; 63 FR 5748, Feb. 4, 1998]
Sec. 572.36 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The test probe used for thoracic impact tests is a 6 inch
diameter cylinder that weighs 51.5 pounds including instrumentation. Its
impacting end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge
radius of 0.5 inches. The test probe has an accelerometer mounted on the
end opposite from impact with its sensitive axis colinear to the
longitudinal centerline of the cylinder.
(b) Test probe used for the knee impact tests is a 3 inch diameter
cylinder that weights 11 pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting
end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge radius of
0.02 inches. The test probe has an accelerometer mounted on the end
opposite from impact with its sensitive axis colinear to
[[Page 46]]
the longitudinal centerline of the cylinder.
(c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions and response
characteristics specified in drawing 78051-136, revision A, or its
equivalent, and the location of their seismic mass as mounted in the
skull are shown in drawing C-1709, revision D.
(d) The six axis neck transducer shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing C-
1709, revision D and be mounted for testing as shown in Figures 20 and
21 of Sec. 572.33, and in the assembly drawing 78051-218, revision T.
(e) The chest accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
78051-136, revision A or its equivalent and be mounted as shown with
adaptor assembly 78051-116, revision D for assembly into 78051-218,
revision T.
(f) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing 78051-342, revision A or
its equivalent and be mounted in the chest deflection transducer
assembly 78051-317, revision A for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.
(g) The thorax and knee impactor accelerometers shall have the
dimensions and characteristics of Endevco Model 7231c or equivalent.
Each accelerometer shall be mounted with its sensitive axis colinear
with the pendulum's longitudinal centerline.
(h) The femur load cell shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing
78051-265 or its equivalent and be mounted in assemblies 78051-46 and -
47 for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.
(i) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are
recorded in individual data channels that conform to requirements of
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211 Mar95,
Instrumentation for Impact Tests, Parts 1 and 2. SAE J211 Mar95 sets
forth the following channel classes:
(1) Head acceleration--Class 1000
(2) Neck forces--Class 1000
(3) Neck moments--Class 600
(4) Neck pendulum acceleration--Class 60
(5) Thorax and thorax pendulum acceleration--Class 180
(6) Thorax deflection--Class 180
(7) Knee pendulum acceleration--Class 600
(8) Femur force--Class 600
(j) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity conform to the
sign convention shown in the document incorporated by Sec. 572.31(a)(5).
(k) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance
frequency within range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable
channel class.
(l) Limb joints are set at lg, barely restraining the weight of the
limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb
segment shall not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.
(m) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by period of not less than
30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
(n) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified
in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.
[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62
FR 27518, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 45965, Aug. 28, 1998]
Subpart F_Side Impact Dummy 50th Percentile Male
Source: 55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.40 Incorporated materials.
(a) The drawings, specifications, manual, and computer program
referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby
incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made
part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has
approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject
to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the
Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A
notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a
convenience
[[Page 47]]
to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the
Finding Aids Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of
Federal Regulations.
(b) The materials incorporated in this part by reference are
available for examination in the general reference section of Docket 79-
04, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, room
5109, 400 Seventh St., S.W., Washington, D.C., 20590, telephone (202)
366-4949. Copies may be obtained from Reprographic Technologies, 9000
Virginia Manor Rd., Suite 210, Beltsville, MD, 20705, Telephone (301)
419-5070, Fax (301) 419-5069.
[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]
Sec. 572.41 General description.
(a) The dummy consists of component parts and component assemblies
(SA-SID-M001, revision C, dated September 12, 1996, and SA-SID-M001A,
revision B, dated September 12, 1996), which are described in
approximately 250 drawings and specifications that are set forth in
Sec. 572.5(a) of this chapter with the following changes and additions
which are described in approximately 85 drawings and specifications
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.40):
(1) The head assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart
B (Sec. 572.6(a)) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under
drawing SA 150 M010 and drawings specified in SA-SID-M010, dated August
13, 1987.
(2) The neck assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart
B (Sec. 572.7(a)) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under
drawing SA 150 M020 and drawings shown in SA-SID-M010, dated August 13,
1987.
(3) The thorax assembly consists of the assembly shown as number
SID-053 and conforms to each applicable drawing subtended by number SA-
SID-M030 revision A, dated May 18, 1994.
(4) The lumbar spine consists of the assembly specified in subpart B
(Sec. 572.9(a)) and conforms to drawing SA 150 M050 and drawings
subtended by SA-SID-M050 revision B, dated September 12, 1996, including
the addition of Lumbar Spacers-Lower SID-SM-001 and Lumbar Spacers-Upper
SID-SM-002 (both dated May 12, 1994), and Washer 78051-243.
(5) The abdomen and pelvis consist of the assembly specified in
subpart B of this part (Sec. 572.9) and conform to the drawings
subtended by SA 150 M060, the drawings subtended by SA-SID-M060 revision
A, dated May 18, 1994, and the drawings subtended by SA-SID-087 sheet 1
revision H, dated May 18, 1994, and SA-SID-087 sheet 2 revision H.
(6) The lower limbs consist of the assemblies specified in subpart B
(Sec. 572.10) shown as SA 150 M080 and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and SA-
SID-M080 and SA-SID-M081, both dated August 13, 1987, and conform to the
drawings subtended by those numbers.
(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to the requirements of this subpart in every respect both
before and after being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard No
214 Sec. 571.214 of this chapter.
(c) Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures; external
dimensions and weight; and a dummy drawing list are set forth in the
Side Impact Dummy (SID) User's Manual, dated May 1994 except for pages
7, 20 and 23, and appendix A (consisting of replacement pages 7, 20 and
23) dated January 20, 1998 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.40).
[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994;
63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]
Sec. 572.42 Thorax.
(a) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (SA-SID-M001A
revision A, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.40), appropriately assembled for right or left side impact, is
impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec. 572.44(a) at 14 fps in
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak accelerations at
the location of the accelerometers mounted on the thorax in accordance
with Sec. 572.44(b) shall be:
(1) For the accelerometer at the top of the Rib Bar on the struck
side (LUR or RUR) not less than 37 g's and not more than 46 g's.
(2) For the accelerometer at the bottom of the Rib Bar on the struck
side
[[Page 48]]
(LLR or RLR) not less than 37 g's and not more than 46 g's.
(3) For the lower thoracic spine (T12) not less than 15 g's and not
more than 22 g's.
(b) Test Procedure. (1) Adjust the dummy legs as specified in
Sec. 572.44(f). Seat the dummy on a seating surface as specified in
Sec. 572.44(h) with the limbs extended horizontally forward.
(2) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the
lateral side of the chest at the intersection of the centerlines of the
third rib and the Rib Bar on the desired side of impact. This is the
left side if the dummy is to be used on the driver's side of the vehicle
and the right side if the dummy is to be used on the passenger side of
the vehicle. The probe's centerline is perpendicular to thorax's
midsagittal plane.
(3) Align the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline
coincides with the line formed by the intersection of the transverse and
frontal planes perpendicular to the chest's midsagittal plane passing
through the designated impact point.
(4) Position the dummy as specified in Sec. 572.44(h), so that the
thorax's midsagittal plane and tangential plane to the Hinge Mounting
Block (Drawing SID-034) are vertical.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
impact at the designated impact point, the probe's longitudinal
centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line perpendicular to
the dummy's midsagittal plane and passing through the designated impact
point.
(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(7) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive
tests of the chest.
[59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994]
Sec. 572.43 Lumbar spine and pelvis.
(a) When the pelvis of a fully assembled dummy (SA-SID-M001A
revision B, dated September 12, 1996, (incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.40) is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to
Sec. 572.44(a) at 14 fps in accordance with paragraph (b) of this
section, the peak acceleration at the location of the accelerometer
mounted in the pelvis cavity in accordance with Sec. 572.44(c) shall be
not less than 40g and not more than 60g. The acceleration-time curve for
the test shall be unimodal and shall lie at or above the + 20g level for
an interval not less than 3 milliseconds and not more than 7
milliseconds.
(b) Test Procedure. (1) Adjust the dummy legs as specified in
Sec. 572.44(f). Seat the dummy on a seating surface as specified in
Sec. 572.44(h) with the limbs extended horizontally forward.
(2) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the
lateral side of the pelvis at a point 3.9 inches vertical from the
seating surface and 4.8 inches ventral to a transverse vertical plane
which is tangent to the back of the dummy's buttocks.
(3) Align the test probe so that at impact its longitudinal
centerline coincides with the line formed by intersection of the
horizontal and vertical planes perpendicular to the midsagittal plane
passing through the designated impact point.
(4) Adjust the dummy so that its midsagittal plane is vertical and
the rear surfaces of the thorax and buttocks are tangent to a transverse
vertical plane.
(5) Impact the pelvis with the test probe so that at the moment of
impact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of the
line specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that it moves with no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(7) Allow a time period of at least 2 hours between successive tests
of the pelvis.
[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994;
63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]
Sec. 572.44 Instrumentation and test conditions.
(a) The test probe used for lateral thoracic and pelvis impact tests
is a 6 inch diameter cylinder that weighs 51.5 pounds including
instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right angle face that is
rigid and has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.
(b) Three accelerometers are mounted in the thorax for measurement
of
[[Page 49]]
lateral accelerations with each accelerometer's sensitive axis aligned
to be closely perpendicular to the thorax's midsagittal plane. The
accelerometers are mounted in the following locations:
(1) One accelerometer is mounted on the thorax to lumbar adaptor
(SID-005 revision F, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.40) with seismic mass center located 0.5 inches toward the
impact side, 0.1 inches upward and 1.86 inches rearward from the
reference point shown in Figure 30 in appendix A to subpart F of part
572. Maximum permissible variation of the seismic location must not
exceed 0.2 inches spherical radius.
(2) Two accelerometers are mounted, one on the top and the other at
the bottom part of the Rib Bar (SID-024) on the struck side. Their
seismic mass centers are at any distance up to .4 inches from a point on
the Rib Bar surface located on its longitudinal center line .75 inches
from the top for the top accelerometer and .75 inches from the bottom,
for the bottom accelerometer.
(c) One accelerometer is mounted in the pelvis for measurement of
the lateral acceleration with its sensitive axis perpendicular to the
pelvic midsagittal plane. The accelerometer is mounted on the rear wall
of the instrumentation cavity of the pelvis (SID-087 revision H, dated
May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.40). The
accelerometer's seismic mass with respect to the mounting bolt center
line is 0.9 inches up, 0.7 inches to the left for left side impact and
0.03 inches to the left for right side impact, and 0.5 inches rearward
from the rear wall mounting surface as shown in Figure 31 in appendix A
to subpart F of part 572. Maximum permissible variation of the seismic
location must not exceed 0.2 inches spherical radius.
(d) Instrumentation and sensors used must conform to the SAE J-211
(1980) recommended practice requirements (incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.40). The outputs of the accelerometers installed in the dummy
are then processed with the software for the Finite Impulse Response
(FIR) filter (FIR 100 software). The FORTRAN program for this FIR 100
software (FIR100 Filter Program, Version 1.0, July 16, 1990) is
incorporated by reference in this part (see Sec. 572.40). The data are
processed in the following manner:
(1) Analog data recorded in accordance with SAE J-211 (1980)
recommended practice channel class 1000 specification.
(2) Filter the data with a 300 Hz, SAE Class 180 filter;
(3) Subsample the data to a 1600 Hz sampling rate;
(4) Remove the bias from the subsampled data, and
(5) Filter the data with the FIR100 Filter Program (Version 1.0,
July 16, 1990), which has the following characteristics--
(i) Passband frequency, 100 Hz.
(ii) Stopband frequency, 189 Hz.
(iii) Stopband gain, ^50 db.
(iv) Passband ripple, 0.0225 db.
(e) The mountings for the spine, rib and pelvis accelerometers shall
have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency
range of the applicable channel class.
(f) Limb joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1-2
g's, which just supports the limbs' weight when the limbs are extended
horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not
exceed 2 g's throughout the range of limb motion.
(g) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 F to
78 F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after
exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than
4 hours.
(h) For the performance of tests specified in Secs. 572.42 and
572.43, the dummy is positioned as follows:
(1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, clean, dry, horizontal
smooth aluminum surface whose length and width dimensions are not less
than 16 inches, so that the dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and
centered on the test surface. The dummy's torso is positioned to meet
the requirements of Sec. 572.42 and Sec. 572.43. The seating surface is
without the back support and the test dummy is positioned so that the
dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the seat surface.
(2) The legs are positioned so that their centerlines are in planes
parallel to the midsagittal plane.
[[Page 50]]
(3) Performance pre-tests of the assembled dummy are separated in
time by a period of not less than 20 minutes unless otherwise specified.
(4) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as
specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.
[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 47011, Sept. 17, 1991;
59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994]
[[Page 51]]
Sec. Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 572--Figures
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.168
[[Page 52]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14OC94.001
[59 FR 52092, Oct. 14, 1994]
[[Page 53]]
Subparts G-H [Reserved]
Subpart I_6-Year-Old Child
Source: 56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.70 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in Secs. 572.71(a)
and 572.71(b) are hereby incorporated in subpart I by reference. These
materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the
Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in
accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the
materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and
Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of
this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://
www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
(b) The incorporated material is available as follows:
(1) Drawing number SA 106 C001 sheets 1 through 18, and the drawings
listed in the parts lists described on sheets 8 through 17, are
available from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Rd.,
Beltsville, MD 20705, Telephone (301) 210-5600, Fax (301) 210-5607.
(2) A User's Manual entitled, ``Six-Year-Old Size Child Test Dummy
SA106C,'' October 28, 1991, is available from Reprographic Technologies
at the address in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211, Instrumentation for Impact Test,
June 1988, is available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.,
400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.
[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44226, Aug. 20, 1997]
Sec. 572.71 General description.
(a) The representative 6-year-old dummy consists of a drawings and
specifications package that contains the following materials:
(1) Technical drawings, specifications, and the parts list package
shown in SA 106C 001, sheets 1 through 18, rereleased July 11, 1997;
(2) A user's manual entitled, ``Six-Year-Old Size Child Test Dummy
SA106C,'' October 28, 1991.
(b) The dummy is made up of the component assemblies set out in
Table A:
Table A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Assembly drawing No. Drawing title Listed on drawing No. Revision
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SA 106C 010........................ Head Assembly......... SA 106C 001, sheet 8.. A
SA 106C 020........................ Neck Assembly......... SA 106C 001, sheet 9.. A
SA 106C 030........................ Thorax Assembly....... SA 106C 001, sheet 10. C
SA 106C 030........................ Thorax Assembly....... SA 106C 001, sheet 11. D
SA 106C 041........................ Arm Assembly (right).. SA 106C 001, sheet 14. A
SA 106C 042........................ Arm Assembly (left)... SA 106C 001, sheet 15. A
SA 106C 050........................ Lumbar Spine Assembly. SA 106C 001, sheet 12. A
SA 106C 060........................ Pelvis Assembly....... SA 106C 001, sheet 13. A
SA 106C 071........................ Leg Assembly (right).. SA 106C 001, sheet 16. A
SA 106C 072........................ Leg Assembly (left)... SA 106C 001, sheet 17. A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated
crash-impact conditions.
(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after its use in
any test similar to those specified in Standard 213, Child Restraint
Systems.
[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44226, Aug. 20, 1997]
Sec. 572.72 Head assembly and test procedure.
(a) Head assembly. The head consists of the assembly designated as
SA 106
[[Page 54]]
010 on drawing No. SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conforms to each drawing
listed on SA 106C 001, sheet 8.
(b) Head assembly impact response requirements. When the head is
impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec. 572.77(a)(1) at 7 feet per
second (fps) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this
section, then the resultant head acceleration measured at the location
of the accelerometer installed in the headform according to
Sec. 577.77(b) is not less than 130g and not more than 160g.
(1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test is unimodal
at or above the 50g level, and lies at or above that level for an
interval not less than 1.0 and not more than 2.0 milliseconds.
(2) The lateral acceleration vector does not exceed 5g.
(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as
follows:
(1) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface having a back
support as specified in Sec. 572.78(c), and adjust the joints of the
limbs at any setting (between 1g and 2g) which just supports the limbs'
weight when the limbs are extended horizontally and forward.
(2) Adjust the test probe so that its longitudinal center line is--
(i) At the forehead at the point of orthogonal intersection of the
head midsagittal plane and the transverse plane which is perpendicular
to the Z axis of the head as shown in Figure 40;
(ii) Located 2.7 0.1 inches below the top of the head measured
along the Z axis, and;
(iii) Coincides within 2 degrees with the line made by the
intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes passing through
this point.
(3) Impact the head with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(4) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
(5) Allow at least 60 minutes between successive head tests.
Sec. 572.73 Neck assembly and test procedure.
(a) Neck assembly. The neck consists of the assembly designated as
SA 106C 020 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conforms to each
drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheet 9.
(b) Neck assembly impact response requirements. When the head-neck
assembly (SA 106C 010 and SA 106C 020) is tested according to the test
procedure in Sec. 572.73(c), the head:
(1) Shall rotate, while translating in the direction of the pendulum
preimpact flight, in reference to the pendulum's longitudinal center
line a total of 78 degrees 6 degrees about the head's center of
gravity; and
(2) Shall rotate to the extent specified in Table B at each
indicated point in time, measured from time of impact, with the chordal
displacement measured at the head's center of gravity.
(i) Chordal displacement at time ``T'' is defined as the straight
line distance between the position relative to the pendulum arm of the
head's center of gravity at time ``zero;'' and the position relative to
the pendulum arm of the head's center of gravity at time T as
illustrated by Figure 3 in Sec. 572.11.
(ii) The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the
accelerometers mounted in the headform according to Sec. 572.77(b) shall
not exceed 30g.
Table B
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chordal
Rotation (degrees) Time (ms) (2 displacement
+ .08T) (inches) 0.8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0....................................... 0 0
30...................................... 26 2.7
60...................................... 44 4.3
Maximum................................. 68 5.8
60...................................... 101 4.4
30...................................... 121 2.4
0....................................... 140 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the head's center
of gravity returns to the original ``zero'' time position relative to
the pendulum arm.
(c) Neck test procedure. The test procedure for the neck is as
follows:
(1) Mount the head and neck assembly on a rigid pendulum as
specified in Sec. 572.21, Figure 15, so that the head's midsagittal
plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the
pendulum's longitudinal center line. Attach the neck directly to the
pendulum as shown in Sec. 572.21, Figure 15.
[[Page 55]]
(2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height
such that the velocity at impact is 17.00 1.0 fps, measured at the
center of the accelerometer specified in Sec. 572.21, Figure 15.
(3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time
pulse described as follows:
(i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.
(ii) Establish t1 at the point where the rising a-t curve
first crosses the 5g level; t2 at the point where the rising
a-t curve first crosses the 20g level; t3 at the point where
the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level; and t4 at
the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.
(iii) t2^t1 shall not be more than 3
milliseconds.
(iv) t3^t2 shall not be more than 22
milliseconds, and not less than 19 milliseconds.
(v) t4^t3 shall not be more than 6
milliseconds.
(vi) The average deceleration between t2 and
t3 shall not be more than 26g, or less than 22g.
(4) Allow the neck to flex without the head or neck contacting any
object other than the pendulum arm.
(5) Allow at least 60 minutes between successive tests.
[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 4086, Feb. 3, 1992]
Sec. 572.74 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) Thorax assembly. The thorax consists of the part of the torso
assembly designated as SA 106C 030 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2,
Revision A, and conforms to each applicable drawing on SA 106C 001 sheet
10, Revision C (including Drawing number 6C-1610-1 thru -4, Revision A,
titled ``Screw Button Head Socket'', dated September 30, 1996, and
Drawing number 6C-1021, Revision B, titled ``Ballast, 6 Yr. Thoraxc (for
7267A)'', dated September 24, 1996), and sheet 11, Revision D (including
Drawing number SA 6C-909, Revision A, titled ``Cover-chest
Accelerometer'', dated September 21, 1996, and Drawing number 6C-1000-1,
Revision C, titled ``Sternum Thoracic Weld Ass'y.'', dated September 24,
1996).
(b) Thorax assembly requirements. When the thorax is impacted by a
test probe conforming to Sec. 572.77(a) to 20 0.3 fps according to the
test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant
accelerations at the accelerometers mounted in the chest cavity
according to Sec. 572.77(c) shall not be less than 43g and not more than
53g.
(1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test shall be
unimodal at or above the 30g level, and shall lie at or above that level
for an interval not less than 4 milliseconds and not more than 6
milliseconds.
(2) The lateral accelerations shall not exceed 5g.
(c) Thorax test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax is as
follows:
(1) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back
support as specified in Sec. 572.78(c), and adjust the joints of the
limbs at any setting (between 1g and 2g) which just supports the limbs'
weight when the limbs are extended horizontally and forward, parallel to
the midsagittal plane.
(2) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that the impact point is 2.25 inches below the longitudinal center of
the clavicle retainer screw, and adjust the dummy so that the plane that
bisects the No. 3 rib into upper and lower halves is horizontal 1
degree.
(3) Place the longitudinal center line of the test probe so that it
coincides with the designated impact point, and align the test probe so
that at impact, the probe's longitudinal center line coincides (within 2
degrees) with the line formed at the intersection of the horizontal and
midsagittal planes and passing through the designated impact point.
(4) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
(6) Allow at least 30 minutes between successive tests.
[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 60 FR 2897, Jan. 12, 1995, 62
FR 44227, Aug. 20, 1997]
[[Page 56]]
Sec. 572.75 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly and test
procedure.
(a) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly. The lumbar spine,
abdomen, and pelvis consist of the part of the torso assembly designated
as SA 106C 50 and 60 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conform to
each applicable drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheets 12 and 13.
(b) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly response
requirements. When the lumbar spine is subjected to a force continuously
applied according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this
section, the lumbar spine assembly shall--
(1) Flex by an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to
rotate from the torso's initial position, as defined in (c)(3), by 40
degrees at a force level of not less that 46 pounds and not more than 52
pounds, and
(2) Straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of its
initial position when the force is removed.
(c) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis test procedure. The test
procedure for the lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis is as follows:
(1) Remove the dummy's head-neck assembly, arms, and lower legs,
clean and dry all component surfaces, and seat the dummy upright on a
seat as specified in Figure 42.
(2) Adjust the dummy by--
(i) Tightening the femur ballflange screws at each hip socket joint
to 50 inch-pounds torque;
(ii) Attaching the pelvis to the seating surface by a bolt D/605 as
shown in Figure 42.
(iii) Attaching the upper legs at the knee joints by the attachments
shown in drawing Figure 42.
(iv) Tightening the mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining
surface is horizontal; and
(v) Removing the head and neck, and installing a cylindrical
aluminum adapter (neck adapter) of 2.0 inches diameter and 2.60 inches
length as shown in Figure 42.
(3) The initial position of the dummy's torso is defined by the
plane formed by the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks which is
three to seven degrees forward of the transverse vertical plane.
(4) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as
necessary to return the dummy to its initial torso position, unsupported
by external means.
(5) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top
of the neck adapter so that when the lumbar spine flexion is 40 degrees,
the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box.
(i) Apply the force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5
degrees per second, up to 40 degrees of flexion.
(ii) For 10 seconds, continue to apply a force sufficient to
maintain 40 degrees of flexion, and record the highest applied force
during the 10 second period.
(iii) Release all force as rapidly as possible, and measure the
return angle 3 minutes after the release.
Sec. 572.76 Limbs assembly and test procedure.
(a) Limbs assembly. The limbs consist of the assemblies designated
as SA 106C 041, SA 106C 042, SA 106C 071, and SA 106C 072, on drawing
No. SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conform to each applicable drawing listed
on SA 106C 001, sheets 14 through 17.
(b) Limbs assembly impact response requirement. When each knee is
impacted at 7.0 0.1 fps, according to paragraph (c) of this section,
the maximum force on the femur shall not be more than 1060 pounds and
not less than 780 pounds, with a duration above 400 pounds of not less
than 0.8 milliseconds.
(c) Limbs test procedure. The test procedure for the limbs is as
follows:
(1) Seat and orient the dummy without back support on a seating
surface that is 11 0.2 inches above a horizontal (floor) surface as
specified in Sec. 572.78(c).
(i) Orient the dummy as specified in Figure 43 with the hip joint
adjustment at any setting between 1g and 2g.
(ii) Place the dummy legs in a plane parallel to the dummy's
midsagittal plane with the knee pivot center line perpendicular to the
dummy's midsagittal plane, and with the feet flat on the horizontal
(floor) surface.
(iii) Adjust the feet and lower legs until the line between the
midpoint of
[[Page 57]]
each knee pivot and each ankle pivot is within 2 degrees of the
vertical.
(2) If necessary, reposition the dummy so that at the level one inch
below the seating surface, the rearmost point of the dummy's lower legs
remains not less than 3 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the
forward edge of the seat.
(3) Align the test probe specified in Sec. 572.77(a) with the
longitudinal center line of the femur force gauge, so that at impact,
the probe's longitudinal center line coincides with the sensor's
longitudinal center line within 2 degrees.
(4) Impact the knee with the test probe moving horizontally and
parallel to the midsagittal plane at the specified velocity.
(5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
Sec. 572.77 Instrumentation.
(a)(1) Test probe. For the head, thorax, and knee impact test, use a
test probe that is rigid, of uniform density and weighs 10 pounds and 6
ounces, with a diameter of 3 inches; a length of 13.8 inches; and an
impacting end that has a rigid flat right face and edge radius of 0.5
inches.
(2) The head and thorax assembly may be instrumented either with a
Type A or Type B accelerometer.
(i) Type A accelerometer is defined in drawing SA 572 S1.
(ii) Type B accelerometer is defined in drawing SA 572 S2.
(b) Head accelerometers. (1) Install accelerometers in the head as
shown in drawing SA 106C 001 sheet 1 using suitable spacers or adaptors
as needed to affix them to the horizontal transverse bulkhead so that
the sensitive axes of the three accelerometers intersect at the point in
the midsagittal plane located 0.4 inches below the intersection of a
line connecting the longitudinal center lines of the roll pins in either
side of the dummy's head with the head's midsagittal plane.
(2) The head has three orthogonally mounted accelerometers aligned
as follows:
(i) Align one accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is
perpendicular to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane.
(ii) Align the second accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is
parallel to the horizontal bulkhead, and perpendicular to the
midsagittal plane.
(iii) Align the third accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is
parallel to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane.
(iv) The seismic mass center for any of these accelerometers may be
at any distance up to 0.4 inches from the axial intersection point.
(c) Thoracic accelerometers. (1) Install accelerometers in the
thoracic assembly as shown in drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 1, using
suitable spacers and adaptors to affix them to the frontal surface of
the spine assembly so that the sensitive axes of the three
accelerometers intersect at a point in the midsagittal plane located
0.95 inches posterior of the spine mounting surface, and 0.55 inches
below the horizontal centerline of the two upper accelerometer mount
attachment hole centers.
(2) The sternum-thoracic assembly has three orthogonally mounted
accelerometers aligned as follows:
(i) Align one accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is parallel
to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane.
(ii) Align the second accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is
parallel to the attachment surface, and perpendicular to the midsagittal
plane.
(iii) Align the third accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is
perpendicular to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane.
(iv) The seismic mass center for any of these accelerometers may be
at any distance up to 0.4 inches of the axial intersection point.
(d) Femur-sensing device. Install a force-sensing device SA 572-S10
axially in each femur shaft as shown in drawing SA 106C 072 and secure
it to the femur assembly so that the distance measured between the
center lines of two attachment bolts is 3.00 inches.
(e) Limb joints. Set the limb joints at lg, barely restraining the
limb's weight when the limb is extended horizontally, and ensure that
the force required to move the limb segment does not exceed 2g
throughout the limb's range of motion.
[[Page 58]]
(f) Recording outputs. Record the outputs of acceleration and force-
sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus
specified in this part, in individual channels that conform to the
requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211, October 1988, with
channel classes as set out in the following table C.
Table C
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Device Channel
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head acceleration......................... Class 1000
Pendulum acceleration..................... Class 60
Thorax acceleration....................... Class 180
Femur-force............................... Class 600
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency
within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel
class.
Sec. 572.78 Performance test conditions.
(a) Conduct performance tests at any temperature from 66 F to 78
F, and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent, but only
after having first exposed the dummy to these conditions for a period of
not less than 4 hours.
(b) For the performance tests specified in Sec. 572.72 (head),
Sec. 572.74 (thorax), Sec. 572.75 (lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis),
and Sec. 572.76 (limbs), position the dummy as set out in paragraph (c)
of this section.
(c) Place the dummy on a horizontal seating surface covered by
teflon sheeting so that the dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical and
centered on the test surface.
(1) The seating surface is flat, rigid, clean, and dry, with a
smoothness not exceeding 40 microinches, a length of at least 16 inches,
and a width of at least 16 inches.
(2) For head impact tests, the seating surface has a vertical back
support whose top is 12.4 0.2 inches above the horizontal surface, and
the rear surfaces of the dummy's back and buttocks touch the back
support as shown in Figure 40.
(3) For the thorax, lumbar spine, and knee tests, the horizontal
surface is without a back support as shown in Figure 41 (for the
thorax); Figure 42 (for the lumbar spine); and Figure 43 (for the knee).
(4) Position the dummy's arms and legs so that their center lines
are in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.
(5) Adjust each shoulder yoke so that with its upper surface
horizontal, a yoke is at the midpoint of its anterior-posterior travel.
(6) Adjust the dummy for head and knee impact tests so that the rear
surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a transverse
vertical plane.
(d) The dummy's dimensions are specified in drawings SA 106C 001,
sheet 3, Revision A, July 11, 1997, and sheets 4 through 6.
(e) Unless otherwise specified in this regulation, performance tests
of the same component, segment, assembly or fully assembled dummy are
separated in time by a period of not less than 20 minutes.
(f) Unless otherwise specified in this regulation, the surfaces of
the dummy components are not painted.
[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44227, Aug. 20, 1997]
Sec. Figures to Subpart I of Part 572
[[Page 59]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.169
[[Page 60]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.170
[60 FR 2898, Jan. 12, 1995]
[[Page 61]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.171
[[Page 62]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.172
Subpart J_9-Month Old Child
Source: 56 FR 41080, Aug. 19, 1991, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.80 Incorporated materials.
The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec. 572.81(a) that
are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in
[[Page 63]]
this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this
regulation. The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be obtained from Rowley-Scher
Reprographics, Inc., 1216 K Street, NW., Washington, DC 20002, telephone
(202) 628-6667. Copies are available for inspection in the general
reference section of Docket 89-11, Docket Section, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, room 5109, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA,
call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/
code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
Sec. 572.81 General description.
(a) The dummy consists of: (1) The assembly specified in drawing LP
1049/A, March 1979, which is described in its entirety by means of
approximately 54 separate drawings and specifications, 1049/1 through
1049/54; and (2) a parts list LP 1049/0 (5 sheets); and (3) a report
entitled, ``The TNO P3/4 Child Dummy Users Manual,'' January 1979,
published by Instituut voor Wegtransportmiddelen TNO.
(b) Adjacent dummy segments are joined in a manner such that
throughout the range of motion and also under simulated crash-impact
conditions there is no contact between metallic elements except for
contacts that exist under static conditions.
(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in dynamic tests such as that specified in Standard No. 213 of this
chapter (Sec. 571.213).
Sec. 572.82 Head.
The head consists of the assembly shown in drawing LP 1049/A and
conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed under LP 1049/0
through 54.
Sec. 572.83 Head-neck.
The head-neck assembly shown in drawing 1049/A consists of parts
specified as items 1 through 16 and in item 56.
Sec. 572.84 Thorax.
The thorax consists of the part of the torso shown in assembly
drawing LP 1049/A and conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed
under LP 1049/0 through 54.
Sec. 572.85 Lumbar spine flexure.
(a) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with
paragraph (b) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by
an amount that permits the thoracic spine to rotate from its initial
position in accordance with Figure No. 18 of Sec. 572.21 (49 CFR part
572) by 40 degrees at a force level of not less than 18 pounds and not
more than 22 pounds, and straighten upon removal of the force to within
5 degrees of its initial position.
(b) Test procedure. (1) The lumbar spine flexure test is conducted
on a dummy assembly as shown in drawing LP 1049/A, but with the arms
(which consist of parts identified as items 17 through 30) and all head-
neck parts (identified as items 1 through 13 and 59 through 63),
removed.
(2) With the torso assembled in an upright position, adjust the
lumbar cable by tightening the adjustment nut for the lumbar vertebrae
until the spring is compressed to \2/3\ of its unloaded length.
(3) Position the dummy in an upright seated position on a seat as
indicated in Figure No. 18 of Sec. 572.21 (lower legs do not need to be
removed, but must be clamped firmly to the seating surface), ensuring
that all dummy component surfaces are clean, dry and untreated unless
otherwise specified.
(4) Firmly affix the dummy to the seating surface through the pelvis
at the hip joints by suitable clamps that also prevent any relative
motion with respect to the upper legs during the test in
Sec. 572.65(c)(3) of this part. Install a pull attachment at the neck to
torso juncture as shown in Figure 18 of Sec. 572.21.
(5) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as
necessary to return it to its initial position.
(6) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top
of the
[[Page 64]]
neck adapter so that at 40 degrees of the lumbar spine flexion the
applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box. Apply the
force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per
second up to 40 degrees of flexion but no further; maintain 40 degrees
of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during
that time. Release all force as rapidly as possible and measure the
return angle three minutes after release.
Sec. 572.86 Test conditions and dummy adjustment.
(a) With the complete torso on its back lying on a horizontal
surface and the neck assembly mounted and shoulders on the edge of the
surface, adjust the neck such that the head bolt is lowered 0.40 0.05
inches (10 1 mm) after a vertically applied load of 11.25 pounds (50 N)
applied to the head bolt is released.
(b) With the complete torso on its back with the adjusted neck
assembly as specified in Sec. 572.66(a), and lying on a horizontal
surface with the shoulders on the edge of the surface, mount the head
and tighten the head bolt and nut firmly, with the head in horizontal
position. Adjust the head joint at the force between 1-2g, which just
supports the head's weight.
(c) Using the procedures described below, limb joints are set at the
force between 1-2g, which just supports the limbs' weight when the limbs
are extended horizontally forward:
(1) With the complete torso lying with its front down on a
horizontal surface, with the hip joint just over the edge of the
surface, mount the upper leg and tighten hip joint nut firmly. Adjust
the hip joint by releasing the hip joint nut until the upper leg just
starts moving.
(2) With the complete torso and upper leg lying with its front up on
a horizontal surface, with the knee joint just over the edge of the
surface, mount the lower leg and tighten knee joint firmly. Adjust the
knee joint by releasing the knee joint nut until the lower leg just
starts moving.
(3) With the torso in an upright position, mount the upper arm and
tighten firmly the adjustment bolts for the shoulder joint with the
upper arm placed in a horizontal position. Adjust the shoulder joint by
releasing the shoulder joint nut until the upper arm just starts moving.
(4) With the complete torso in an upright position and upper arm in
a vertical position, mount the forearm in a horizontal position and
tighten the elbow hinge bolt and nut firmly. Adjust the elbow joint nut
until the forearm just starts moving.
(d) With the torso assembled in an upright position, the adjustment
nut for the lumbar vertebrae is tightened until the spring is compressed
to \2/3\ of its unloaded length.
(e) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 to 78
degrees F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent
after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less
than four hours.
(f) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than
20 minutes unless otherwise specified.
(g) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as
specified in the part or in drawings incorporated by this part.
Subpart K_Newborn Infant
Source: 58 FR 3232, Jan. 8, 1993, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.90 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec. 572.91(a)
are hereby incorporated in subpart K by reference. These materials are
thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal
Register approved that materials incorporated by reference in accordance
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be
inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, SW., room 5109,
Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA,
call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/
code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
[[Page 65]]
(b) The incorporated material is available as follows:
(1) Drawing numbers 126-0000 through 126-0015 (sheets 1 through 3),
126-0017 through 126-0027, and a parts list entitled ``Parts List for
CAMI Newborn Dummy,'' are available from Reprographic Technologies, 1111
14th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20005. (202) 628-6667.
(2) A construction manual entitled, ``Construction of the Newborn
Infant Dummy'' (July 1992) is available from Reprographic Technologies
at the address in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
Sec. 572.91 General description.
(a) The representative newborn infant dummy consists of a drawings
and specifications package that contains the following materials:
(1) Drawing numbers 126-0000 through 126-0015 (sheets 1 through 3),
126-0017 through 126-0027, and a parts list entitled ``Parts List for
CAMI Newborn Dummy''; and,
(2) A construction manual entitled, ``Construction of the Newborn
Infant Dummy'' (July 1992).
(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in dynamic tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter
(Sec. 571.213).
Subpart L_Free Motion Headform
Source: 60 FR 43058, Aug. 18, 1995, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.100 Incorporation by Reference.
(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in Sec. 572.101 are
hereby incorporated in subpart L by reference. These materials are
thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal
Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be
inspected at NHTSA's Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., room
5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
(b) The incorporated material is available as follows:
(1) Drawing number 92041-001, ``Head Form Assembly,'' (November 30,
1992); drawing number 92041-002, ``Skull Assembly,'' (November 30,
1992); drawing number 92041-003, ``Skull Cap Plate Assembly,'' (November
30, 1992); drawing number 92041-004, ``Skull Cap Plate,'' (November 30,
1992); drawing number 92041-005, ``Threaded Pin,'' (November 30, 1992);
drawing number 92041-006, ``Hex Nut,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing
number 92041-008, ``Head Skin without Nose,'' (November 30, 1992, as
amended March 6, 1995); drawing number 92041-009, ``Six-Axis Load Cell
Simulator Assembly,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-011,
``Head Ballast Weight,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-018,
``Head Form Bill of Materials,'' (November 30, 1992); drawing number
78051-148, ``Skull-Head (cast) Hybrid III,'' (May 20, 1978, as amended
August 17, 1978); drawing number 78051-228/78051-229, ``Skin- Hybrid
III,'' (May 20, 1978, as amended through September 24, 1979); drawing
number 78051-339, ``Pivot Pin-Neck Transducer,'' (May 20, 1978, as
amended May 14, 1986); drawing number 78051-372, ``Vinyl Skin
Formulation Hybrid III,'' (May 20, 1978); and drawing number C-1797,
``Neck Blank, (August 1, 1989); drawing number SA572-S4, ``Accelerometer
Specification,'' (November 30, 1992), are available from Reprographic
Technologies, 1111 14th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
(2) A user's manual entitled ``Free-Motion Headform User's Manual,''
version 2, March 1995, is available from NHTSA's Docket Section at the
address in paragraph (a) of this section.
(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, ``Instrumentation for
Impact Tests,'' Class 1000, is available from The Society of Automotive
Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
Sec. 572.101 General description.
(a) The free motion headform consists of the component assembly
which is shown in drawings 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.100), 92041-002 (incorporated by reference;
[[Page 66]]
see Sec. 572.100), 92041-003 (incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.100), 92041-004 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100),
92041-005 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100), 92041-006
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100), 92041-008 (incorporated
by reference; see Sec. 572.100), 92041-009 (incorporated by reference;
see Sec. 572.100), 92041-011 (incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.100), 78051-148 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100),
78051-228/78051-229 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100),
78051-339 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100), 78051-372
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100), C-1797 (incorporated by
reference; see Sec. 572.100), and SA572-S4 (incorporated by reference;
see Sec. 572.100).
(b) Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures, and sign
convention for the signal outputs of the free motion headform
accelerometers, are set forth in the Free-Motion Headform User's Manual
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100).
(c) The structural properties of the headform are such that it
conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used
in the test specified in Standard No. 201 of this chapter
(Sec. 571.201).
(d) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the headform are
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of
SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, ``Instrumentation for Impact
Tests,'' Class 1000 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100).
Sec. 572.102 Drop test.
(a) When the headform is dropped from a height of 14.8 inches in
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak resultant
accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the
headform as shown in drawing 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see
Sec. 572.100) shall not be less than 225g, and not more than 275g. The
acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal to the extent
that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse are less
than ten percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The lateral
acceleration vector shall not exceed 15g (zero to peak).
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the headform in a test environment at
any temperature between 19 degrees C. to 26 degrees C. and at a relative
humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent for a period of at least four
hours prior to its use in a test.
(2) Clean the headform's skin surface and the surface of the impact
plate with 1,1,1 Trichloroethane or equivalent.
(3) Suspend the headform, as shown in Figure 50. Position the
forehead below the chin such that the skull cap plate is at an angle of
28.5 0.5 degrees with the impact surface when the midsagittal plane is
vertical.
(4) Drop the headform from the specified height by means that ensure
instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate,
which is 2 inches thick and 2 feet square. The plate shall have a clean,
dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches 203.2 x
10^6 mm (rms) and not more than 80 microinches 2032 x
10^6 mm (rms).
(5) Allow at least 3 hours between successive tests on the same
headform.
Sec. 572.103 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) Headform accelerometers shall have dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100) and be mounted in
the headform as shown in drawing 92041-001 (incorporated by reference;
see Sec. 572.100).
(b) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the headform are
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of
SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, ``Instrumentation for Impact
Tests,'' Class 1000 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100).
(c) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity conform to the
sign convention shown in the Free-Motion Headform User's Manual
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 572.100).
(d) The mountings for accelerometers shall have no resonant
frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the
applicable channel class.
[[Page 67]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.173
[60 FR 43060, Aug. 18, 1995]
[[Page 68]]
Subpart M_Side Impact Hybrid Dummy 50th Percentile Male
Source: 63 FR 41470, Aug. 4, 1998, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.110 Materials incorporated by reference.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated by reference in
Subpart M:
(1) The Anthropomorphic Test Dummy Parts List, SID/Hybrid III part
572, subpart M, dated May 10, 1997.
(2) The SID/Hybrid III Part 572 Subpart M User's Manual, dated May
1997.
(3) Drawing number 96-SIDH3-001, titled, ``Head-Neck Bracket,''
dated August 30, 1996.
(4) Drawing number 96-SIDH3-006, titled, ``Upper and Middle Shoulder
Foam,'' dated May 10, 1997.
(5) Drawing number SA-SIDH3-M001, titled, ``Complete Assembly
SIDH3,'' dated April 19, 1997.
(6) Drawing number 78051-61X, Revision C, titled ``Head Assembly--
complete,'' dated March 28, 1997
(7) Drawing number 78051-90, Revision A, titled ``Neck Assembly--
complete,'' dated May 20, 1978.
(8) Dummy assembly drawing number SA-SID-M030, Revision A, titled
``Thorax Assembly--complete,'' dated May 18, 1994.
(9) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M050, revision A, titled ``Lumbar
Spine Assembly,'' dated May 18, 1994.
(10) Dummy assembly drawing SA-150 M060, revision A, titled ``Pelvis
and Abdomen Assembly,'' dated May 18, 1994.
(11) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-053, revision A, titled ``Lumbar
Spine Assembly,'' dated May 18, 1994.
(12) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M080, titled ``Leg Assembly,
Right,'' dated August 13, 1987.
(13) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M081, titled ``Leg Assembly,
Left,'' dated August 13, 1987.
(14) Drawing number 78051-383X, Revision P, titled ``Neck Transducer
Structural Replacement,'' dated November 1, 1995.
(15) The Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J1733 Information
Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,'' dated
December 1994.
(16) SAE Recommended Practice J211, ``Instrumentation for Impact
Tests,'' Parts 1 and 2, dated March 1995.
(b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket
Section, 400 Seventh Street S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
(2) The parts lists, user's manual and drawings referred to in
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(14) of this section are available from
Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD
20705 (301) 419-5070.
(3) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(15) and (a)(16)
of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers,
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
Sec. 572.111 General description.
(a) The dummy consists of component parts and component assemblies
defined in drawing SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19, 1997, which are
described in approximately 200 drawings and specifications that are set
forth in Secs. 572.32, 572.33 and 572.41(a)(3),(4),(5) and (6) of this
part, and in the drawing of the Adaptor Bracket 96-SIDH3-001.
(1) The head assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart
E (Sec. 572.32) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under
drawing 78051-61X rev. C.
(2) The neck assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart
E (Sec. 572.33) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under
drawing 78051-90 rev. A.
(3) The thorax assembly consists of the assembly shown as number SID
053 and conforms to each applicable drawing subtended by number SA-SID
M030 rev. A.
[[Page 69]]
(4) The lumbar spine consists of the assembly specified in subpart B
(Sec. 572.9(a)) and conforms to drawing SA 150 M050 and drawings
subtended by SA-SID M050 rev. A.
(5) The abdomen and pelvis consist of the assembly and conform to
the drawings subtended by SA 150 M060, the drawings subtended by SA 150
M060 rev. A and the drawings subtended by SA-SID-087 sheet 1 rev. H, and
SA-SID-87 sheet 2 rev. H.
(6) The lower limbs consist of the assemblies specified in Subpart B
(Sec. 572.10) shown as SA 150 M080 and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and SA-
SID-M080 and SA-SID-M081 and conform to the drawings subtended by those
numbers.
(7) The neck mounting adaptor bracket conforms to drawing 96-SIDH3-
001.
(8) Upper and middle shoulder foams conform to drawing 96-SIDH3-006.
(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to the specifications of this subpart in every respect before
being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard 201.
(c) Disassembly, inspection and assembly procedures, external
dimensions, weight and drawing list are set forth in the SIDH3 User's
Manual, dated May 1997.
(d) Sign convention for signal outputs is given in the reference
document SAE J1733 of 1994-12, ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash
Testing.''
Sec. 572.112 Head assembly.
The head assembly consists of the head (drawing 78051-61X, rev. C)
with the neck transducer structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X,
rev. P) and three (3) accelerometers that are mounted in conformance to
Sec. 572.36 (c).
(a) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head assembly in a test environment
at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 degrees C. (66 to 78 degrees
F.) and at a relative humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent for a
period of at least four (4) hours prior to its application in a test.
(2) Clean the impact surface of the head skin and impact plate
surface, described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, with 1,1,1
trichloroethane or equivalent prior to the test.
(3) Suspend the head, as shown in Figure 51, so that the midsagittal
plane makes an angle of 35 1 degrees with the impact surface and its
anterior-posterior axis is horizontal 1 degree.
(4) Drop the head from a height of 200 0.25 mm (7.87 0.01 inches),
measured from the lowest point on the head, by a means that ensures a
smooth, clean release into a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel
plate, which is 51 2 mm (2.0 0.01 in.) thick and 610 10 mm (24.0 0.4
in) square. The plate shall have a dry surface and shall have a
microfinish of 0.2 microns (8 microinches) to 2.0 microns (80
microinches).
(5) Allow at least two (2) hours between successive tests on the
same head.
(b) Performance criteria. (1) When the head assembly is dropped in
accordance with Sec. 572.112(a), the measured peak resultant
acceleration shall be between 120 and 150 G's.
(2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse
shall not exceed 15 percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The
longitudinal acceleration vector shall not exceed 15 G's.
[[Page 70]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04AU98.003
Sec. 572.113 Neck assembly.
The head/neck assembly consists of the parts 78051-61X, rev. C; -84;
-90, rev. A; -94; -98; -104, revision F; -303, rev. E;--305; -306; -307,
rev. X and has a six axis neck transducer (drawing C-1709, revision D)
installed in conformance with Sec. 572.36(d).
[[Page 71]]
(a) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head and neck assembly in a test
environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 degrees C. (69 to
72 degrees F.) and at any relative humidity between 10 percent and 70
percent for a period of at least four (4) hours prior to its application
in a test.
(2) Torque the jamnut (78051-64) on the neck cable (78051-301, rev.
E) to 1.35 0.27 Nm (1.0 0.2 ft-lb) before each test.
(3) Using neck brackets 78051-303 and -307, mount the head/neck
assembly to the part 572 pendulum test fixture (see Sec. 572.33, Figure
22,) so that the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and
perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum's longitudinal
centerline (see Sec. 572.33, Figure 20, except that the direction of the
head/neck assembly is rotated around the superior-inferior axis by an
angle of 90 degrees). Install suitable transducers or other devices
necessary for measuring the ``D'' plane (horizontal surface at the base
of the skull) rotation with respect to the pendulum's longitudinal
centerline. The rotation can be measured by placing a transducer at the
occipital condyles and another at the intersection of the centerline of
the neck and the line extending from the base of the neck as shown in
figure 52.
(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height
to achieve an impact velocity of 6.89 to 7.13 m/s (22.6 to 23.4 ft/sec)
measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer.
(5) Allow the neck to flex without the head or neck contacting any
object during the test.
(6) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
striker plate and the pendulum deceleration medium.
(7) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between
successive tests on the same neck assembly.
(b) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to
be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as obtained by
integrating the pendulum acceleration output.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time (ms) Pendulum Delta-V (m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10..................................... 1.96 to 2.55.
20..................................... 4.12 to 5.10.
30..................................... 5.73 to 7.01.
40 to 70............................... 6.27 to 7.64.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) The maximum rotation of the midsagittal plane of the head shall
be 66 to 82 degrees with respect to the pendulum's longitudinal
centerline. The decaying head rotation vs. time curve shall cross the
zero angle between 58 to 67 ms after reaching its peak value.
(3) The moment about the x-axis which coincides with the midsagittal
plane of the head at the level of the occipital condyles shall have a
maximum value between 73 and 88 Nm. The decaying moment vs. time curve
shall first cross zero moment between 49 and 64 ms after reaching its
peak value. The following formula is to be used to calculate the moment
about the occipital condyles when using the six-axis neck transducer:
M = Mx + 0.01778 Fy
Where Mx and Fy are the moment and force measured by the transducer and
expressed in terms of Nm and N, respectively.
(4) The maximum rotation of the head with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline shall occur between 2 and 16 ms after peak
moment.
[63 FR 41470, Aug. 4, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 51882, Oct. 11, 2001]
Sec. 572.114 Thorax.
The specifications and test procedure for the thorax for the SID/
HIII dummy are identical to those applicable to the SID dummy as set
forth in Sec. 572.42 except that the reference to the SID device found
in Sec. 572.42(a), (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994) does
not apply and the reference to the SID/HIII (SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April
19, 1997) is applied in its place.
[[Page 72]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04AU98.004
Sec. 572.115 Lumbar spine and pelvis.
The specifications and test procedure for the lumbar spine and
pelvis are identical to those for the SID dummy as set forth in
Sec. 572.42 except that the reference to the SID device found in
Sec. 572.42(a), (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994) does not
apply and the reference to the SID/HIII (SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19,
1997) is applied in its place.
Sec. 572.116 Instrumentation and test conditions.
(a) The test probe for lateral thoracic and pelvis impact tests are
the same as those specified in Sec. 572.44(a).
[[Page 73]]
(b) Accelerometer mounting in the thorax is the same as specified in
Sec. 572.44(b).
(c) Accelerometer mounting in the pelvis is the same as specified in
Sec. 572.44(c).
(d) Head accelerometer mounting is the same as specified in
Sec. 572.36(c).
(e) Neck transducer mounting is the same as specified in
Sec. 572.36(d).
(f) Instrumentation and sensors used must conform to SAE Recommended
Practice J211, March 1995, ``Instrumentation for Impact Tests.''
(g) The mountings for the spine, rib and pelvis accelerometers shall
have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency
range of the applicable channel class.
(h) Limb joints of the test dummy shall be set at the force between
1 to 2 g's, which just supports the limb's weight when the limbs are
extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment
does not exceed 2 g's throughout the range of the limb motion.
(i) Performance tests must be conducted at a temperature between
20.6 and 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and at a relative
humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent after exposure of the dummy
to those conditions for a period of at least four (4) hours.
(j) For the performance of tests specified in Sec. 572.114 and
Sec. 572.115, the dummy is positioned the same as specified in
Sec. 572.44(h).
Subpart N_Six-year-old Child Test Dummy, Beta Version
Source: 65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.120 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this
subpart by reference:
(1) A drawings and inspection package entitled, ``Parts List and
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart N, Hybrid III Six-Year Old Child Crash Test
Dummy (H-III6C, Beta Version), June 2009,'' consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 127-1000, 6-year H3 Head Complete, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.122,
(ii) Drawing No. 127-1015, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Sec. 572.123,
(iii) Drawing No. 127-2000, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.124,
(iv) Drawing No. 127-3000, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.125,
(v) Drawing No. 127-4000-1 and 4000-2, Leg Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.126,
(vi) Drawing No. 127-5000-1 and 5000-2, Arm Assembly, incorporated
by reference in Secs. 572.121, 572.124, and 572.125 as part of a
complete dummy assembly, and,
(vii) Parts List and Drawings, Hybrid III Six-year-old Child Test
Dummy (H-III6C, Beta Version), dated June 1, 2009, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.121;
(2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 6-year-old Child
Crash Test Dummy (H-III6C), Beta Version, June 1, 2009,'' incorporated
by reference in Sec. 572.121;
(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211-1995, ``Instrumentation for Impact
Tests--Parts 1 and 2, dated March, 1995,'' incorporated by reference in
Sec. 572.127;
(4) SAE J1733 Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for
Vehicle Crash Testing,'' dated December 1994, incorporated by reference
in Sec. 572.127.
(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National
Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format
through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and
inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http:/
/www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection
of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-
[[Page 74]]
378-5457, or go to: http://www.regulations.gov.
(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The drawings and specifications package, the parts list, and the
PADI document referred to in paragraphs (a)(1), and (a)(2) of this
section, are available in electronic format through www.Regulations.gov
and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810
Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.
(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers,
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47327, July 18, 2002; 75
FR 76645, Dec. 9, 2010]
Sec. 572.121 General description.
(a) The Hybrid III type 6-year-old dummy is defined by drawings and
specifications containing the following materials:
(1) Technical drawings and specifications package P/N 127-0000, the
titles of which are listed in Table A;
(2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of
the Hybrid III 6-year-old child crash test dummy (H-III6C), Beta
version, dated June 1, 2009, incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.120.
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Drawing
Component assembly number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head assembly............................................... 127-1000
Neck assembly............................................... 127-1015
Upper torso assembly........................................ 127-2000
Lower torso assembly........................................ 127-3000
Leg assembly................................................ 127-4000
Arm assembly................................................ 127-5000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated
crash impact conditions.
(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
must conform to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test
similar to those specified in Standard 208, ``Occupant Crash
Protection'', and Standard 213, ``Child Restraint Systems''.
[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 75 FR 76645, Dec. 9, 2010]
Sec. 572.122 Head assembly and test procedure.
(a) The head assembly for this test consists of the complete head
(drawing 127-1000), a six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) or
its structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X), a head to neck-to-pivot
pin (drawing 78051-339), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).
(b) When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is
dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) in accordance
with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at
the location of the accelerometers at the head CG may not be less than
245 G or more than 300 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history
curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse
must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The
lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 g's (zero to peak).
(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as
follows:
(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative
humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the
impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an
equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.
(3) Suspend the head assembly as shown in Figure N1. The lowest
point on the forehead must be 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) from the
impact surface and the head must be oriented to an incline of 62 1 deg.
between the ``D'' plane as shown in Figure N1 and the plane of the
impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on either
side of the dummy's head shall be used to ensure that the head is level
with respect to the impact surface.
(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that
ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly
[[Page 75]]
supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and
610 mm (24 in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a
micro finish of not less than 203.2. x 10^6 mm (8 micro
inches) (RMS) and not more than 2032.0 x 10^6 mm (80 micro
inches) (RMS).
(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same
head.
Sec. 572.123 Neck assembly and test procedure.
(a) The neck assembly for the purposes of this test consists of the
assembly of components shown in drawing 127-1015.
(b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 127-
1000), neck (drawing 127-1015), pivot pin (drawing 78051-339), bib
simulator (drawing TE127-1025, neck bracket assembly (drawing 127-8221),
six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), neck mounting adaptor
(drawing TE-2208-001), and three accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4)
installed in the head assembly as specified in Sec. 572.122, is tested
according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it
shall have the following characteristics:
(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure N2, shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 74 degrees and 92 degrees. Within this
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital
condyles shall be not less than 27 N-m (19.9 ft-lbf) and not more than
33 N-m (24.3 ft-lbf).
(ii) The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 5 N-m
(3.7 ft-lbf) between 103 ms and 123 ms.
(iii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula:
Moment (N-m) = My^(0.01778m) x (FX).
(iv) My is the moment about the y-axis and FX
is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11)
and 0.01778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure N3, shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 85 degrees and 103 degrees. Within this
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital
condyles shall be not more than ^19 N-m (^14 ft-lbf) and not less than
^24 N-m (^17.7ft-lbf).
(ii) The negative moment shall decay for the first time to ^5 N-m
(^3.7 ft-lbf) between 123 ms and 147 ms.
(iii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula:
Moment (N-m) = My^(0.01778m) x (FX).
(iv) My is the moment about the y-axis and FX
is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11)
and 0.017778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
(3) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a
test.
(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9000341) on the neck cable (drawing
127-1016) to 0.23 0.02 N-m (2.0 0.2 in-lbs).
(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this
section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the head is
vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as shown
in Figure N2 for flexion tests and Figure N3 for extension tests.
(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height
to achieve an impact velocity of 4.95 0.12 m/s (16.2 0.4 ft/s) for
flexion tests and 4.3 0.12 m/s (14.10 0.40 ft/s) for extension tests,
measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure
22 of 49 CFR 572 at the instant of contact with the honey comb.
(i) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels
should be at the zero level at this time.
(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified
below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the
velocity vs. time curve:
[[Page 76]]
Table B
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Pendulum pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flexion Extension
ms ---------------------------------------------------
m/s ft/s m/s ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.......................................................... 1.2-1.6 3.9-5.3 1.0-1.4 3.3-4.6
20.......................................................... 2.4-3.4 7.9-11.2 2.2-3.0 7.2-9.8
30.......................................................... 3.8-5.0 12.5-16.4 3.2-4.2 10.5-13.8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec. 572.124 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly. The thorax consists of the part
of the torso assembly shown in drawing 127-2000.
(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely
assembled dummy (drawing 127-0000) is impacted by a test probe
conforming to section 572.127(a) at 6.71 0.12 m/s (22.0 0.4 ft/s)
according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:
(1) The maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the
spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-S50),
must be not less than 38.0 mm (1.50 in) and not more than 46.0 mm (1.80
in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force,
measured by the probe in accordance with section 572.127, shall not be
less than 1150 N (259 lbf) and not more than 1380 N (310 lbf). The peak
force after 12.5 mm (0.5 in) of sternum displacement but before reaching
the minimum required 38.0 mm (1.5 in) sternum displacement limit shall
not exceed 1500 N (337.2 lbf).
(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (b)(1) of
this section shall be not less than 65 percent but not more than 85
percent.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative humidity
between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Seat and orient the dummy, wearing tight-fitting underwear or
equivalent consisting of a size 5 short-sleeved shirt having a weight
less than 0.090 kg (0.2 lb) and an opening at the top just large enough
to permit the passage of the head with a tight fit, and a size 4 pair of
long pants having a weight of less than 0.090 kg (0.2 lb) with the legs
cut off sufficiently above the knee to allow the knee target to be
visible, on a seating surface without back support as shown in Figure
N4, with the limbs extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the
midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane vertical within 1 degree and
the ribs level in the anterior-posterior and lateral directions within
0.5 degrees.
(3) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe
coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within 2.5 mm (0.1
in) and is 12.7 1.1 mm (0.5 0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral
centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal
line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(4) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47327, July 18, 2002]
Sec. 572.125 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion
test procedure.
(a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine
the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (drawing 127-3002), including
cable (drawing 127-8095), mounting plate insert (drawing 910420-048),
nylon shoulder bushing
[[Page 77]]
(drawing 9001373), nut (drawing 9001336), and abdominal insert (drawing
127-8210), on resistance to articulation between upper torso assembly
(drawing 127-2000) and lower torso assembly (drawing 127-3000).
(b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected
to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level
through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure N5
according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this
section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that
permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular motion until
the machined rear surface of the instrument cavity at the back of the
thoracic spine box is at 45 0.5 degrees relative to the vertical
transverse plane, at which time the force applied as shown in Figure N5
must be not less than 147 N (33 lbf) and not more than 200 N (45 lbf),
and
(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to
within 8 degrees of its initial position.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the torso assemblies is
as follows:
(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative humidity between
10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Attach the dummy (with or without the legs below the femurs) to
the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure N5.
(3) Secure the pelvis at the pelvis instrument cavity rear face by
threading four \1/4\ in cap screws into the available threaded
attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test material is
rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar joining
surface is horizontal.
(4) Flex the thorax forward three times between vertical and until
the torso reference plane, as shown in figure N5, reaches 30 2 degrees
from vertical. Bring the torso to vertical orientation, remove all
externally applied flexion forces, and wait 30 minutes before conducting
the test. During the 30-minute waiting period, the dummy's upper torso
shall be externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to
prevent sagging.
(5) Remove the external support and wait two minutes. Measure the
initial orientation of the torso reference plane of the seated,
unsupported dummy as shown in Figure N5. This initial torso orientation
angle may not exceed 22 degrees.
(6) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the spine of the dummy,
the pull cable, and the load cell as shown in Figure N5.
(7) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable
as shown in Figure N5 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and
1.5 degrees per second, until the torso reference plane is at 45 0.5
degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane as shown in
Figure N5.
(8) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 0.5 degrees
of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during
the 10-second period.
(9) Release all force as rapidly as possible, and measure the return
angle at 3 minutes or any time thereafter after the release.
Sec. 572.126 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
(a) Knee assembly. The knee assembly is part of the leg assembly
(drawing 127-4000-1 and -2).
(b) When the knee assembly, consisting of knee machined (drawing
127-4013), knee flesh (drawing 127-4011), lower leg (drawing 127-4014),
the foot assembly (drawing 127-4030-1(left) and -2 (right)) and femur
load transducer (drawing SA572-S10) or its structural replacement
(drawing 127-4007) is tested according to the test procedure in section
572.127(c), the peak resistance force as measured with the test probe
mounted accelerometer must be not less than 2.0 kN (450 lbf) and not
more than 3.0 kN (674 lbf).
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative
humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
[[Page 78]]
(2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as
shown in Figure N6. No contact is permitted between any part of the foot
or tibia and any exterior surface.
(3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at
contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear
with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.
(4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral
vertical or rotational movement at time-zero.
(5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1
0.03 m/s (6.9 # 0.1 ft/s).
(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during testing.
[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47328, July 18, 2002]
Sec. 572.127 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments,
shall be of rigid metal or metal alloy construction and concentric about
its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as
suspension hardware, velocity vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of
Sec. 572.124(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.86 0.02 kg (6.3
0.05 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 160 kg-c\2\ (0.141 lb-
in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One third of the
weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must
be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not
exceed five percent of the total weight of the probe. The impacting end
of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 101.6 0.25 mm
(4.00 0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/
0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 101-103 mm (4.0-4.1 in) diameter
cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the
rear from the impact face. The probe's end opposite to the impact face
has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis
collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe
shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz
limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the impactor.
(b) The test probe for knee impacts, except for attachments, shall
be of rigid metal or alloy construction and concentric about its
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension
hardware, velocity vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of
Sec. 572.126(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 0.82 0.02 kg (1.8
0.05 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 34 kg-cm2 (0.03 lb-in-
sec2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One third of the
weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must
be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not
exceed five percent of the total weight of the probe. The impacting end
of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 0.2 mm
(3.00 0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/
0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 76-77 mm (3.0-3.1 in) diameter
cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the
rear from the impact face. The probe's end opposite to the impact face
has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis
collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe
shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz
limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the impactor.
(c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet
3.
(d) Neck force/moment transducer. (1) The upper neck force/moment
transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and
sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S11 and be mounted
in the head-neck assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.
(2) The optional lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations
specified in drawing SA572-S26 and be mounted as shown in drawing 127-
0000 sheet 3.
[[Page 79]]
(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration
at T4, and as optional instrumentation in uniaxial for- and-aft oriented
configuration on the most anterior ends of ribs #1 and #6 and at the
spine box at the levels of #1 and #6 ribs as shown in 127-0000 sheet 3.
(f) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S50 and be mounted
in the upper torso assembly as shown in 127-0000 sheet 3.
(g) The optional lumbar spine force-moment transducer shall have the
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations
specified in drawing SA572-S12 and be mounted in the lower torso
assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3 as a replacement for
lumbar adaptor 127-3005.
(h) The optional iliac spine force transducers shall have the
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S13
and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet
3 as a replacement for ASIS load cell 127-3015-1 (left) and ^2 (right).
(i) The optional pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in
drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial
configuration in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.
(j) The femur force transducer shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA72-S10 and be mounted in
the leg assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.
(k) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part must be
recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended
Practice J211, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation for lmpact Tests,'' except
that the lumbar measurements are based on CFC 600, with channel classes
as follows:
(1) Head acceleration--Class 1000.
(2) Neck:
(i) Forces--Class 1000;
(ii) Moments--Class 600;
(iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180;
(iv) Rotation--Class 60 (if used).
(3) Thorax:
(i) Rib acceleration--Class 1000;
(ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180;
(iii) Sternum deflection--Class 600.
(4) Lumbar:
(i) Forces--Class 1000;
(ii) Moments--Class 600;
(iii) Flexion--Class 60 if data channel is used.
(5) Pelvis accelerations--Class 1000.
(6) Femur forces--Class 600.
(l) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12.
(m) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance
frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable
channel class.
(n) Limb joints must be set at one G, barely restraining the weight
of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a
limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.
(o) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by period of not less
than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
(p) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as
specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.
[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47328, July 18, 2002]
[[Page 80]]
Sec. Figures to Subpart N of Part 572
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.000
[[Page 81]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.001
[[Page 82]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.002
[[Page 83]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13JA00.005
[[Page 84]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR19SE02.000
[[Page 85]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR18JY02.003
[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47329, July 18, 2002; 67
FR 59023, Sept. 19, 2002]
[[Page 86]]
Subpart O_Hybrid III 5th Percentile Female Test Dummy, Alpha Version
Source: 65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.130 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this
Subpart by reference:
(1) A drawings and specification package entitled ``Parts List and
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile Small Adult
Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F, Alpha Version)'' (June 2002),
incorporated by reference in ``572.131, and consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 880105-100X, Head Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.132, 572.133, 572.134, 572.135, and
572.137;
(ii) Drawing No. 880105-250, Neck Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.133, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;
(iii) Drawing No. 880105-300, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;
(iv) Drawing No. 880105-450, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;
(v) Drawing No. 880105-560-1, Complete Leg Assembly--left,
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.135, 572.136, and
572.137;
(vi) Drawing No. 880105-560-2, Complete Leg Assembly--right
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.135, 572.136, and
572.137;
(vii) Drawing No. 880105-728-1, Complete Arm Assembly--left,
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.134, and 572.135 as part
of the complete dummy assembly;
(viii) Drawing No. 880105-728-2, Complete Arm Assembly--right,
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.131, 572.134, and 572.135 as part
of the complete dummy assembly;
(ix) The Hybrid III 5th percentile small adult female crash test
dummy parts list, incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.131;
(2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile
Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F), Alpha Version'' (February
2002), incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.132.
(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation
for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation'', incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.137;
(4) SAE Recommended Practice J211/2, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation
for Impact Tests--Part 2--Photographic Instrumentation'' incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.137; and
(5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash
Testing'', incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.137.
(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Technical
Reference Library, 400 Seventh Street SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or
at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For
information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-
6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/
code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.
(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth
Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy, (HIII-5F, Alpha Version)
(June 2002), referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and the
Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the
Hybrid III 5th Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy, Alpha
Version, referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section are available
from Reprographic Technologies, 9107 Gaither Road, Gaithersburg, MD
20877, (301) 419-5070. These documents are also accessible for reading
and copying through the DOT Docket Management System.
(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of
this section are available from the Society of
[[Page 87]]
Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pa.
15096.
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46413, July 15, 2002]
Sec. 572.131 General description.
(a) The Hybrid III fifth percentile adult female crash test dummy is
defined by drawings and specifications containing the following
materials:
(1) Technical drawings and specifications package P/N 880105-000
(refer to Sec. 572.130(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table
A;
(2) Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth
Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F, Alpha Version)
(June 2002) (refer to Sec. 572.130(a)(1)(ix)).
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly............................ 880105-100X
Neck Assembly............................ 880105-250
Upper Torso Assembly..................... 880105-300
Lower Torso Assembly..................... 880105-450
Complete Leg Assembly--left.............. 880105-560-1
Complete Leg Assembly--right............. 880105-560-2
Complete Arm Assembly--left.............. 880105-728-1
Complete Arm Assembly--right............. 880105-728-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated
crash impact conditions.
(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar
to those specified in Standard 208, Occupant Crash Protection.
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46414, July 15, 2002]
Sec. 572.132 Head assembly and test procedure.
(a) The head assembly (refer to Sec. 572.130(a)(1)(i)) for this test
consists of the complete head (drawing 880105-100X), a six-axis neck
transducer (drawing SA572-S11) or its structural replacement (drawing
78051-383X), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).
(b) When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm
(14.8 0.04 in) in accordance with subsection (c) of this section, the
peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the
head CG may not be less than 250 G or more than 300 G. The resultant
acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations
occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak
resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G
(zero to peak).
(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as
follows:
(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative
humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the
impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an
equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.
(3) Suspend and orient the head assembly as shown in Figure 19 of 49
CFR 572. The lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8
0.04 in) from the impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes
located on either side of the dummy's head shall be used to ensure that
the head is level with respect to the impact surface.
(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that
ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2.0 in) thick and 610 mm (24.0
in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro
finish of not less than 203.2. x 10^6 mm (8 micro inches)
(RMS) and not more than 2032.0 x 10^6 mm (80 micro inches)
(RMS).
(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same
head.
Sec. 572.133 Neck assembly and test procedure.
(a) The neck assembly (refer to Sec. 572.130(a)(1)(ii)) for the
purposes of this test consists of the assembly of components shown in
drawing 880105-250.
(b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing
880105-100X), neck (drawing 880105-250), bib
[[Page 88]]
simulator (drawing 880105-371), upper neck adjusting bracket (drawing
880105-207), lower neck adjusting bracket (drawing 880105-208), six-axis
neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and either three accelerometers
(drawing SA572-S4) or their mass equivalent installed in the head
assembly as specified in drawing 880105-100X, is tested according to the
test procedure in subsection (c) of this section, it shall have the
following characteristics:
(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure O1, shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 77 degrees and 91 degrees. During the
time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the
peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA5572-311), about
the occipital condyles may not be less than 69 N-m (51 ft-lbf) and not
more than 83 N-m (61 ft-lbf). The positive moment shall decay for the
first time to 10 N-m (7.4 ft-lbf) between 80 ms and 100 ms after time
zero.
(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment
(N-m)= My^(0.01778m) x (Fx).
(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is
the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and
0.01778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure O2, shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 99 degrees and 114 degrees. During the
time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the
peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA5572-S11), about
the occipital condyles shall be not more than ^53 N-m (^39 ft-lbf) and
not less than ^65 N-m (^48 ft-lbf). The negative moment shall decay for
the first time to ^10 N-m (^7.4 ft-lbf) between 94 ms and 114 ms after
time zero.
(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment
(N-m) = My ^ (0.01778m) x (Fx).
(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is
the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and
0.01778 m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.
(3) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels
shall be at the zero level at this time.
(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a
test.
(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9000018) on the neck cable (drawing
880105-206) to 1.4 0.2 N-m (12.0 2.0 in-lb).
(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in subsection (b) of this
section, on the pendulum described in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 so that
the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and coincides with the
plane of motion of the pendulum as shown in Figure O1 for flexion tests
and Figure O2 for extension tests.
(4)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a
height to achieve an impact velocity of 7.01 0.12 m/s (23.0 0.4 ft/s)
for flexion tests and 6.07 0.12 m/s (19.9 0.40 ft/s) for extension
tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in
Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 at the instant of contact with the honey comb.
(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified
below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the
velocity vs. time curve:
Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flexion Extension
Time ms ---------------------------------------------------------------
m/s ft/s m/s ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.............................................. 2.1-2.5 6.9-8.2 1.5-1.9 4.9-6.2
20.............................................. 4.0-5.0 13.1-16.4 3.1-3.9 10.2-12.8
30.............................................. 5.8-7.0 19.5-23.0 4.6-5.6 15.1-18.4
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 89]]
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46414, July 15, 2002]
Sec. 572.134 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) Thorax (Upper Torso) Assembly (refer to
Sec. 572.130(a)(1)(iii)). The thorax consists of the part of the torso
assembly shown in drawing 880105-300.
(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely
assembled dummy (drawing 880105-000) is impacted by a test probe
conforming to section 572.137(a) at 6.71 0.12 m/s (22.0 0.4 ft/s)
according to the test procedure in subsection (c) of this section:
(1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the
spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-S5),
must be not less than 50.0 mm (1.97 in) and not more than 58.0 mm (2.30
in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force,
measured by the impact probe as defined in section 572.137 and
calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall
not be less than 3900 N (876 lbf) and not more than 4400 N (989 lbf).
The peak force after 18.0 mm (0.71 in) of sternum displacement but
before reaching the minimum required 50.0 mm (1.97 in) sternum
displacement limit shall not exceed 4600 N.
(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (1) of this
section shall be not less than 69 percent but not more than 85 percent.
The hysteresis shall be calculated by determining the ratio of the area
between the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve
to the area under the loading portion of the curve.
(3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor
mass and its deceleration.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as
follows:
(1) The dummy is clothed in a form fitting cotton stretch above-the-
elbow sleeved shirt and above-the-knee pants. The weight of the shirt
and pants shall not exceed 0.14 kg (0.30 lb) each.
(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative humidity between
10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(3) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back
support as shown in Figure O3, with the limbs extended horizontally and
forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane
vertical within 1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior
and lateral directions within 0.5 degrees.
(4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe
coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within 2.5 mm (0.1
in) and is 12.7 1.1 mm (0.5 0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral
centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal
line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]
Sec. 572.135 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion
test procedure.
(a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine
the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (drawing 880105-1096), and
abdominal insert (drawing 880105-434), on resistance to articulation
between the upper torso assembly (drawing 880105-300) and the lower
torso assembly (drawing 880105-450) (refer to Sec. 572.130(a)(1)(iv)).
(b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected
to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level
through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure O4
according to the test procedure set out in subsection (c) of this
section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that
permits the upper torso assembly to
[[Page 90]]
translate in angular motion relative to the vertical transverse plane 45
0.5 degrees at which time the force applied must be not less than 320 N
(71.5 lbf) and not more than 390 N (87.4 lbf), and
(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to
within 8 degrees of its initial position.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the upper/lower torso
assembly is as follows:
(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative humidity between
10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the legs below the
femurs) and attach to the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure
O4.
(3) Secure the pelvis to the fixture at the pelvis instrument cavity
rear face by threading four \1/4\ inch cap screws into the available
threaded attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test
material is rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar
joining surface is horizontal.
(4) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the spine of the dummy as
shown in Figure O4.
(5) Inspect and adjust, if necessary, the seating of the abdominal
insert within the pelvis cavity and with respect to the torso flesh,
assuring that the torso flesh provides uniform fit and overlap with
respect to the outside surface of the pelvis flesh.
(6) Flex the dummy's upper torso three times between the vertical
and until the torso reference plane, as shown in Figure O4, reaches 30
degrees from the vertical transverse plane. Bring the torso to vertical
orientation and wait for 30 minutes before conducting the test. During
the 30 minute waiting period, the dummy's upper torso shall be
externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to prevent it
from drooping.
(7) Remove all external support and wait two minutes. Measure the
initial orientation angle of the torso reference plane of the seated,
unsupported dummy as shown in Figure O4. The initial orientation angle
may not exceed 20 degrees.
(8) Attach the pull cable and the load cell as shown in Figure O4.
(9) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable
as shown in Figure O4 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and
1.5 degrees per second, until the angle reference plane is at 45 0.5
degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane.
(9) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 0.5 degrees
of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during
the 10-second period.
(10) Release all force at the attachment bracket as rapidly as
possible, and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle
reference plane as defined in paragraph (6) 3 minutes after the release.
Sec. 572.136 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
(a) Knee assembly. The knee assembly (refer to
Secs. 572.130(a)(1)(v) and (vi)) for the purpose of this test is the
part of the leg assembly shown in drawing 880105-560.
(b)(1) When the knee assembly, consisting of sliding knee assembly
(drawing 880105-528R or -528L), lower leg structural replacement
(drawing 880105-603), lower leg flesh (drawing 880105-601), ankle
assembly (drawing 880105-660), foot assembly (drawing 880105-651 or
650), and femur load transducer (drawing SA572-S14) or its structural
replacement (drawing 78051-319) is tested according to the test
procedure in subsection (c), the peak resistance force as measured with
the test probe-mounted accelerometer must be not less than 3450 N (776
lbf) and not more than 4060 N (913 lbf).
(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor
mass and its deceleration.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative
humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as
shown
[[Page 91]]
in Figure O5. No part of the foot or tibia may contact any exterior
surface.
(3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at
contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear
with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.
(4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral
vertical or rotational movement at the time of initial contact between
the impactor and the knee.
(5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1
0.03 m/s (6.9 0.1 ft/s).
(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]
Sec. 572.137 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments,
shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension
hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of
Sec. 572.134(c)(7). The impactor shall have a mass of 13.97 0.23 kg
(30.8 0.5 lbs) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-cm\2\
(3.22 lbs-in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-
third (1/3) of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to
the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and such
components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test
probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric
with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and
non-deformable 152.4 0.25 mm (6.00 0.01 in) diameter face with a
minimum/maximum edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor
shall have a 152.4-152.6 mm (6.0-6.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface
extending for a minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in) to the rear from the impact
face. The probe's end opposite to the impact face has provisions for
mounting of an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the
longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant
frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the
procedure listed in Docket No. NHTSA-6714-14.
(b) The test probe for knee impacts, except for attachments, shall
be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its longitudinal
axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware,
impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of Sec. 572.136(c)(6).
The impactor shall have a mass of 2.990.23 kg (6.60.5 lbs) and a
minimum mass moment of inertia of 209 kg-cm\2\ (0.177 lb-in-sec\2\) in
yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third (1/3) of the weight
of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe may be
included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed
five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of
the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of
the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 0.2 mm (3.00
0.01 in) diameter face with a minimum/maximum edge radius of 7.6/12.7
mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 76.2-76.4 mm (3.0-3.1 in)
diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
to the rear from the impact face. The probe's end opposite to the impact
face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive
axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe
has a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be
determined using the procedure listed in Docket No. NHTSA-6714-14.
(c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet
3 of 6.
(d) The upper neck force/moment transducer shall have the
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations
specified in drawing SA572-S11 and be mounted in the head neck assembly
as shown in drawing 880105-000, sheet 3 of 6.
(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be
[[Page 92]]
mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration within the spine
box instrumentation cavity and as optional instrumentation in uniaxial
for-and-aft oriented configuration arranged as corresponding pairs in
three locations on the sternum on and at the spine box of the upper
torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.
(f) The optional lumbar spine force-moment transducer shall have the
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations
specified in drawing SA572-S15 and be mounted in the lower torso
assembly as shown in drawing 880105-450.
(g) The optional iliac spine force transducers shall have the
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S16
and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-450.
(h) The pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration
in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3.
(i) The single axis femur force transducer (SA572-S14) or the
optional multiple axis femur force/moment transducer (SA572-S29) shall
have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis
locations specified in the appropriate drawing and be mounted in the
femur assembly as shown in drawing 880105-500 sheet 3 of 6.
(j) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S51 and be mounted
to the upper torso assembly as shown in drawings 880105-300 and 880105-
000 sheet 3 of 6.
(k) The optional lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the
dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations
specified in drawing SA572-S27 and be mounted to the upper torso
assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.
(l) The optional thoracic spine force/moment transducer shall have
the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations
specified in drawing SA572-S28 and be mounted in the upper torso
assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.
(m) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part shall be
recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended
Practice J211/10, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation for Impact Impact
Tests;--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation,'' and SAE Recommended
Practice J211/2, Rev Mar95 ``Instrumentation for Impact Tests--Part 2--
Photographic Instrumentation'', (refer to Secs. 572.130(a)(3) and (4)
respectively) except as noted, with channel classes as follows:
(1) Head acceleration--Class 1000
(2) Neck:
(i) Forces--Class 1000
(ii) Moments--Class 600
(iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180
(iv) Rotation potentiometer--Class 60 (optional)
(3) Thorax:
(i) Rib acceleration--Class 1000
(ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180
(iii) Sternum deflection--Class 600
(iv) Forces--Class 1000
(v) Moments--Class 600
(4) Lumbar:
(i) Forces--Class 1000
(ii) Moments--Class 600
(iii) Torso flexion pulling force--Class 60 if data channel is used
(5) Pelvis:
(i) Accelerations--Class 1000
(ii) Iliac wing forces--Class 180
(6) Femur forces and knee pendulum--Class 600
(n) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to section 572.130(a)(4)).
(o) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance
frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable
channel class.
(p) Limb joints must be set at one G, barely restraining the weight
of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a
limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.
(q) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
[[Page 93]]
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by not less than 30
minutes unless otherwise noted.
(r) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as
specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002; 74
FR 29894, June 23, 2009]
[[Page 94]]
Sec. Figures to Subpart O of Part 572
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.000
[[Page 95]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.001
[[Page 96]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.002
[[Page 97]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.003
[[Page 98]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR15JY02.004
[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]
[[Page 99]]
Subpart P_3-year-Old Child Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version
Source: 65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.140 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated in this subpart
P by reference:
(1) A drawings and specifications package entitled, ``Parts List and
Drawings, Subpart P Hybrid III 3-year-old child crash test dummy, (H-
III3C, Alpha version) September 2001,'' incorporated by reference in
Sec. 572.141 and consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 210-1000, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.141, 572.142, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;
(ii) Drawing No. 210-2001, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.141, 572.143, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;
(iii) Drawing No. TE-208-000, Headform, incorporated by reference in
Secs. 572.141, and 572.143;
(iv) Drawing No. 210-3000, Upper/Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated
by reference in Secs. 572.141, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;
(v) Drawing No. 210-5000-1(L), -2(R), Leg Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.141, 572.144, 572.145 as part of a complete dummy
assembly;
(vi) Drawing No. 210-6000-1(L), -2(R), Arm Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.141, 572.144, and 572.145 as part of the complete
dummy assembly;
(2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly and Inspection (PADI), Subpart P, Hybird III 3-year-old
Child Crash Test Dummy, (H-III3C, Alpha Version) September 2001,''
incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.141;
(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation
for Impact Tests--Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation'', incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.146;
(4) SAE J1733 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing''
incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.146.
(5) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
Part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket
Section, 400 Seventh Street SW, room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
(b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The drawings and specifications package referred to in paragraph
(a)(1) of this section and the PADI document referred to in paragraph
(a)(2) of this section are accessible for viewing and copying at the
Department of Transportation's Docket public area, Plaza 401, 400
Seventh St., SW., Washington, DC 20590, and downloadable at dms.dot.gov.
They are also available from Reprographic Technologies, 9107 Gaither
Rd., Gaithersburg, MD 20877, (301) 419-5070.
(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers,
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]
Sec. 572.141 General description.
(a) The Hybrid III 3-year-old child dummy is described by the
following materials:
(1) Technical drawings and specifications package 210-0000 (refer to
Sec. 572.140(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A of this
section;
(2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection document
(PADI) (refer to Sec. 572.140(a)(2)).
(b) The dummy is made up of the component assemblies set out in the
following Table A of this section:
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly............................ 210-1000
Neck Assembly (complete)................. 210-2001
Upper/Lower Torso Assembly............... 210-3000
Leg Assembly............................. 210-5000-1(L), -2(R)
[[Page 100]]
Arm Assembly............................. 210-6000-1(L), -2(R)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between
metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated
crash impact conditions.
(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this part in every respect only before use in any test
similar to those specified in Standard 208, Occupant Crash Protection,
and Standard 213, Child Restraint Systems.
Sec. 572.142 Head assembly and test procedure.
(a) The head assembly (refer to Sec. 572.140(a)(1)(i)) for this test
consists of the head (drawing 210-1000), adapter plate (drawing ATD
6259), accelerometer mounting block (drawing SA 572-S80), structural
replacement of \1/2\ mass of the neck load transducer (drawing TE-107-
001), head mounting washer (drawing ATD 6262), one \1/2\-20 x 1" flat
head cap screw (FHCS) (drawing 9000150), and 3 accelerometers (drawing
SA-572-S4).
(b) When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is
dropped from a height of 376.01.0 mm (14.80.04 in) in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the
location of the accelerometers at the head CG shall not be less than 250
g or more than 280 g. The resultant acceleration versus time history
curve shall be unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main
pulse shall be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration.
The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to peak).
(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as
follows:
(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and at any relative
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a
test.
(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the head skin and
the steel impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichlorethane,
or an equivalent. Both impact surfaces must be clean and dry for
testing.
(3) Suspend the head assembly with its midsagittal plane in vertical
orientation as shown in Figure P1 of this subpart. The lowest point on
the forehead is 376.0 1.0 mm (14.76 0.04 in) from the steel impact
surface. The 3.3 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes, located on either side of
the dummy's head in transverse alignment with the CG, shall be used to
ensure that the head transverse plane is level with respect to the
impact surface.
(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by a means that
ensures a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in)
square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a finish of not
less than 203.2 x 10^6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not
more than 2032.0 x 10^6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same
head.
Sec. 572.143 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.
(a) The neck and headform assembly (refer to Secs. 572.140(a)(1)(ii)
and 572.140(a)(1)(iii)) for the purposes of this test, as shown in
Figures P2 and P3 of this subpart, consists of the neck molded assembly
(drawing 210-2015), neck cable (drawing 210-2040), nylon shoulder
bushing (drawing 9001373), upper mount plate insert (drawing 910420-
048), bib simulator (drawing TE-208-050), urethane washer (drawing 210-
2050), neck mounting plate (drawing TE-250-021), two jam nuts (drawing
9001336), load-moment transducer (drawing SA 572-S19), and headform
(drawing TE-208-000).
(b) When the neck and headform assembly, as defined in
Sec. 572.143(a), is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph
(c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:
(1) Flexion.
[[Page 101]]
(i) Plane D, referenced in Figure P2 of this subpart, shall rotate
in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 70 degrees and 82 degrees. Within this
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyle
may not be less than 42 N-m and not more than 53 N-m.
(ii) The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 10 N-m
between 60 ms and 80 ms after time zero.
(iii) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero
when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.
(2) Extension.
(i) Plane D referenced in Figure P3 of this subpart shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 83 degrees and 93 degrees. Within this
specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyle
may be not more than ^43.7 N-m and not less than ^53.3 N-m.
(ii) The negative moment shall decay for the first time to ^10 N-m
between 60 and 80 ms after time zero.
(iii) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero
when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.
(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled
environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F)
and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four
hours prior to a test.
(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9001336) on the neck cable (drawing
210-2040) between 0.2 N-m and 0.3 N-m.
(3) Mount the neck-headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a) of
this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the headform
is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as
shown in Figure P2 of this subpart for flexion and Figure P3 of this
subpart for extension tests.
(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely to achieve an
impact velocity of 5.50 0.10 m/s (18.05 + 0.40 ft/s) for flexion and
3.65 0.1 m/s (11.98 0.40 ft/s) for extension tests, measured by an
accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure 22 of this part
572 at time zero.
(i) The test shall be conducted without inducing any torsion
twisting of the neck.
(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified
in Table B of this section. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data
channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve as indicated in Table B of
this section.
(iii) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between
the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. The pendulum data
channel shall be zero at this time.
Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Flexion Time Extension
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ms m/s ft/s ms m/s ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10............................................. 2.0-2.7 6.6-8.9 6 1.0-1.4 3.3-4.6
15............................................. 3.0-4.0 9.8-13.1 10 1.9-2.5 6.2-8.2
20............................................. 4.0-5.1 13.1-16.7 14 2.8-3.5 9.2-11.5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec. 572.144 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly (refer to Sec. 572.140(a)(1)(iv)).
The thorax consists of the upper part of the torso assembly shown in
drawing 210-3000.
(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely
assembled dummy (drawing 210-0000) is impacted by a test probe
conforming to Sec. 572.146(a) at 6.0 0.1 m/s (19.7 0.3 ft/s) according
to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the
spine, measured with the chest deflection transducer (SA-572-S50), must
not be less than 32mm (1.3 in) and not more than 38mm (1.5 in). Within
this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the
probe-mounted
[[Page 102]]
accelerometer as defined in Sec. 572.146(a) and calculated in accordance
with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall be not less than 680 N and
not more than 810 N. The peak force after 12.5 mm of sternum compression
but before reaching the minimum required 32.0 mm sternum compression
shall not exceed 910 N.
(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact, as
determined from the force vs. deflection curve, shall be not less than
65 percent and not more than 85 percent. The hysteresis shall be
calculated by determining the ratio of the area between the loading and
unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the area under the
loading portion of the curve.
(3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor
mass and its deceleration.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as
follows:
(1) The test dummy is clothed in cotton-polyester-based tight-
fitting shirt with long sleeves and ankle-length pants whose combined
weight is not more than 0.25 kg (0.55 lbs).
(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and at any relative humidity
between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(3) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back
support as shown in Figure P4, with the lower limbs extended
horizontally and forward, the upper arms parallel to the torso and the
lower arms extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the
midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane being vertical within 1 degree
and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior and lateral directions
within 0.5 degrees.
(4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe
coincides with the dummy's mid-sagittal plane and is centered on the
center of No. 2 rib within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) and 0.5 degrees of a
horizontal plane.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal center line is within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]
Sec. 572.145 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test procedure.
(a) The test objective is to determine the resistance of the lumbar
spine and abdomen of a fully assembled dummy (drawing 210-0000) to
flexion articulation between upper and lower halves of the torso
assembly (refer to Sec. 572.140(a)(1)(iv)).
(b)(1) When the upper half of the torso assembly of a seated dummy
is subjected to a force continuously applied at the occipital condyle
level through the rigidly attached adaptor bracket in accordance with
the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar
spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the upper
half of the torso, as measured at the posterior surface of the torso
reference plane shown in Figure P5 of this subpart, to translate in
angular motion in the midsagittal plane 45 0.5 degrees relative to the
vertical transverse plane, at which time the pulling force applied must
not be less than 130 N (28.8 lbf) and not more than 180 N (41.2 lbf),
and
(2) Upon removal of the force, the upper torso assembly returns to
within 10 degrees of its initial position.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure is as follows:
(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and at any relative humidity
between 10 and 70 percent for at least 4 hours prior to a test.
(2) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the lower legs) and
seat it on a rigid flat-surface table, as shown in Figure P5 of this
subpart.
(i) Unzip the torso jacket and remove the four \1/4\-20 x \3/4\"
bolts which attach
[[Page 103]]
the lumbar load transducer or its structural replacement to the pelvis
weldment (drawing 210-4510) as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart.
(ii) Position the matching end of the rigid pelvis attachment
fixture around the lumbar spine and align it over the four bolt holes.
(iii) Secure the fixture to the dummy with the four \1/4\-20 x \3/
4\" bolts and attach the fixture to the table. Tighten the mountings so
that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal within 1 deg and
the buttocks and upper legs of the seated dummy are in contact with the
test surface.
(iv) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the upper part of the
torso as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart and zip up the torso jacket.
(v) Point the upper arms vertically downward and the lower arms
forward.
(3)(i) Flex the thorax forward three times from vertical until the
torso reference plane reaches 30 2 degrees from vertical. The torso
reference plane, as shown in figure P5 of this subpart, is defined by
the transverse plane tangent to the posterior surface of the upper
backplate of the spine box weldment (drawing 210-8020).
(ii) Remove all externally applied flexion forces and support the
upper torso half in a vertical orientation for 30 minutes to prevent it
from drooping.
(4) Remove the external support and after two minutes measure the
initial orientation angle of the upper torso reference plane of the
seated, unsupported dummy as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart. The
initial orientation of the torso reference plane may not exceed 15
degrees.
(5) Attach the pull cable at the point of load application on the
adaptor bracket while maintaining the initial torso orientation. Apply a
pulling force in the midsagittal plane, as shown in Figure P5 of this
subpart, at any upper torso flexion rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per
second, until the torso reference plane reaches 45 0.5 degrees of
flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane.
(6) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 0.5 degrees
of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during
the 10-second period.
(7) [Reserved]
(8) Release all force at the loading adaptor bracket as rapidly as
possible and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle
reference plane as defined in paragraph (c)(4) of this section 3 to 4
minutes after the release.
Sec. 572.146 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments,
shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor such as suspension
hardware, and impact vanes, must meet the requirements of
Sec. 572.144(c)(7) of this part. The impactor shall have a mass of 1.70
0.02 kg (3.75 0.05 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia 164 kg-
cm\2\ (0.145 lb-in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe.
One-third (\1/3\) of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments
to the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and
such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the
test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and
concentric with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat,
continuous, and non-deformable 50.8 0.25 mm (2.00 0.01 inch) diameter
face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall
have a 53.3 mm (2.1 in) dia. cylindrical surface extending for a minimum
of 25.4 mm (1.0 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe's end
opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer
with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the
probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency not less than
1000 Hz limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the
impactor.
(b) Head accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA
572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 210-0000.
(c) The neck force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in
drawing SA 572-S19 and be mounted at the upper neck transducer location
as shown in
[[Page 104]]
drawing 210-0000. A lower neck transducer as specified in drawing SA
572-S19 is allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of
part No. ATD6204, as shown in drawing 210-0000.
(d) The shoulder force transducers shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA 572-S21 and be allowed
to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 210-3800
in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000.
(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA
572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration at
the T4 location, as shown in drawing 210-0000. Triaxial accelerometers
may be mounted as optional instrumentation at T1, and T12, and in
uniaxial configuration on the sternum at the midpoint level of ribs No.
1 and No. 3 and on the spine coinciding with the midpoint level of No. 3
rib, as shown in drawing 210-0000. If used, the accelerometers must
conform to SA-572-S4.
(f) The chest deflection potentiometer shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S50 and be mounted
in the torso assembly as shown drawing 210-0000.
(g) The lumbar spine force/moment transducer may be mounted in the
torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation
in place of part No. 210-4150. If used, the transducer shall have the
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S20.
(h) The pubic force transducer may be mounted in the torso assembly
as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in place of
part No. 921-0022-036. If used, the transducer shall have the dimensions
and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S18.
(i) The acetabulum force transducers may be mounted in the torso
assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in
place of part No. 210-4522. If used, the transducer shall have the
dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S22.
(j) The anterior-superior iliac spine transducers may be mounted in
the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional
instrumentation in place of part No. 210-4540-1, -2. If used, the
transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics
specified in drawing SA-572-S17.
(k) The pelvis accelerometers may be mounted in the pelvis in
triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional
instrumentation. If used, the accelerometers shall have the dimensions
and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S4.
(l) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part shall be
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of
SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation for
Impact Tests--Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation'' (refer to
Sec. 572.140(a)(3)), with channel classes as follows:
(1) Head acceleration--Class 1000
(2) Neck
(i) Force--Class 1000
(ii) Moments--Class 600
(iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180
(iv) Rotation potentiometer response (if used)--CFC 60.
(3) Thorax:
(i) Rib/sternum acceleration--Class 1000
(ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180
(iii) Sternum deflection--Class 600
(iv) Shoulder force--Class 180
(4) Lumbar:
(i) Forces--Class 1000
(ii) Moments--Class 600
(iii) Torso flexion pulling force--Class 60 if data channel is used
(5) Pelvis
(i) Accelerations--Class 1000
(ii) Acetabulum, pubic symphysis--Class 1000,
(iii) Iliac wing forces--Class 180
(m) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to Sec. 572.140(a)(4)).
(n) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance
frequency less
[[Page 105]]
than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.
(o) Limb joints shall be set at lG, barely restraining the weight of
the limbs when they are extended horizontally. The force required to
move a limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb
motion.
(p) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by a period of not less
than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
(q) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified
in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.
Sec. Figures to Subpart P of Part 572
[[Page 106]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.000
[[Page 107]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.001
[[Page 108]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.002
[[Page 109]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13DE01.237
[[Page 110]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22MR00.004
[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]
[[Page 111]]
Subpart R_CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant, Alpha Version
Source: 65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.150 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The following materials are incorporated by reference in this
subpart R.
(1) A drawings and specifications package entitled ``Parts List and
Drawings, Subpart R, CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant Crash Test Dummy (CRABI-
12, Alpha version) August 2001'' and consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 921022-001, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.151, 572.152, 572.154, and 572.155;
(ii) Drawing No. 921022-041, Neck Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.151, 572.153, 572.154, and 572.155;
(iii) Drawing No. TE-3200-160, Headform, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.151 and 572.153;
(iv) Drawing No. 921022-060, Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.151, 572.154, and 572.155;
(v) Drawing No. 921022-055, Leg Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.151, and 572.155 as part of a complete dummy assembly;
(vi) Drawing No. 921022-054, Arm Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.151, and 572.155 as part of the complete dummy assembly;
(2) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) Subpart R, CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant
Crash Test Dummy (CRABI-12, Alpha version) August 2001'' incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.155;
(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation
for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation'', incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.155;
(4) SAE J1733 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing'',
incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.155.
(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA's Docket
Section, 400 Seventh Street S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html.
(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The drawings and specifications package referred to in paragraph
(a)(1) of this section and the procedures manual referred to in
paragraph (a)(2) of this section are available from Reprographic
Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 20705 (301) 419-
5070.
(2) The SAE materials referred to paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers,
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.
[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]
Sec. 572.151 General description.
(a) The 12-month-old-infant crash test dummy is described by
drawings and specifications containing the following materials:
(1) Technical drawings and specifications package 921022-000 (refer
to Sec. 572.150(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A of
this section;
(2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection document
(PADI) (refer to Sec. 572.150(a)(2)).
(b) The dummy consists of the component assemblies set out in the
following Table A:
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly Drawing number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly............................. 921022-001.
Neck Assembly (complete).................. 921022-041.
Torso Assembly............................ 921022-060.
Leg Assembly.............................. 921022-055 R&L.
Arm Assembly.............................. 921022-054 R&L.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Adjacent segments of the dummy are joined in a manner such that,
except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no
contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or
under simulated crash impact conditions.
(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
shall
[[Page 112]]
conform to this Subpart in every respect before its use in any test
under this chapter.
Sec. 572.152 Head assembly and test procedure.
(a) The head assembly (refer to Sec. 572.150(a)(1)(i)) for this test
consists of the assembly (drawing 921022-001), triaxial mount block
(SA572-80), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).
(b) Frontal and rear impact. (1) Frontal impact. When the head
assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is dropped from a height of
376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(i) of
this section, the peak resultant acceleration measured at the head CG
shall not be less than 100 g or more than 120 g. The resultant
acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal, and the
oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall be less than 17
percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration
shall not exceed 15 g's.
(2) Rear impact. When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this
section is dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) in
accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section, the peak resultant
acceleration measured at the head CG shall be not less than 55 g and not
more than 71 g. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall
be unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall
be less than 17 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral
acceleration shall not exceed 15 g's.
(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as
follows:
(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and at any relative
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a
test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be maintained
throughout the entire testing period specified in this section.
(2) Before the test, clean the impact surface of the head skin and
the steel impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichlorethane,
or an equivalent. Both impact surfaces shall be clean and dry for
testing.
(3)(i) For a frontal impact test, suspend the head assembly with its
midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure R1 of this
subpart. The lowest point on the forehead is 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04
in) from the impact surface. The 3.30 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes
located on either side of the dummy's head are used to ensure that the
head is level with respect to the impact surface. The angle between the
lower surface plane of the neck transducer mass simulator (drawing
910420-003) and the plane of the impact surface is 45 1 degrees.
(ii) For a rear impact test, suspend the head assembly with its
midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure R2 of this
subpart. The lowest point on the back of the head is 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8
0.04 in) from the impact surface. The 3.30 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes
located on either side of the dummy's head are used to ensure that the
head is level with respect to the impact surface. The angle between the
lower surface plane of the neck transducer structural replacement
(drawing 910420-003) and the impact surface is 90 1 degrees.
(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by a means that
ensures a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in)
square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish
of not less than 203.2 x 10^6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and
not more than 2032.0 x 10^6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests of the head
assembly at the same impact point. For head impacts on the opposite side
of the head, the 30-minute waiting period specified in Sec. 572.155(m)
does not apply.
Sec. 572.153 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.
(a) The neck and headform assembly (refer to Secs. 572.150(a)(1)(ii)
and 572.150(a)(1)(iii)) for the purposes of this test consists of parts
shown in CRABI neck test assembly (drawing TE-3200-100);
(b) When the neck and headform assembly, as defined in
Sec. 572.153(a), is tested according to the test procedure in
Sec. 572.153(c), it shall have the following characteristics:
[[Page 113]]
(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D referenced in Figure R3 of this subpart
shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the
pendulum's longitudinal centerline not less than 75 degrees and not more
than 86 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak
positive moment about the occipital condyles shall be not less than 36
N-m (26.6 ft-lbf) and not more than 45 N-m (33.2 ft-lbf).
(ii) The positive moment about the occipital condyles shall decay
for the first time to 5 N-m (3.7 ft-lbf) between 60 ms and 80 ms after
time zero.
(iii) The moment about the occipital condyles shall be calculated by
the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My ^ (0.005842m) x (Fx), where
My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the
neck transducer (drawing SA572 -S23) and 0.005842m is the distance from
the point at which the load cell measures the force to the occipital
condyle.
(2) Extension. (i) Plane D referenced in Figure R4 of this subpart
shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the
pendulum's longitudinal centerline not less than 80 degrees and not more
than 92 degrees. Within the specified rotation corridor, the peak
negative moment about the occipital condyles shall be not more than ^12
Nm (^8.9 ft-lbf) and not less than ^23 N-m (^17.0 ft-lbf) within the
minimum and maximum rotation interval.
(ii) The negative moment about the occipital condyles shall decay
for the first time to ^5 Nm (^3.7 lbf-ft) between 76 ms and 90 ms after
time zero.
(iii) The moment about the occipital condyles shall be calculated by
the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My ^ (0.005842m) x (Fx), where
My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the
neck transducer (drawing SA572 -S23) and 0.005842m is the distance from
the point at which the load cell measures the force to the occipital
condyle.
(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled
environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F)
and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four
hours prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be
maintained throughout the testing period specified in this section.
(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9001336) on the neck cable (drawing
ATD-6206) to 0.2 to 0.3 Nm (2-3 in-lbf).
(3) Mount the neck-headform assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of
this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the headform
is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as
shown in Figure R3 for flexion and Figure R4 for extension tests.
(i) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero
when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.
(ii) The test shall be conducted without inducing any torsion of the
neck.
(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely to achieve an
impact velocity of 5.2 0.1 m/s (17.1 0.3 ft/s) for flexion and 2.5
0.1 m/s (8.2 0.3 ft/s) for extension measured at the center of the
pendulum accelerometer at the instant of contact with the honeycomb.
(i) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. The pendulum data
channel shall be defined to be zero at this time.
(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an
acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified
in the following table. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel
to obtain the velocity vs. time curve as indicated in Table B:
Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Flexion Time Extension
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
m/s m/s ft/s ms m/s ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.................................. 1.6-2.3 5.2-7.5 6...................... 0.8-1.2 2.6-3.9
20.................................. 3.4-4.2 11.2-13 10..................... 1.5-2.1 4.9-6.9
.8
25.................................. 4.3-5.2 14.1-17 14..................... 2.2-2.9 7.2-9.5
.1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 114]]
Sec. 572.154 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) Thorax Assembly (refer to Sec. 572.150(a)(1)(iv)) . The thorax
consists of the part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 921022-060.
(b) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 921022-
000) is impacted by a test probe conforming to Sec. 572.155(a) at 5.0
0.1m/s (16.5 0.3 ft/s) according to the test procedure in paragraph
(c) of this section, the peak force, measured by the impact probe in
accordance with paragraph Sec. 572.155(a), shall be not less than 1514 N
(340.7 lbf) and not more than 1796 N (404.1 lbf).
(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment
at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and at any
relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours
prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be
maintained throughout the entire testing period specified in this
section.
(2) The test dummy is clothed in a cotton-polyester based tight
fitting sweat shirt with long sleeves and ankle long pants whose
combined weight is not more than 0.25 kg (.55 lbs).
(3) Seat and orient the dummy on a level seating surface without
back support as shown in Figure R5 of this subpart, with the lower limbs
extended forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane and the arms 0 to 5
degrees forward of vertical. The dummy's midsagittal plane is vertical
within /1 degree and the posterior surface of the upper spine box is
aligned at 90 /1 degrees from the horizontal. (Shim material may be
used under the upper legs to maintain the dummy's specified spine box
surface alignment).
(4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe
coincides with the dummy's midsagittal plane, is centered on the torso
196 /2.5 mm (7.7 /0.1 in) vertically from the plane of the seating
surface, and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane.
(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.
(7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]
Sec. 572.155 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments,
shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its
longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension
hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of
Sec. 572.154(c)(7). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.86 0.02 kg (6.3
0.05 lbs) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 164 kg-cm\2\ (0.145
lb-in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third of
the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe
must be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not
exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting
end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal
axis of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 101.6
0.25 mm (4.00 0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7
mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 101-103 mm (4-4.1 in)
diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
to the rear from the impact face. The probe's end opposite to the impact
face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive
axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe
shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz
measured in line with the longitudinal axis of the impactor, using the
test method shown in the Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and
Inspection (PADI) document referenced in Sec. 572.151.
(b) Head accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 921022-000.
[[Page 115]]
(c) The neck force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in
drawing SA572-S23 and shall be mounted for testing as shown in drawing
921022-000 and in figures R3 and R4 of this subpart.
(d) The shoulder force transducers shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S25 and are allowed
to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921022-
022 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 921022-000.
(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration
as shown in drawing 921022-000.
(f) The lumbar spine and lower neck force/moment transducer shall
have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing
SA572-S23 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in
the torso assembly in place of part No. 910420-003 as shown in drawing
921022-000.
(g) The pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in
the pelvis in triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 921022-000.
(h) The pubic force transducer shall have the dimensions and
response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S24 and is allowed
to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921022-
050 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 921022-000.
(i) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed
in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are
recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of
SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar95 ``Instrumentation for Impact
Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation'' (refer to
Sec. 572.150(a)(3)), with channel classes as follows:
(1) Head and headform acceleration--Class 1000.
(2) Neck :
(i) Forces--Class 1000;
(ii) Moments--Class 600;
(iii) Pendulum acceleration--Class 180;
(iv) Rotation potentiometer response (if used)--CFC 60.
(3) Thorax:
(i) Spine and pendulum accelerations--Class 180;
(ii) Shoulder forces--Class 600;
(4) Lumbar:
(i) Forces--Class 1000;
(ii) Moments--Class 600;
(5) Pelvis:
(i) Accelerations--Class 1000;
(ii) Pubic--Class 1000.
(j) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to
SAE J1733, 1994-12, ``Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface
Vehicle Information Report,'' (refer to Sec. 572.150(a)(4)).
(k) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance
frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the
applicable channel class.
(l) Limb joints shall be set at l g, barely restraining the weight
of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move
a limb segment shall not exceed 2 g throughout the range of limb motion.
(m) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by period of not less
than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.
(n) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as
specified in this subpart or in drawings referenced in Sec. 572.150.
[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]
Sec. Figures to Subpart R of Part 572
[[Page 116]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.008
[[Page 117]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.009
[[Page 118]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.010
[[Page 119]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.011
[[Page 120]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31MR00.012
[[Page 121]]
Subpart S_Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy
Source: 69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.160 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this
subpart S by reference:
(1) A drawings and specifications package entitled, ``Parts List and
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash
Test Dummy (H-III6CW),'' dated June 2009, incorporated by reference in
Sec. 572.161 and consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 167-0000, Complete Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.161;
(ii) Drawing No. 167-2000, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.161, 572.164, and 572.165 as part of a complete
dummy assembly;
(iii) Drawing No. 167-2020, Revision A, Spine Box Weight,
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.161, 572.164, and 572.165 as part
of a complete dummy assembly;
(iv) Drawing No. 167-3000, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.161, and 572.165 as part of a complete dummy
assembly;
(v) Drawing No. 167-3010, Revision A, Lumbar Weight Base,
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.161 and 572.165 as part of a
complete dummy assembly; and
(vi) The Hybrid III Weighted Six-Year-Old Child Parts/Drawing List,
incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.161.
(2) A procedures manual entitled, ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly, And Inspection (PADI) of the Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III
6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test Dummy (H-III6CW), revised June
2009,'' incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.161;
(3) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National
Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format
through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and
inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http:/
/www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection
of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to:
http://www.regulations.gov.
(b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The Drawings and Specifications for the Hybrid III Six-Year-Old
Weighted Child Test Dummy referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this
section are available in electronic format through the NHTSA docket
center and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810
Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.
(2) [Reserved]
[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005;
75 FR 76646, Dec. 9, 2010]
Sec. 572.161 General description.
(a) The Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy is defined
by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:
(1) ``Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-
Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test Dummy (H-III6CW),'' dated June 2009
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.160);
(2) The head, neck, arm, and leg assemblies specified in 49 CFR 572
subpart N; and
(3) ``Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, And Inspection (PADI) of
the Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test
Dummy (H-III6CW), revised June 2009'' (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.160).
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly \1\ Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Complete assembly......................... 167-0000.
Upper torso assembly...................... 167-2000.
Spine box weight.......................... 167-2020 Rev. A.
Lower torso assembly...................... 167-3000.
Lumbar weight base........................ 167-3010 Rev. A.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Head, neck, arm, and leg assemblies are as specified in 49 CFR 572
subpart N.
(b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for
contacts
[[Page 122]]
existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic
elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash impact
conditions.
(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
must conform to Subpart S in every respect and Subpart N as applicable,
before use in any test similar to those specified in Standard 208,
``Occupant Crash Protection'' (49 CFR 571.208), and Standard 213,
``Child Restraint Systems'' (49 CFR 571.213).
[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005;
75 FR 76646, Dec. 9, 2010]
Sec. 572.162 Head assembly and test procedure.
The head assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR
572.122 (Subpart N).
Sec. 572.163 Neck assembly and test procedure.
The neck assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR
572.123 (Subpart N).
Sec. 572.164 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly. The thorax consists of the part
of the torso assembly shown in drawing 167-2000 (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.160).
(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely
assembled dummy (drawing 167-2000) that is seated as shown in Figure S1
is impacted by a test probe conforming to 49 CFR 572.127(a) at 6.71
0.12 m/s (22.0 0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure specified in
49 CFR 572.124(c):
(1) The maximum sternum displacement relative to the spine, measured
with chest deflection transducer (specified in 49 CFR 572.124(b)(1)),
must be not less than 38.0 mm (1.50 in) and not more than 46.0 mm (1.80
in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force,
measured by the probe in accordance with 49 CFR 572.127, must be not
less than 1205 N (270.9 lbf) and not more than 1435 N (322.6 lbf). The
peak force after 12.5 mm (0.5 in) of sternum displacement, but before
reaching the minimum required 38.0 mm (1.46 in) sternum displacement
limit, must not exceed an upper limit of 1500 N.
(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (b)(1) of
this section must be not less than 65 percent but not more than 85
percent.
(c) Test procedure. The thorax assembly is tested as specified in 49
CFR 572.124(c).
Sec. 572.165 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test
procedure.
(a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine
the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (specified in 49 CFR
572.125(a)), including cable (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), mounting
plate insert (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), nylon shoulder bushing
(specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), nut (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)),
spine box weighting plates (drawing 167-2020 Revision A), lumbar base
weight (drawing 167-3010 Revision A), and abdominal insert (specified in
49 CFR 572.125(a)), on resistance to articulation between the upper
torso assembly (drawing 167-2000) and the lower torso assembly (drawing
167-3000). Drawing Nos. 167-2000, 167-2020 Revision A, 167-3000, and
167-3010 Revision A, are incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.160.
(b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected
to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level
through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure S2
according to the test procedure set out in 49 CFR 572.125(c), the lumbar
spine-abdomen assembly must flex by an amount that permits the upper
torso assembly to translate in angular motion until the machined surface
of the instrument cavity at the back of the thoracic spine box is at 45
0.5 degrees relative to the transverse plane, at which time the force
applied as shown in Figure S2 must be within 88.6 N 25 N (20.0 lbf 5.6
lbf), and
(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to
within 9 degrees of its initial position.
(c) Test procedure. The upper and lower torso assemblies are tested
as specified in 49 CFR 572.125(c), except that in paragraph (c)(5) of
that section,
[[Page 123]]
the initial torso orientation angle may not exceed 32 degrees.
[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005]
Sec. 572.166 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
The knee assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR
572.126 (Subpart N).
Sec. 572.167 Test conditions and instrumentation.
The test conditions and instrumentation are as specified in 49 CFR
572.127 (Subpart N).
Sec. Figures to Subpart S of Part 572
[[Page 124]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16JY04.005
[[Page 125]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16JY04.006
[[Page 126]]
Subpart T_Hybrid III 10-Year-Old Child Test Dummy (HIII 10C)
Source: 77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.170 Incorporation by reference.
(a) Certain material is incorporated by reference (IBR) into this
part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5
U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that
specified in this section, NHTSA must publish notice of change in the
Federal Register and the material must be available to the public. All
approved material is available for inspection at the Department of
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, telephone 202-366-9826,
and is available from the sources listed below. The material is
available in electronic format through Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-
5457 or go to www.regulations.gov. It is also available for inspection
at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For
information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-
6030 or go to http://www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-
locations.html.
(b) NHTSA Technical Information Services, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE.,
Washington, DC 20590, telephone 202-366-5965.
(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, ``Parts/Drawing List, Part 572
Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March,
2015,'' IBR approved for Sec. 572.171.
(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled, ``Parts List and
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Crash Dummy
(HIII-10C), March 2015,'' IBR approved for Sec. 572.171, including:
(i) Drawing No. 420-0000, Complete Assembly HIII 10-year-old, IBR
approved for Secs. 572.171, 572.172, 572.173, 572.174, 572.176, and
572.177.
(ii) Drawing No. 420-1000, Head Assembly, IBR approved for
Sec. 572.171, Sec. 572.172, Sec. 572.173, and Sec. 572.177.
(iii) Drawing No. 420-2000, Neck Assembly, IBR approved for
Secs. 572.171, 572.173, and 572.177.
(iv) Drawing No. 420-3000, Upper Torso Assembly, IBR approved for
Secs. 572.171, 572.174, 572.175, and 572.177.
(v) Drawing No. 420-4000, Lower Torso Assembly, IBR approved for
Secs. 572.171, 572.174, 572.175, and 572.177.
(vi) Drawing No. 420-5000-1, Complete Leg Assembly--left, IBR
approved for Secs. 572.171, 572.176, and 572.177.
(vii) Drawing No. 420-5000-2, Complete Leg Assembly--right, IBR
approved for Secs. 572.171, 572.176, and 572.177.
(viii) Drawing No. 420-7000-1, Complete Arm Assembly--left, IBR
approved for Sec. 572.171, and,
(ix) Drawing No. 420-7000-2, Complete Arm Assembly--right, IBR
approved for Sec. 572.171.
(3) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child
Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015''; IBR approved for Secs. 572.171 and
572.177.
(c) SAE International, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096,
call 1-877-606-7323.
(1) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95, ``Instrumentation
for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation,'' IBR approved for
Sec. 572.177.
(2) SAE Information Report J1733 of 1994-12, ``Sign Convention for
Vehicle Crash Testing,'' December 1994, IBR approved for Sec. 572.177.
[77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 35860, June 23, 2015]
Sec. 572.171 General description.
(a) The Hybrid III 10-year-old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C) is
defined by drawings and specifications containing the following
materials:
(1) The parts enlisted in ``Parts/Drawing List, Part 572 Subpart T,
Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March, 2015''
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170),
(2) The engineering drawings and specifications contained in ``Parts
List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child
Crash Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015,'' which includes the engineering
drawings and specifications described in Drawing 420-0000, the titles of
the assemblies of which are listed in Table A, and,
(3) A manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and
Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 10 Year Old
[[Page 127]]
Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015.''
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i) Head Assembly.................................. 420-1000
(ii) Neck Assembly................................. 420-2000
(iii) Upper Torso Assembly......................... 420-3000
(iv) Lower Torso Assembly.......................... 420-4000
(v) Complete Leg Assembly--left.................... 420-5000-1
(vi) Complete Leg Assembly--right.................. 420-5000-2
(vii) Complete Arm Assembly--left.................. 420-7000-1
(viii) Complete Arm Assembly--right................ 420-7000-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test.
[77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 35860, June 23, 2015]
Sec. 572.172 Head assembly and test procedure.
(a) The head assembly for this test consists of the complete head
(drawing 420-1000), a six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11,
included in drawing 420-0000), or its structural replacement (drawing
420-383X), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4, included in drawing
420-0000) (all incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(b) When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 376.0 1.0 mm
(14.8 0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the
peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the
head CG may not be less than 250 G or more than 300 G. The resultant
acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations
occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak
resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G
(zero to peak).
(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as
follows:
(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 C (66 and 78 F) and a relative
humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the
impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an
equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.
(3) Suspend and orient the head assembly as shown in Figure T1. The
lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 1.0 mm (14.8 0.04 in) from
the impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on
either side of the dummy's head shall be used to ensure that the head is
level with respect to the impact surface.
(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that
ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat
horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in)
square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish
of not less than 203.2 x 10^6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and
not more than 2032.0 x 10^6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).
(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same
head.
Sec. 572.173 Neck assembly and test procedure.
(a) The neck assembly for the purposes of this test consists of the
assembly of components shown in drawing 420-2000 (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 420-
1000), neck (drawing 420-2000), six-channel neck transducer (SA572-S11,
included in drawing 420-0000), lower neck bracket assembly (drawing 420-
2070), and either three uniaxial accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4,
included in drawing 420-0000) or their mass equivalent installed in the
head assembly as specified in drawing 420-1000 (all incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170), is tested according to the test
[[Page 128]]
procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following
characteristics:
(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure T2, shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 76 degrees and 90 degrees. During the
time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the
peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11,
included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170), about the occipital condyles may not be less than 50 N-m
(36.9 ft-lbf) and not more than 62 N-m (45.7 ft-lbf). The positive
moment shall decay for the first time to 10 N-m (7.4 ft-lbf) between 86
ms and 105 ms after time zero.
(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment
(N-m) = My ^ (0.01778) x (FX).
(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis in Newton-meters,
FX is the shear force measured by the neck transducer
(drawing SA572-S11) in Newtons, and 0.01778 is the distance in meters
from the load center of the neck transducer to the occipital condyle.
(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure T3, shall rotate in
the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum's
longitudinal centerline between 96 degrees and 115 degrees. During the
time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the
peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11,
included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170), about the occipital condyles may not be more than ^37 N-m
(^27.3 ft-lbf) and not less than ^46 N-m (^33.9 ft-lbf). The positive
moment shall decay for the first time to ^10 N-m (^7.4 ft-lbf) between
100 ms and 116 ms after time zero.
(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment
(N-m) = My ^ (0.01778) x (FX).
(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis in Newton-meters,
FX is the shear force measured by the neck transducer
(drawing SA572-S11, included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170) in Newtons, and 0.01778 is the distance in
meters from the load center of the neck transducer to the occipital
condyle.
(3) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels
shall be at the zero level at this time.
(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a
test.
(2) Torque the hex nut (drawing 420-2000, part 9000130) on the neck
cable (drawing 420-2060) (both incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170) to 0.9 0.2 N-m (8 2 in-lbf) before each test on the same
neck.
(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this
section, on the pendulum described in Figure 22 of 49 CFR part 572 so
that the leading edge of the lower neck bracket coincides with the
leading edge of the pendulum as shown in Figure T2 for flexion tests and
Figure T3 for extension tests.
(4)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a
height to achieve an impact velocity of 6.1 0.12 m/s (20.0 0.4 ft/s)
for flexion tests and 5.03 0.12 m/s (16.50 0.40 ft/s) for extension
tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in
Figure T2 at the instant of contact with the honeycomb.
(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an
acceleration vs. time pulse that meets the velocity change as specified
below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the
velocity vs. time curve:
Table B--Pendulum Pulse
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flexion Extension
Time (ms) ---------------------------------------------------------------
M/s ft/s m/s ft/s
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.............................................. 1.64-2.04 5.38-6.69 1.49-1.89 4.89-6.20
[[Page 129]]
20.............................................. 3.04-4.04 9.97-13.25 2.88-3.68 9.45-12.07
30.............................................. 4.45-5.65 14.60-18.53 4.20-5.20 13.78-17.06
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec. 572.174 Thorax assembly and test procedure.
(a) The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly designated
as the upper torso (drawing 420-3000) (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170).
(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely
assembled dummy (drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170) is impacted by a test probe conforming to section 572.177
at 6.00 0.12 m/s (22.0 0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure in
paragraph (c) of this section:
(1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the
spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-T4,
included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170), must be not less than 37 mm (1.46 in) and not more than
46 mm (1.81 in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak
force, measured by the impact probe as defined in section 572.177 and
calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall
not be less than 2.0 kN (450 lbf) and not more than 2.45 kN (551 lbf).
The peak force after 20 mm (0.79 in.) of sternum displacement but before
reaching the minimum required 37 mm (1.46 in.) sternum displacement
limit shall not exceed 2.52 kN (567 lbf).
(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as
determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (a)(1) of
this section shall be not less than 69 percent but not more than 85
percent. The hysteresis shall be calculated by determining the ratio of
the area between the loading (from time zero to maximum deflection) and
unloading portions (from maximum deflection to zero force) of the force
deflection curve to the area under the loading portion of the curve.
(3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor
mass and its measured deceleration.
(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as
follows:
(1) The dummy is clothed in a form fitting cotton stretch above-the-
elbow sleeved shirt and above-the-knees pants. The weight of the shirt
and pants shall not exceed 0.14 kg (0.30 lb) each.
(2) Torque the lumbar cable (drawing 420-4130) (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170) to 0.9 0.2 N-m (8 2 in-lbf) and set the
lumbar adjustment angle to 12 degrees. Set the neck angle to 16 degrees.
(3) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative humidity between
10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(4) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back
support as shown in Figure T4, with the limbs extended horizontally and
forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane
vertical within 1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior
and lateral directions within 0.5 degrees.
(5) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so
that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe
coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within 2.5 mm (0.1
in) and is 12.7 1.1 mm (0.5 0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral
centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal
line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(6) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of
contact the probe's longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a
horizontal line in the dummy's midsagittal plane.
(7) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no
significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.
(8) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity
[[Page 130]]
vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.
Sec. 572.175 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion
test procedure.
(a) The test objective is to determine the stiffness of the molded
lumbar assembly (drawing 420-4100), abdominal insert (drawing 420-4300),
and chest flesh assembly (drawing 420-3560) on resistance to
articulation between the upper torso assembly (drawing 420-3000) and
lower torso assembly (drawing 420-4000) (all incorporated by reference,
see Sec. 572.170).
(b) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected to
a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level through
a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure T5 according to
the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section:
(1) The lumbar spine-abdomen-chest flesh assembly shall flex by an
amount that permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular
motion relative to the vertical transverse plane 35 0.5 degrees at
which time the force applied must be not less than 180 N (40.5 lbf) and
not more than 250 N (56.2 lbf).
(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to
within 8 degrees of its initial position.
(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the upper/lower torso
assembly is as follows:
(1) Torque the lumbar cable (drawing 420-4130) (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170) to 0.9 0.2 N-m (8 2 in-lbf) and set the
lumbar adjustment angle to 12 degrees. Set the neck angle to 16 degrees.
(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature
between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative humidity between
10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.
(3) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the legs below the
femurs) and attach to the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure
T5.
(4) Secure the pelvis to the fixture at the pelvis instrument cavity
rear face by threading four \1/4\-inch cap screws into the available
threaded attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test
material is rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar
joining surface is 18 degrees from horizontal and the legs are parallel
with the test fixture.
(5) Attach the loading adaptor bracket to the spine of the dummy as
shown in Figure T5.
(6) Inspect and adjust, if necessary, the seating of the abdominal
insert within the pelvis cavity and with respect to the chest flesh,
assuring that the chest flesh provides uniform fit and overlap with
respect to the outside surface of the pelvis flesh.
(7) Flex the dummy's upper torso three times between the vertical
and until the torso reference frame, as shown in Figure T5, reaches 30
degrees from the vertical transverse plane. Bring the torso to vertical
orientation and wait for 30 minutes before conducting the test. During
the 30-minute waiting period, the dummy's upper torso shall be
externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to prevent it
from drooping.
(8) Remove all external support and wait two minutes. Measure the
initial orientation angle of the torso reference plane of the seated,
unsupported dummy as shown in Figure T5. The initial orientation angle
may not exceed 20 degrees.
(9) Attach the pull cable and the load cell as shown in Figure T5.
(10) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull
cable as shown in Figure T5 at any upper torso deflection rate between
0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second, until the angle reference plane is at 35
0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane.
(11) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 35 0.5
degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force
during the 10-second period.
(12) Release all force at the attachment bracket as rapidly as
possible, and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle
reference plane as defined in paragraph (c)(7) of this section three
minutes after the release.
[[Page 131]]
Sec. 572.176 Knees and knee impact test procedure.
(a) The knee assembly for the purpose of this test is the part of
the leg assembly shown in drawing 420-5000 (incorporated by reference,
see Sec. 572.170).
(b) When the knee assembly, consisting of lower upper leg assembly
(420-5200), femur load transducer (SA572-S10, included in drawing 420-
0000) or its structural replacement (420-5121), lower leg assembly (420-
5300), ankle assembly (420-5400), and foot molded assembly (420-5500)
(all incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170) is tested according to
the test procedure in subsection (c) of this section:
(1) The peak resistance force as measured with the test probe-
mounted accelerometer must not be less than 2.6 kN (585 lbf) and not
more than 3.2 kN (719 lbf).
(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor
mass and its deceleration.
(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as
follows:
(1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any
temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 C (69 and 72 F) and a relative
humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a
test.
(2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as
shown in Figure T6. No part of the foot or tibia may contact any
exterior surface.
(3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at
contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear
with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.
(4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral,
vertical, or rotational movement at the time of initial contact between
the impactor and the knee.
(5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1
0.03 m/s (6.9 0.1 ft/s).
(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other
attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
Sec. 572.177 Test conditions and instrumentation.
(a) The following test equipment and instrumentation is needed for
qualification as set forth in this subpart:
(1) The test probe for thoracic impacts is of rigid metallic
construction, concentric in shape, and symmetric about its longitudinal
axis. It has a mass of 6.89 0.05 kg (15.2 0.1 lb) and a minimum mass
moment of inertia of 2040 kg-cm\2\ (1.81 lbf-in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch
about the CG. One-third (\1/3\) of the weight of the suspension cables
and their attachments to the impact probe is included in the calculation
of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total
weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular
to and concentric with the longitudinal axis, is at least 25.4 mm (1.0
in) long, and has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 121 0.25 mm
(4.76 0.01 in) diameter face with a maximum edge radius of 12.7 mm (0.5
in). The probe's end opposite to the impact face has provisions for
mounting of an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the
longitudinal axis of the probe. No concentric portions of the impact
probe may exceed the diameter of the impact face. The impact probe has a
free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be
determined using the procedure listed in the PADI (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(2) The test probe for knee impacts is of rigid metallic
construction, concentric in shape, and symmetric about its longitudinal
axis. It has a mass of 1.91 0.05 kg (4.21 0.1 lb) and a minimum mass
moment of inertia of 140 kg-cm\2\ (0.124 lbf-in-sec\2\) in yaw and pitch
about the CG. One third (\1/3\) of the weight of the suspension cables
and their attachments to the impact probe may be included in the
calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of
the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe,
perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis, is at least
12.5 mm (0.5 in) long, and has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable
76.2 0.2 mm (3.00 0.01 in) diameter face with a maximum edge radius of
12.7 mm (0.5 in). The probe's end opposite to the impact face has
provisions for
[[Page 132]]
mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the
longitudinal axis of the probe. No concentric portions of the impact
probe may exceed the diameter of the impact face. The impact probe has a
free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be
determined using the procedure listed in the PADI (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(3) Head accelerometers have dimensions, response characteristics,
and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 (included in
drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the head as shown in drawing 420-
0000 (both incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.
(4) The upper neck force and moment transducer has the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in
drawing SA572-S11 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted in the
head-neck assembly as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.
(5) The chest deflection transducer has the dimensions and response
characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S50 (included in drawing 420-
0000) and is mounted to the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing
420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170), sheet 2 of
6.
(b) The following instrumentation may be required for installation
in the dummy for compliance testing. If so, it is installed during
qualification procedures as described in this subpart:
(1) The thorax CG accelerometers have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170) and are mounted in the torso assembly in a triaxial
configuration within the spine box instrumentation cavity.
(2) The lower neck force and moment transducer has the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in
drawing SA572-S40 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted to the
neck assembly by replacing the lower neck mounting bracket 420-2070 as
shown in drawing 420-2000 (all incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170).
(3) The clavicle force transducers have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing
SA572-S41 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the shoulder
assembly as shown in drawing 420-3800 (both incorporated by reference,
see Sec. 572.170).
(4) The IR-Tracc chest deflection transducers have the dimensions
and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S43 (included in
drawing 420-0000) and are mounted to the spine box assembly as shown in
drawing 420-8000 (both incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(5) The spine and sternum accelerometers have the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in
drawing SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the
torso assembly in uniaxial fore-and-aft oriented configuration arranged
as corresponding pairs in two locations each on the sternum and at the
spine box of the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both
incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.
(6) The lumbar spine force-moment transducer has the dimensions,
response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in
drawing SA572-S12 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted in the
lower torso assembly as shown in drawing 420-4000 (both incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(7) The iliac force transducers have the dimensions and response
characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S13 L and R (included in
drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the lower torso assembly as shown
in drawing 420-4000 (both incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170).
(8) The pelvis accelerometers have the dimensions, response
characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing
SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the torso
assembly in triaxial configuration in the pelvis bone as shown in
drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170),
sheet 2 of 6.
(9) The femur force and moment transducers (SA572-S10, included in
drawing 420-0000) have the dimensions, response characteristics, and
sensitive
[[Page 133]]
axis locations specified in the appropriate drawing and are mounted in
the upper leg assembly, replacing the femur load cell simulator (drawing
420-5121) as shown in drawing 420-5100 (all incorporated by reference,
see Sec. 572.170).
(10) The tilt sensors have the dimensions and response
characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S42 (included in drawing 420-
0000) and are mounted to the head, thorax, and pelvis assemblies as
shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.
(c) The outputs of transducers installed in the dummy and in the
test equipment specified by this part are to be recorded in individual
data channels that conform to SAE Recommended Practice J211
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.170) except as noted, with
channel frequency classes as follows:
(1) Pendulum acceleration, CFC 180,
(2) Pendulum D-plane rotation (if transducer is used), CFC 60,
(3) Torso flexion pulling force (if transducer is used), CFC 60,
(4) Head acceleration, CFC 1000,
(5) Neck forces, upper and lower, CFC 1000,
(6) Neck moments, upper and lower, CFC 600,
(7) Thorax CG acceleration, CFC 180,
(8) Sternum deflection, Class 600,
(9) Sternum and rib accelerations, Class 1000,
(10) Spine accelerations, CFC 180,
(11) Lumbar forces, CFC 1000,
(12) Lumbar moments, CFC 600,
(13) Shoulder forces, CFC 180,
(14) Pelvis accelerations, CFC 1000,
(15) Iliac forces, CFC 180,
(16) Femur and tibia forces, CFC 600,
(17) Femur and tibia moments, CFC 600.
(18) Thorax probe acceleration, CFC 180,
(19) Knee probe acceleration, CFC 600.
(d) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity are to conform to
SAE Information Report J1733 (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.170).
(e) The mountings for sensing devices have no resonant frequency
less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.
(f) Limb joints are set at one G, barely restraining the weight of
the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a
limb segment is not to exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.
(g) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy are separated in time by not less than 30 minutes
unless otherwise noted.
(h) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as
specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.
[77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 35860, June 23, 2015]
Sec. Appendix--Figures to Subpart T of Part 572
[[Page 134]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27FE12.003
[[Page 135]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27FE12.004
[[Page 136]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27FE12.005
[[Page 137]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27FE12.006
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27FE12.007
[[Page 138]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27FE12.008
Subpart U_ES 2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult
Male
Source: 71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.180 Incorporated materials.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this
Subpart by reference:
(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, ``Parts/Drawings List, Part 572
Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES2re), September 2009,''
incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.181.
(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled ``Parts List and
Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re,
Alpha Version), September 2009,'' consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 175-0000, ES-2re Dummy Assembly, incorporated by
reference, see Secs. 572.181, 575.182, 572.184;
(ii) Drawing No. 175-1000, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.181 and 572.182;
(iii) Drawing No. 175-2000, Neck Assembly Test/Cert, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.183;
(iv) Drawing No. 175-3000, Shoulder Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.184;
(v) Drawing No. 175-3500, Arm Assembly, Left, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.185;
(vi) Drawing No. 175-3800, Arm Assembly, Right, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181, and 572.185;
(vii) Drawing No. 175-4000, Thorax Assembly with Rib Extensions,
incorporated by reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.185;
(viii) Drawing No. 175-5000, Abdominal Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.186;
(ix) Drawing No. 175-5500, Lumbar Spine Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.187;
(x) Drawing No. 175-6000, Pelvis Assembly, incorporated by reference
in Secs. 572.181 and 572.188;
(xi) Drawing No. 175-7000-1, Leg Assembly--left incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.181;
(xii) Drawing No. 175-7000-2, Leg Assembly--right incorporated by
reference in Sec. 572.181;
[[Page 139]]
(xiii) Drawing No. 175-8000, Neoprene Body Suit, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181 and 572.185; and,
(xiv) Drawing No. 175-9000, Headform Assembly, incorporated by
reference in Secs. 572.181, 572.183, 572.187;
(3) A procedures manual entitled ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) of the EuroSID-2re 50th Percentile
Adult Male Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, February 2008,'' incorporated
by reference in Secs. 572.180(a)(2), and 572.181(a);
(4) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211,
Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation for Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic
Instrumentation''; and,
(5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12 ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash
Testing.''
(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National
Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format
through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and
inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http:/
/www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection
of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to:
http://www.regulations.gov.
(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib
Extensions (ES2re) referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the
Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib
Extensions (ES-2re, Alpha Version) referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of
this section, and the PADI document referred to in paragraph (a)(3) of
this section, are available in electronic format through Regulations.gov
and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810
Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, telephone (301) 670-0090.
(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers,
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, telephone 1-877-606-
7323.
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33920, June 16, 2008;
76 FR 31864, June 2, 2011]
Sec. 572.181 General description.
(a) The ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult
Male, is defined by:
(1) The drawings and specifications contained in the ``Parts List
and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re,
Alpha Version), September 2009,'' (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 572.180), which includes the technical drawings and specifications
described in Drawing 175-0000, the titles of which are listed in Table
A;
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly Drawing No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Head Assembly............................. 175-1000
Neck Assembly Test/Cert................... 175-2000
Neck Bracket Including Lifting Eyebolt.... 175-2500
Shoulder Assembly......................... 175-3000
Arm Assembly-Left......................... 175-3500
Arm Assembly-Right........................ 175-3800
Thorax Assembly with Rib Extensions....... 175-4000
Abdominal Assembly........................ 175-5000
Lumbar Spine Assembly..................... 175-5500
Pelvis Assembly........................... 175-6000
Leg Assembly, Left........................ 175-7000-1
Leg Assembly, Right....................... 175-7000-2
Neoprene Body Suit........................ 175-8000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) ``Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib
Extensions (ES2re), September 2009,'' containing 9 pages, incorporated
by reference, see Sec. 572.180,
(3) A listing of available transducers-crash test sensors for the
ES-2re Crash Test Dummy is shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 4 of 6, dated
February 2008, incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.180,
(4) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) of
the ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, February 2008, incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 572.180,
[[Page 140]]
(5) Sign convention for signal outputs reference document SAE J1733
Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing''
dated December 1994, incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.180.
(b) Exterior dimensions of ES-2re test dummy are shown in drawing
175-0000 sheet 3 of 6, dated February 2008, incorporated by reference,
see Sec. 572.180.
(c) Weights of body segments (head, neck, upper and lower torso,
arms and upper and lower segments) and the center of gravity location of
the head are shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 2 of 6, dated February
2008, incorporated by reference, see Sec. 572.180.
(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no additional
contact between metallic elements of adjacent body segments throughout
the range of motion.
(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar
to those in Standard No. 214, Side Impact Protection and Standard No.
201, Occupant Protection in Interior Impact.
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008;
76 FR 31866, June 2, 2011]
Sec. 572.182 Head assembly.
(a) The head assembly consists of the head (drawing 175-1000),
including the neck upper transducer structural replacement, and a set of
three (3) accelerometers in conformance with specifications in
Sec. 572.189(b) and mounted as shown in drawing (175-0000 sheet 1 of 6).
When tested to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this
section, the head assembly shall meet performance requirements specified
in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. The head shall be tested per procedure specified
in 49 CFR Sec. 572.112(a).
(c) Performance criteria. (1) When the head assembly is dropped in
accordance with Sec. 572.112 (a), the measured peak resultant
acceleration shall be between 125 g's and 155 g's;
(2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse
shall not exceed 15% (zero to peak) of the main pulse;
(3) The fore-and-aft component of the head acceleration shall not
exceed 15 g's.
Sec. 572.183 Neck assembly.
(a) The neck assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 175-2000.
For purposes of this test, the neck is mounted within the headform
assembly 175-9000 as shown in Figure U1 in appendix A to this subpart.
When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this
section, the neck-headform assembly shall meet performance requirements
specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck-headform assembly in a test
environment as specified in Sec. 572.189(n);
(2) Attach the neck-headform assembly to the part 572 subpart E
pendulum test fixture as shown in Figure U2-A in appendix A to this
subpart, so that the midsagittal plane of the neck-headform assembly is
vertical and perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum
longitudinal centerline shown in Figure U2-A. Torque the half-spherical
screws (175-2004) located at either end of the neck assembly to 88 5
in-lbs using the neck compression tool (175-9500) or equivalent;
(3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to allow it to
fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 3.40.1 m/s measured at the
center of the pendulum accelerometer (Figure 22 as set forth in 49 CFR
572.33) at the time the pendulum makes contact with the decelerating
mechanism. The velocity-time history of the pendulum falls inside the
corridor determined by the upper and lower boundaries specified in Table
1 to paragraph (a) of this section.
(4) Allow the neck to flex without the neck-headform assembly making
contact with any object;
(5) Time zero is defined in Sec. 572.189(j).
Table 1 to Paragraph (a)--ES-2re Neck Certification Pendulum Velocity
Corridor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Upper boundary Lower boundary
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Velocity Velocity
Time (ms) (m/s) Time (ms) (m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0.................................... 0.00 0.0 ^0.05
[[Page 141]]
3.0.................................... ^0.25 2.5 ^0.375
14.0................................... ^3.20 13.5 ^3.7
17.0 ^3.7
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to
be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as determined by
integrating the filtered pendulum acceleration response from time-zero.
(2) The maximum rotation in the lateral direction of the reference
plane of the headform (175-9000) as shown in Figure U2-B in appendix A
to this subpart, shall be 49 to 59 degrees with respect to the
longitudinal axis of the pendulum occurring between 54 and 66 ms from
time zero. Rotation of the headform-neck assembly and the neck angle
with respect to the pendulum shall be measured with potentiometers
specified in Sec. 572.189(c), installed as shown in drawing 175-9000,
and calculated per procedure specified in Figure U2-B in appendix A to
this subpart;
(3) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the
zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact
relative to the pendulum centerline between 53 ms to 88 ms after the
time the peak translation-rotation value is reached.
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]
Sec. 572.184 Shoulder assembly.
(a) The shoulder (175-3000) is part of the body assembly shown in
drawing 175-0000. When subjected to impact tests specified in paragraph
(b) of this section, the shoulder assembly shall meet performance
requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly, without suit and
shoulder foam pad (175-3010), in a test environment as specified in
Sec. 572.189(n);
(2) The dummy is seated, as shown in Figure U3 in appendix A to this
subpart, on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface covered by two overlaid 2
mm thick Teflon sheets and with no back support of the dummy's torso.
The dummy's torso spine backplate is vertical within 2 degrees and the
midsagittal plane of the thorax is positioned perpendicular to the
direction of the plane of motion of the impactor at contact with the
shoulder. The arms are oriented forward at 502 degrees from the
horizontal, pointing downward. The dummy's legs are horizontal and
symmetrical about the midsaggital plane with the distance between the
innermost point on the opposite ankle at 100 5 mm. The length of the
elastic shoulder cord (175-3015) shall be adjusted so that a force
between and including 27.5 and 32.5 N applied in a forward direction at
4 1 mm from the outer edge of the clavicle in the same plane as the
clavicle movement, is required to initiate a forward motion of 1 to 5
mm;
(3) The impactor is the same as defined in Sec. 572.189(a);
(4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
shoulder, its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal
plane and perpendicular (0.5 degrees) to the midsagittal plane of the
dummy and the centerpoint on the impactor's face is within 5 mm of the
center of the upper arm pivot bolt (5000040) at contact with the test
dummy, as shown in Figure U3 in appendix A to this subpart;
(5) The impactor impacts the dummy's shoulder at 4.30.1 m/s.
(c) Performance criteria. The peak acceleration of the impactor is
between 7.5 g's and 10.5 g's during the pendulum's contact with the
dummy.
Sec. 572.185 Thorax (upper torso) assembly.
(a) The thorax assembly of the dummy must meet the requirements of
both (b) and (c) of this section. Section 572.185(b) specifies
requirements for an individual rib drop test, and Sec. 572.185(c)
specifies requirements for a full-body thorax impact test.
(b) Individual rib drop test. For purposes of this test, the rib
modules (175-4002), which are part of the thorax assembly (175-4000),
are tested as individual units. When subjected to test procedures
specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the rib modules shall
meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this
section.
[[Page 142]]
Each rib is tested at both the 459 mm and 815 mm drop height tests
described in paragraphs (b)(1)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.
(1) Test procedure. (i) Soak the rib modules (175-4002) in a test
environment as specified in 572.189(n);
(ii) Mount the rib module rigidly in a drop test fixture as shown in
Figure U7 in appendix A to this subpart with the impacted side of the
rib facing up;
(iii) The drop test fixture contains a free fall guided mass of
7.780.01 kg that is of rigid construction and with a flat impact face
1501.0 mm in diameter and an edge radius of 0.25 mm;
(iv) Align the vertical longitudinal centerline of the drop mass so
that the centerpoint of the downward-facing flat surface is aligned to
impact the centerline of the rib rail guide system within 2.5 mm.
(v) The impacting mass is dropped from the following heights:
(A) 459 5 mm
(B) 815 8 mm
(vi) A test cycle consists of one drop from each drop height
specified in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section. Allow a period of not
less than five (5) minutes between impacts in a single test cycle. Allow
a period of not less than thirty (30) minutes between two separate
cycles of the same rib module.
(2) Performance criteria.
(i) Each of the rib modules shall deflect as specified in paragraphs
(b)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, with the deflection measurements
made with the internal rib module position transducer specified in
Sec. 572.189(d):
(A) Not less than 36 mm and not more than 40 mm when impacted by the
mass dropped from 459 mm; and,
(B) Not less than 46 mm and not more than 51mm when impacted by the
mass dropped from 815 mm.
(c) Full-body thorax impact test. The thorax is part of the upper
torso assembly shown in drawing 175-4000. For this full-body thorax
impact test, the dummy is tested as a complete assembly (drawing 175-
0000) with the struck-side arm (175-3500, left arm; 175-3800, right arm)
removed. The dummy's thorax is equipped with deflection potentiometers
as specified in drawing SA572-S69. When subjected to the test procedures
specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the thorax shall meet the
performance requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(2).
(1) Test Procedure. (i) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000), with
struck-side arm (175-3500, left arm; 175-3800, right arm), shoulder foam
pad (175-3010), and neoprene body suit (175-8000) removed, in a test
environment as specified in Sec. 572.189(n);
(ii) The dummy is seated, as shown in Figure U4 in appendix A to
this subpart, on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface covered by two
overlaid 2 mm thick Teflon sheets and with no back support of the
dummy's torso. The dummy's torso spine backplate is vertical within 2
degrees and the midsagittal plane of thorax is positioned perpendicular
to the direction of the plane of motion of the impactor at contact with
the thorax. The non-struck side arm is oriented vertically, pointing
downward. The dummy's legs are horizontal and symmetrical about the
midsagittal plane with the distance between the innermost point on the
opposite ankle at 100 5 mm;
(iii) The impactor is the same as defined in Sec. 572.189(a);
(iv) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
thorax its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees of horizontal and
perpendicular 0.5 degrees to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the
centerpoint of the impactor's face is within 5 mm of the impact point on
the dummy's middle rib shown in Figure U4 in appendix A to this subpart;
(v) The impactor impacts the dummy's thorax at 5.5 m/s 0.1 m/s.
(vi) Time zero is defined in Sec. 572.189(k).
(2) Performance Criteria. (i) The individual rib modules shall
conform to the following range of deflections:
(A) Upper rib not less than 34 mm and not greater than 41 mm;
(B) Middle rib not less than 37 mm and not greater than 45 mm;
(C) Lower rib not less than 37 mm and not greater than 44 mm.
(ii) The impactor force shall be computed as the product of the
impact probe acceleration and its mass. The peak impactor force at any
time after 6 ms from time zero shall be not less
[[Page 143]]
than 5100 N and not greater than 6200 N.
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]
Sec. 572.186 Abdomen assembly.
(a) The abdomen assembly (175-5000) is part of the dummy assembly
shown in drawing 175-0000 including load sensors specified in
Sec. 572.189(e). When subjected to tests procedures specified in
paragraph (b) of this section, the abdomen assembly shall meet
performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure.
(1) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000), without suit (175-8000) and
shoulder foam pad (175-3010), as specified in Sec. 572.189(n);
(2) The dummy is seated as shown in Figure U5 in appendix A to this
subpart;
(3) The abdomen impactor is the same as specified in Sec. 572.189(a)
except that on its rectangular impact surface is affixed a special
purpose block whose weight is 1.0 0.01 kg. The block is 70 mm high, 150
mm wide and 60 to 80 mm deep. The impact surface is flat, has a minimum
Rockwell hardness of M85, and an edge radius of 4 to 5 mm. The block's
wide surface is horizontally oriented and centered on the longitudinal
axis of the probe's impact face as shown in Figure U5-A in appendix A to
this subpart;
(4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
abdomen its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal
plane and perpendicular 0.5 degrees to the midsagittal plane of the
dummy and the centerpoint on the impactor's face is aligned within 5 mm
of the center point of the middle load measuring sensor in the abdomen
as shown in Figure U5;
(5) The impactor impacts the dummy's abdomen at 4.0 m/s 0.1 m/s;
(6) Time zero is defined in Sec. 572.189(k).
(c) Performance criteria.
(1) The maximum sum of the forces of the three abdominal load
sensors, specified in 572.189(e), shall be not less than 2200 N and not
more than 2700 N and shall occur between 10 ms and 12.3 ms from time
zero. The calculated sum of the three load cell forces must be
concurrent in time.
(2) Maximum impactor force (impact probe acceleration multiplied by
its mass) is not less than 4000 N and not more than 4800 N occurring
between 10.6 ms and 13.0 ms from time zero.
Sec. 572.187 Lumbar spine.
(a) The lumbar spine assembly consists of parts shown in drawing
175-5500. For purposes of this test, the lumbar spine is mounted within
the headform assembly 175-9000 as shown in Figure U1 in appendix A to
this subpart. When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph
(b) of this section, the lumbar spine-headform assembly shall meet
performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the lumbar spine-headform assembly in a
test environment as specified in Sec. 572.189(n);
(2) Attach the lumbar spine-headform assembly to the Part 572
pendulum test fixture per procedure in Sec. 572.183(b)(2) and as shown
in Figure U2-A in appendix A to this subpart. Torque the lumbar hex nut
(p/n 9000057) on to the lumbar cable assembly (175-5506) to 50 5 in-lb;
(3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to allow it to
fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 6.05 0.1 m/s measured at
the center of the pendulum accelerometer (Figure 22) at the time the
pendulum makes contact with its decelerating mechanism. The velocity-
time history of the pendulum falls inside the corridor determined by the
upper and lower boundaries specified in Table 1 to paragraph (b) of this
section;
(4) Allow the lumbar spine to flex without the lumbar spine or the
headform making contact with any object;
(5) Time zero is defined in Sec. 572.189(j).
Table 1 to paragraph (b)--ES-2re Lumbar Spine Certification Pendulum
Velocity Corridor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Upper boundary Lower boundary
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time (ms) Velocity (m/s) Time (ms) Velocity (m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 0.00 0.0 ^0.05
3.7 ^0.24 2.7 ^0.425
27.0 ^5.80 24.5 ^6.50
[[Page 144]]
30.0 ^6.50
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to
be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as determined by
integrating the filtered pendulum acceleration response from time-zero.
(2) The maximum rotation in the lateral direction of the reference
plane of the headform (175-9000) as shown in Figure U2-B in appendix A
to this subpart, shall be 45 to 55 degrees with respect to the
longitudinal axis of the pendulum occurring between 39 and 53 ms from
time zero. Rotation of the headform-neck assembly shall be measured with
potentiometers specified in Sec. 572.189(c), installed as shown in
drawing 175-9000, and calculated per procedure specified in Figure U2-B
in appendix A to this subpart.
(3) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the
zero angle with respect to its initial position at impact relative to
the pendulum centerline between 37 ms to 57 ms after the time the peak
translation-rotation value is reached.
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]
Sec. 572.188 Pelvis.
(a) The pelvis (175-6000) is part of the torso assembly shown in
drawing 175-0000. The pelvis is equipped with a pubic symphysis load
sensor in conformance with Sec. 572.189(f) and mounted as shown in
drawing (175-0000 sheet 4). When subjected to tests procedures specified
in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis assembly shall meet
performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure.
(1) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000) without suit (175-8000) and
shoulder foam pad (175-3010) as specified in Sec. 572.189(n);
(2) The dummy is seated as specified in Figure U6 in appendix A to
this subpart;
(3) The pelvis impactor is the same as specified in Sec. 572.189(a);
(4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
pelvis its longitudinal axis is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal
plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the
centerpoint on the impactor's face is within 5 mm of the center of the
H-point in the pelvis, as shown in Figure U6 in appendix A to this
subpart;
(5) The impactor impacts the dummy's pelvis at 4.3 0.1 m/s.
(6) Time zero is defined in Sec. 572.189(k).
(c) Performance criteria. (1) The impactor force (probe acceleration
multiplied by its mass) shall be not less than 4,700 N and not more than
5,400 N, occurring between 11.8 ms and 16.1 ms from time zero;
(2) The pubic symphysis load, measured with load cell specified in
Sec. 572.189(f) shall be not less than 1,230 N and not more than 1,590 N
occurring between 12.2 ms and 17.0 ms from time zero.
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]
Sec. 572.189 Instrumentation and test conditions.
(a) The test probe for lateral shoulder, thorax without arm,
abdomen, and pelvis impact tests is the same as that specified in
Sec. 572.36(a) and the impact probe has a minimum mass moment of inertia
in yaw of 9,000 kg-cm\2\, a free air resonant frequency not less than
1,000 Hz and the probe's end opposite to the impact face has provisions
to mount an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the
longitudinal axis of the probe. All hardware attached directly to the
impactor and one-third (\1/3\) of the mass of the suspension cables must
be included in the calculations of the total impactor mass. The sum mass
of the attachments and \1/3\ cable mass must not exceed 5 percent of the
total pendulum mass. No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any
other attachments to the test probe, including velocity vane, shall make
contact with the dummy during the test.
(b) Accelerometers for the head, the thoracic spine, and the pelvis
conform to specifications of SA572-S4.
[[Page 145]]
(c) Rotary potentiometer for the neck and lumbar spine certification
tests conforms to SA572-53.
(d) Linear position transducer for the thoracic rib conforms to
SA572-S69.
(e) Load sensors for the abdomen conform to specifications of SA572-
S75.
(f) Load sensor for the pubic symphysis conforms to specifications
of SA572-77.
(g) Load sensor for the lumbar spine conforms to specifications of
SA572-76.
(h) Instrumentation and sensors conform to the Recommended Practice
SAE J-211 (Mar. 1995)--Instrumentation for Impact Test unless noted
otherwise.
(i) All instrumented response signal measurements shall be treated
to the following specifications:
(1) Head acceleration--Digitally filtered CFC 1000;
(2) Neck and lumbar spine rotations--Digitally filtered CFC 180;
(3)Neck and lumbar spine pendulum accelerations--Digitally filtered
CFC 60;
(4) Pelvis, shoulder, thorax without arm, and abdomen impactor
accelerations--Digitally filtered CFC 180;
(5) Abdominal and pubic symphysis force--Digitally filtered at CFC
600;
(6) Thorax deflection--Digitally filtered CFC 180.
(j)(1) Filter the pendulum acceleration data using a SAE J211 CFC 60
filter.
(2) Determine the time when the filtered pendulum accelerometer data
first crosses the ^10 g level (T10).
(3) Calculate time-zero: T0 = T10^Tm,
Where:
Tm = 1.417 ms for the Neck Test
= 1.588 ms for the Lumbar Spine Test
(4) Set the data time-zero to the sample number nearest to the
calculated T0.
(k)(1) Filter the pendulum acceleration data using a SAE J211 CFC
180 filter.
(2) Determine the time when the filtered pendulum accelerometer data
first crosses the ^1.0 m/s\2\ (^.102 g) acceleration level (T0).
(3) Set the data time-zero to the sample number of the new T0.
(l) Mountings for the head, spine and pelvis accelerometers shall
have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency
range of the applicable channel class.
(m) Limb joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1 to
2 G's, which just supports the limb's weight when the limbs are extended
horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not
exceed 2 G's throughout the range of the limb motion.
(n) Performance tests are conducted, unless specified otherwise, at
any temperature from 20.6 to 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and
at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of
the dummy to those conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.
(o) Certification tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or
fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by a period of not less
than thirty (30) minutes unless otherwise specified.
[[Page 146]]
Sec. Appendix A to Subpart U of Part 572--Figures
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.000
[[Page 147]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16JN08.006
[[Page 148]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.002
[[Page 149]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.003
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.004
[[Page 150]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.005
[[Page 151]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.006
[[Page 152]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.007
[[Page 153]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.008
[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]
Subpart V_SID IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, Small Adult Female
Source: 71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 572.190 Incorporated materials.
(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this
Subpart by reference:
(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, ``Parts/Drawings List, Part 572
Subpart V, SID-IIsD, July 1, 2008,''
(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled ``Drawings and
Specifications for the SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572
Subpart V, July 1, 2008,'' consisting of:
(i) Drawing No. 180-0000, SID-IIsD Complete Assembly;
(ii) Drawing No. 180-1000, 6 Axis Head Assembly;
(iii) Drawing No. 180-2000, Neck Assembly;
[[Page 154]]
(iv) Drawing No. 180-3000, Upper Torso Assembly;
(v) Drawing No. 180-3005, Washer, Clamping;
(vi) Drawing No. 9000021, Screw, SHCS \3/8\-16 x 1 NYLOK;
(vii) Drawing No. 900005, Screw, SHCS \1/4\-20 x \5/8\ NYLOK;
(viii) Drawing No. 180-4000, Lower Torso Assembly Complete;
(ix) Drawing No. 180-5000-1, Complete Leg Assembly, Left;
(x) Drawing No. 180-5000-2, Complete Leg Assembly, Right;
(xi) Drawing No. 180-6000-1, Arm Assembly Left Molded;
(xii) Drawing No. 180-6000-2, Arm Assembly Right Molded; and,
(xiii) Drawing No. 180-9000, SID-IIsD Headform Assembly.
(3) A procedures manual entitled, ``Procedures for Assembly,
Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash
Test Dummy, July 1, 2008,'' incorporated by reference in Sec. 572.191;
(4) SAE Recommended Practice J211, Rev. Mar 95 ``Instrumentation for
Impact Tests--Part 1--Electronic Instrumentation''; and,
(5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12, ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash
Testing.''
(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials
incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR
part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of
Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National
Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format
through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and
inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http:/
/www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/
ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection
of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to:
http://www.regulations.gov.
(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:
(1) The Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD, July 1,
2008, referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the package
entitled Drawings and Specifications for SID-IIsD Small Female Crash
Test Dummy, Part 572 Subpart V, July 1, 2008, referred to in paragraph
(a)(2) of this section, and the PADI document referred to in paragraph
(a)(3) of this section, are available in electronic format through
www.Regulations.gov and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of
New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.
(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of
this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers,
Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, telephone 1-877-606-
7323.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29894, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.191 General description.
(a) The SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, small adult female,
is defined by:
(1) The drawings and specifications contained in the ``Drawings and
Specifications for SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572
Subpart V, July 1, 2008,'' which includes the technical drawings and
specifications described in Drawing 180-0000, the titles of which are
listed in Table A;
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component assembly Drawing number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 Axis Head Assembly.................................... 180-1000
Neck Assembly........................................... 180-2000
Upper Torso Assembly.................................... 180-3000
Clamping Washer......................................... 180-3005
Lower Torso Assembly Complete........................... 180-4000
Complete Leg Assembly, Left............................. 180-5000-1
Complete Leg Assembly, Right............................ 180-5000-2
Arm Assembly Left Molded................................ 180-6000-1
Arm Assembly Right Molded............................... 180-6000-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) The ``Parts/Drawing List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD,'' dated
July 1, 2008 and containing 7 pages,
(3) A listing of available transducers-crash test sensors for the
SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 5th percentile adult female, is
shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5, dated July 1, 2008,
(4) ``Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of
the
[[Page 155]]
SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, July 1, 2008,'' and,
(5) Sign convention for signal outputs reference document SAE J1733
Information Report, titled ``Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash
Testing,'' dated July 12, 1994, incorporated by reference in
Sec. 572.200(k).
(b) Exterior dimensions of the SID-IIsD Small Adult Female Side
Impact Crash Test Dummy are shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 3 of 5,
dated July 1, 2008.
(c) Weights and center of gravity locations of body segments are
shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 4 of 5, dated July 1, 2008.
(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for
contacts existing under static conditions, there is no additional
contact between metallic elements of adjacent body segments throughout
the range of motion.
(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy
conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar
to that set forth in Standard 214, Side Impact Protection (49 CFR
571.214).
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.192 Head assembly.
(a) The head assembly consists of the head (180-1000) and a set of
three (3) accelerometers in conformance with specifications in 49 CFR
572.200(d) and mounted as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When
tested to the procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the
head assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph
(c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. The head shall be tested according to the
procedure specified in 49 CFR 572.112(a).
(c) Performance criteria.
(1) When the head assembly is dropped from either the right or left
lateral incline orientations in accordance with procedure in
Sec. 572.112(a), the measured peak resultant acceleration shall be
between 115 g and 137 g;
(2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the
extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse
shall not exceed 15% (zero to peak) of the main pulse;
(3) The longitudinal acceleration vector (anterior-posterior
direction) shall not exceed 15 g.
Sec. 572.193 Neck assembly.
(a) The neck assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 180-2000.
For purposes of this test, the neck assembly is mounted within the
headform assembly (180-9000) as shown in Figure V1 in appendix A to this
subpart. When subjected to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b)
of this section, the neck-headform assembly shall meet the performance
requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure.
(1) Soak the assembly in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR
572.200(j);
(2) Attach the neck-headform assembly, as shown in Figure V2-A or
V2-B in appendix A to this subpart, to the 49 CFR Part 572 pendulum test
fixture (Figure 22, 49 CFR 572.33) in either the left or right lateral
impact orientations, respectively, so that the midsagittal plane of the
neck-headform assembly is vertical and at right angle (90 1 degrees) to
the plane of motion of the pendulum longitudinal centerline;
(3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to achieve a
velocity of 5.57 0.06 m/s measured at the center of the pendulum
accelerometer, as shown in 49 CFR Part 572 Figure 15, at the instant the
pendulum makes contact with the decelerating mechanism;
(4) The neck flexes without the neck-headform assembly making
contact with any object;
(5) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the
pendulum mounted striker plate and the pendulum deceleration mechanism;
(6) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between
successive tests on the same neck assembly.
(c) Performance Criteria.
(1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is characterized in terms of
decrease in velocity as obtained by integrating the pendulum
acceleration output from time zero:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peakpendulumdelta-
Time(ms) V(m/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0................................................ ^2.20 to ^2.80
15.0................................................ ^3.30 to ^4.10
[[Page 156]]
20.0................................................ ^4.40 to ^5.40
25.0................................................ ^5.40 to ^6.10
>25.0 <100.......................................... ^5.50 to ^6.20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) The maximum translation-rotation of the midsagittal plane of the
headform disk (180-9061 or 9062) in the lateral direction measured, with
the rotation transducers specified in 49 CFR 572.200(e) shall be 71 to
81 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis of the pendulum (see
Figure V2-C in appendix A to this subpart) occurring between 50 and 70
ms from time zero;
(3) Peak occipital condyle moment shall not be higher than ^36 Nm
and not lower than ^44 Nm. The moment measured by the upper neck load
cell (Mx) shall be adjusted by the following formula: Mx(oc) \1\= Mx +
0.01778Fy;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Mx(oc) is the moment at occipital condyle (Newton-meters) and Fy
is the lateral shear force (Newtons) measured by the load cell.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) The decaying moment shall cross the 0 Nm line after peak moment
between 102 ms-126 ms after time zero.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.194 Shoulder.
(a) The shoulder structure is part of the upper torso assembly shown
in drawing 180-3000. For the shoulder impact test, the dummy is tested
as a complete assembly (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped with T1
laterally oriented accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d), and
deflection potentiometer as specified in 180-3881 configured for
shoulder and installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When
subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this
section, the shoulder shall meet the performance requirements of
paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and
cotton underwear pants on a certification bench, specified in Figure V3
in appendix A to this subpart, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of
which are covered with a 2 mm thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet;
(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V4-A in appendix A
to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical
orientation.
(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
(5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is
24.6 2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V4-B in
appendix A to this subpart.
(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
(7) Orient the arm to point forward at 90 2 degrees relative to the
inferior-superior orientation of the upper torso spine box incline.
(8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
dummy's arm rotation centerline (ref. item 23 in drawing 180-3000) the
impactor's longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint
of the impactor face at contact is within 2 mm of the shoulder yoke
assembly rotation centerline (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V4-A
in appendix A to this subpart.
(10) The dummy's arm-shoulder is impacted at 4.3 0.1 m/s with the
impactor meeting the alignment and contact point requirements of
paragraph (b)(9) of this section.
(11) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between
successive tests of the same shoulder assembly.
[[Page 157]]
(c) Performance criteria.
(1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy's arm, the
shoulder shall compress not less than 28 mm and not more than 37 mm
measured by the potentiometer specified in (a);
(2) Peak lateral acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be
less than 17 g and not more than 22 g;
(3) Peak impactor acceleration shall be not less than 13 g and not
more than 18 g.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.195 Thorax with arm.
(a) The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing
180-3000. For the thorax with arm impact test, the dummy is tested as a
complete assembly (drawing 180-0000). The dummy's thorax is equipped
with T1 and T12 laterally oriented accelerometers as specified in 49 CFR
572.200(d), and deflection potentiometers for the thorax and shoulder as
specified in 180-3881, installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of
5. When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of
this section, the thorax shall meet performance requirements of
paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and
cotton underwear pants on a certification bench, specified in Figure V3,
the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2-mm-
thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.
(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V5-A, while the
midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.
(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
(5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is
24.6 2.0 degrees relative to horizontal as shown in Figure V5-B in
appendix A to this subpart.
(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
(7) Orient the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the
longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior
orientation of the spine box.
(8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
dummy's arm, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal
plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The
centerpoint of the impactor face is within 2 mm of the vertical midpoint
of the second thoracic rib and coincident with a line parallel to the
seat back incline passing through the center of the shoulder yoke
assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V5-A
in appendix A to this subpart.
(10) The dummy's arm is impacted at 6.7 0.1 m/s.
(11) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact
probe and the arm.
(12) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between
successive tests of the same thorax assembly.
(c) Performance criteria.
(1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy's arm, the
thoracic ribs and the shoulder shall conform to the following range of
deflections:
(i) Shoulder not less than 31 mm and not more than 40 mm;
(ii) Upper thorax rib not less than 25 mm and not more than 32 mm;
(iii) Middle thorax rib not less than 30 mm and not more than 36 mm;
(iv) Lower thorax rib not less than 32 mm and not more than 38 mm;
[[Page 158]]
(2) Peak lateral acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be
less than 34 g and not more than 43 g, and the lower spine (T12) not
less than 29 g and not more than 37 g;
(3) Peak impactor acceleration after 5 ms after time zero shall be
not less than 30 g and not more than 36 g.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.196 Thorax without arm.
(a) The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing
180-3000. For this thorax test, the dummy is tested as a complete
assembly (drawing 180-0000) with the arm (180-6000) on the impacted side
removed. The dummy's thorax is equipped with T1 and T12 laterally
oriented accelerometers as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and with
deflection potentiometers for the thorax as specified in drawing 180-
3881, installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When
subjected to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this
section, the thorax shall meet the performance requirements set forth in
paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and
cotton underwear pants on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3 in
appendix A to this subpart, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of
which are covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.
(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V6-A, while the
midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.
(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
(5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is
24.6 2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V6-B in
appendix A to this subpart.
(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
(7) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
(8) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
thorax, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint
of the impactor face is within 2 mm of the vertical midpoint of the
second thorax rib and coincident with a line parallel to the seat back
incline passing through the center of the shoulder yoke assembly arm
rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V6-A in appendix A
to this subpart.
(9) The dummy's thorax is impacted at 4.3 0.1 m/s.
(10) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between
successive tests of the same thorax assembly.
(c) Performance criteria.
(1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy's thorax, the
ribs shall conform to the following range of deflections:
(i) Upper thorax rib not less than 32 mm and not more than 40 mm;
(ii) Middle thorax rib not less than 39 mm and not more than 45 mm;
(iii) Lower thorax rib not less than 35 mm and not more than 43 mm;
(2) Peak acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be less than
13 g and not more than 17 g and the lower spine (T12) not less than 7 g
and not more than 11 g;
(3) Peak impactor acceleration shall not be less than 14 g and not
more than 18 g.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.197 Abdomen.
(a) The abdomen assembly is part of the upper torso assembly (180-
3000) and
[[Page 159]]
is represented by two ribs (180-3368) and two linear deflection
potentiometers (180-3881). The abdomen test is conducted on the complete
dummy assembly (180-0000) with the arm (180-6000) on the impacted side
removed. The dummy is equipped with a lower spine laterally oriented
accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and deflection
potentiometers specified in drawing 180-3881, installed as shown in
sheet 2 of drawing 180-0000. When subjected to the test procedure as
specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the abdomen shall meet
performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and
cotton underwear pants on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3,
the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2 mm
thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.
(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V7-A in Appendix A
to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical
orientation.
(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
(5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in paragraph
(b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount
(drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6
2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V7-B in appendix
A to this subpart);
(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the
feet are vertical and as close together as possible;
(7) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(b);
(8) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
abdomen, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the
centerpoint of the impactor's face is within 2 mm of the vertical
midpoint between the two abdominal ribs and coincident with a line
parallel to the seat back incline passing through the center of the
shoulder yoke assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown
in Figure V7-A in appendix A to this subpart;
(9) The dummy's abdomen is impacted at 4.3 0.1 m/s.
(10) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between
successive tests of the same abdomen assembly.
(c) Performance criteria. (1) While the impact probe is in contact
with the dummy's abdomen, the deflection of the upper abdominal rib
shall be not less than 36 mm and not more than 47 mm, and the lower
abdominal rib not less than 33 mm and not more than 44 mm.
(2) Peak acceleration of the lower spine (T12) laterally oriented
accelerometer shall be not less than 9 g and not more than 14 g;
(3) Peak impactor acceleration shall be not less than 12 g and not
more than 16 g.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.198 Pelvis acetabulum.
(a) The acetabulum is part of the lower torso assembly shown in
drawing 180-4000. The acetabulum test is conducted by impacting the side
of the lower torso of the assembled dummy (drawing 180-0000). The dummy
is equipped with a laterally oriented pelvis accelerometer as specified
in 49 CFR 572.200(d), acetabulum load cell SA572-S68, mounted as shown
in sheet 2 of 5 of drawing 180-0000, and an unused and certified pelvis
plug (180-4450). When subjected to the test procedure as specified in
paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis shall meet performance
requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
[[Page 160]]
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
(2) Seat the dummy, without the torso jacket (180-3450) and without
cotton underwear pants, as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A to this
subpart, on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3 in appendix A to
this subpart, with the seatpan and the seatback surfaces covered with a
2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet;
(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted
side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10
mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A
to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical
orientation.
(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper
torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat
back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.
(5) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in
paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib
mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is
24.6 1.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V8-B in
appendix A to this subpart;
(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical
about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner
part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to
each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the
feet are vertical and as close together as possible.
(7) Rotate the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the
longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior
orientation of the spine box.
(8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).
(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
pelvis, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane
and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint
of the impactor's face is in line within 2 mm of the longitudinal
centerline of the \1/4\-20x\1/2\ flat head cap screw through the center
of the acetabulum load cell (SA572-S68), as shown in Figure V8-A in
appendix A to this subpart;
(10) The dummy's pelvis is impacted at the acetabulum at 6.7 0.1 m/
s.
(11) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact
probe and the pelvis plug.
(12) Allow a period of at least 120 minutes between successive tests
of the same pelvis assembly.
(c) Performance criteria. While the impactor is in contact with the
pelvis:
(1) Peak acceleration of the impactor is not less than 38 g and not
more than 47 g;
(2) Peak lateral acceleration of the pelvis after 6 ms after time
zero is not less than 34 g and not more than 42 g;
(3) Peak acetabulum force is not less than 3.60 kN and not more than
4.30 kN.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.199 Pelvis iliac.
(a) The iliac is part of the lower torso assembly shown in drawing
180-4000. The iliac test is conducted by impacting the side of the lower
torso of the assembled dummy (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped
with a laterally oriented pelvis accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR
572.200(d), and iliac wing load cell SA572-S66, mounted as shown in
sheet 2 of 5 of drawing 180-0000. When subjected to the test procedure
as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis shall meet
performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test
environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).
(2) Seat the dummy, without the torso jacket and without cotton
underwear pants, as shown in Figure V9-A in appendix A to this subpart,
on a flat, rigid, horizontal surface covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE
(Teflon) sheet.
(3) The legs are outstretched in front of the dummy such that they
are symmetrical about the midsagittal plane, the thighs touch the seated
surface, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as
close as possible to each other, and the feet are in full
[[Page 161]]
dorsiflexion and as close together as possible.
(4) Orient the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the
longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior
orientation of the spine box.
(5) The midsagittal plane of the dummy is vertical, and superior
surface of the lower half neck assembly load cell replacement (180-3815)
in the lateral direction is within 1 degree relative to the horizontal
as shown in Figure V9-A.
(6) While maintaining the dummy's position as specified in
paragraphs (b)(3), (4) and (5) of this section, the top of the shoulder
rib mount (180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is within
1.0 degree relative to horizontal as shown in Figure V9-B in Appendix A
to this subpart.
(7) The pelvis impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(c).
(8) The dummy is positioned with respect to the impactor such that
the longitudinal centerline of the impact probe is in line with the
longitudinal centerline of the iliac load cell access hole, and the 88.9
mm dimension of the probe's impact surface is aligned horizontally.
(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the
pelvis, the longitudinal axis of the impactor is within 1 degree of a
horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the
dummy.
(10) The dummy's pelvis is impacted at the iliac location at 4.30.1
m/s.
(11) Allow a period of at least 120 minutes between successive tests
of the same pelvis assembly.
(c) Performance criteria. While the impactor is in contact with the
pelvis:
(1) Peak acceleration of the impactor is not less than 36 g and not
more than 45 g;
(2) Peak acceleration of the pelvis is not less than 28 g and not
more than 39 g;
(3) Peak iliac force is not less than 4.10 kN and not more than 5.10
kN.
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]
Sec. 572.200 Instrumentation and test conditions.
(a) The test probe for shoulder, lateral thorax, and pelvis-
acetabulum impact tests is the same as that specified in 49 CFR
572.137(a) except that its impact face diameter is 120.70 0.25 mm and
it has a minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-cm\2\.
(b) The test probe for the lateral abdomen impact test is the same
as that specified in 572.137(a) except that its impact face diameter is
76.20 0.25 mm and it has a minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-
cm\2\.
(c) The test probe for the pelvis-iliac impact tests is the same as
that specified in 49 CFR 572.137(a) except that it has a rectangular
flat impact surface 50.8 x 88.9 mm for a depth of at least 76 mm and a
minimum mass moment of inertia of 5000 kg-cm\2\.
(d) Accelerometers for the head, the thoracic spine, and the pelvis
conform to specifications of SA572-S4.
(e) Rotary potentiometers for the neck-headform assembly conform to
SA572-S51.
(f) Instrumentation and sensors conform to the Recommended Practice
SAE J-211 (March 1995), Instrumentation for Impact Test, unless noted
otherwise.
(g) All instrumented response signal measurements shall be treated
to the following specifications:
(1) Head acceleration--digitally filtered CFC 1000;
(2) Neck-headform assembly translation-rotation--digitally filtered
CFC 60;
(3) Neck pendulum, T1 and T12 thoracic spine and pelvis
accelerations--digitally filtered CFC 180;
(4) Neck forces (for the purpose of occipital condyle calculation)
and moments--digitally filtered at CFC 600;
(5) Pelvis, shoulder, thorax and abdomen impactor accelerations--
digitally filtered CFC 180;
(6) Acetabulum and iliac wings forces--digitally filtered at CFC
600;
(7) Shoulder, thorax, and abdomen deflection--digitally filtered CFC
600.
(h) Mountings for the head, thoracic spine and pelvis accelerometers
shall have no resonant frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency
range of the applicable channel class;
[[Page 162]]
(i) Leg joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1 to 2
g, which just support the limb's weight when the limbs are extended
horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not
exceed 2 g throughout the range of the limb motion.
(j) Performance tests are conducted, unless specified otherwise, at
any temperature from 20.6 to 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and
at any relative humidity from 10% to 70% after exposure of the dummy to
those conditions for a period of 4 hours.
(k) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to
the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle
Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to Sec. 572.191(a)(5)).
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]
[[Page 163]]
Sec. Appendix A to Subpart V of Part 572--Figures
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.009
[[Page 164]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.010
[[Page 165]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.011
[[Page 166]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.012
[[Page 167]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.013
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN09.005
[[Page 168]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.015
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.016
[[Page 169]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.017
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.018
[[Page 170]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.019
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.020
[[Page 171]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.021
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.022
[[Page 172]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14DE06.023
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN09.006
[[Page 173]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR23JN09.007
[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]
PART 573_DEFECT AND NONCOMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY AND REPORTS--
Table of Contents
Sec.
573.1 Scope.
573.2 Purpose.
573.3 Application.
573.4 Definitions.
573.5 Defect and noncompliance responsibility.
573.6 Defect and noncompliance information report.
573.7 Quarterly reports.
573.8 Lists of purchasers, owners, dealers, distributors, lessors and
lessees.
573.9 Address for submitting required reports and other information.
573.10 Reporting the sale or lease of defective or noncompliant tires.
573.11 Prohibition on sale or lease of new defective and noncompliant
motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment.
573.12 Prohibition on sale or lease of new and used defective and
noncompliant motor vehicle equipment.
573.13 Reimbursement for prenotification remedies.
573.14 Accelerated remedy program.
573.15 Public availability of motor vehicle recall information.
573.16 Reporting bankruptcy petition.
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 30102, 30103, 30116-30121, 30166, Pub. L. 112-
141, 126 Stat. 405; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95 and 49 CFR
501.8.
Source: 43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 573.1 Scope.
This part:
(a) Sets forth the responsibilities under 49 U.S.C. 30116-30121 of
manufacturers of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment with respect
to safety-related defects and noncompliances with Federal motor vehicle
safety standards in motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment;
and
(b) Specifies requirements for--
(1) Manufacturers to maintain lists of owners, purchasers, dealers,
and distributors notified of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles
and motor vehicle original and replacement equipment,
(2) Reporting to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) defects in motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment and
noncompliances with motor vehicle safety standards prescribed under part
571 of this chapter, and
[[Page 174]]
(3) Providing quarterly reports on defect and noncompliance
notification campaigns.
[69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]
Sec. 573.2 Purposes.
The purposes of this part are:
(a) To facilitate the notification of owners of defective and
noncomplying motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment, and
the remedy of such defects and noncompliances, by equitably apportioning
the responsibility for safety-related defects and noncompliances with
Federal motor vehicle safety standards among manufacturers of motor
vehicles and motor vehicle equipment; and
(b) To inform NHTSA of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles and
items of motor vehicle equipment, and to obtain information for NHTSA on
the adequacy of manufacturers' defect and noncompliance notification
campaigns, on corrective action, on owner response, and to compare the
defect incidence rate among different groups of vehicles.
[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 573.3 Application.
(a) Except as provided in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this
section, this part applies to manufacturers of complete motor vehicles,
incomplete motor vehicles, and motor vehicle original and replacement
equipment, with respect to all vehicles and equipment that have been
transported beyond the direct control of the manufacturer.
(b) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in a
motor vehicle or equipment item imported into the United States,
compliance with Secs. 573.6 and 573.7 by either the fabricating
manufacturer or the importer of the vehicle or equipment item shall be
considered compliance by both.
(c) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in a
vehicle manufactured in two or more stages, compliance with Secs. 573.6
and 573.7 by either the manufacturer of the incomplete vehicle or any
subsequent manufacturer of the vehicle shall be considered compliance by
all manufacturers.
(d) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an
item of replacement equipment (except tires) compliance with Secs. 573.6
and 573.7 by the brand name or trademark owner shall be considered
compliance by the manufacturer. Tire brand name owners are considered
manufacturers (49 U.S.C. 10102(b)(1)(E)) and have the same reporting
requirements as manufacturers.
(e) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an
item of original equipment used in the vehicles of only one vehicle
manufacturer, compliance with Secs. 573.6 and 573.7 by either the
vehicle or equipment manufacturer shall be considered compliance by
both.
(f) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in
original equipment installed in the vehicles of more than one
manufacturer, compliance with Sec. 573.6 is required of the equipment
manufacturer as to the equipment item, and of each vehicle manufacturer
as to the vehicles in which the equipment has been installed. Compliance
with Sec. 573.7 is required of the manufacturer who is conducting the
recall campaign.
(g) The provisions of Sec. 573.10 apply to all persons.
(h) The provisions of Sec. 573.11 apply to dealers, including
retailers of motor vehicle equipment.
(i) The provisions of Sec. 573.12 apply to all persons.
[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 66
FR 38162, July 23, 2001; 67 FR 19697, Apr. 23, 2002; 68 FR 18142, Apr.
15, 2003]
Sec. 573.4 Definitions.
For purposes of this part:
Act means 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301.
Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration or his delegate.
First purchaser means first purchaser for purposes other than
resale.
Leased motor vehicle means any motor vehicle that is leased to a
person for a term of at least four months by a lessor who has leased
five or more vehicles in the twelve months preceding the date of
notification by the vehicle manufacturer of the existence of a safety-
related defect or noncompliance
[[Page 175]]
with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in the motor vehicle.
Lessee means a person who is the lessee of a leased motor vehicle as
defined in this section.
Lessor means a person or entity that is the owner, as reflected on
the vehicle's title, of any five or more leased vehicles (as defined in
this section), as of the date of notification by the manufacturer of the
existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal
motor vehicle safety standard in one or more of the leased motor
vehicles.
Original equipment means an item of motor vehicle equipment (other
than a tire) that was installed in or on a motor vehicle at the time of
its delivery to the first purchaser if the item of equipment was
installed on or in the motor vehicle at the time of its delivery to a
dealer or distributor for distribution, or was installed by the dealer
or distributor with the express authorizations of the motor vehicle
manufacturer.
Readable form means a form readable by the unassisted eye or
readable by machine. If readable by machine, the submitting party must
obtain written confirmation from the Office of Defects Investigation
immediately prior to submission that the machine is readily available to
NHTSA. For all similar information responses, once a manufacturer has
obtained approval for the original response in that form, it will not
have to obtain approval for future submissions in the same form. In
addition, all coded information must be accompanied by an explanation of
the codes used.
Replacement equipment means motor vehicle equipment other than
original equipment as defined in this section, and tires.
[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 67
FR 45872, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 573.5 Defect and noncompliance responsibility.
(a) Each manufacturer of a motor vehicle shall be responsible for
any safety-related defect or any noncompliance determined to exist in
the vehicle or in any item of original equipment.
(b) Each manufacturer of an item of replacement equipment shall be
responsible for any safety-related defect or any noncompliance
determined to exist in the equipment.
[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 573.6 Defect and noncompliance information report.
(a) Each manufacturer shall furnish a report to the NHTSA for each
defect in his vehicles or in his items of original or replacement
equipment that he or the Administrator determines to be related to motor
vehicle safety, and for each noncompliance with a motor vehicle safety
standard in such vehicles or items of equipment which either he or the
Administrator determines to exist.
(b) Each report shall be submitted not more than 5 working days
after a defect in a vehicle or item of equipment has been determined to
be safety related, or a noncompliance with a motor vehicle safety
standard has been determined to exist. At a minimum, information
required by paragraphs (c)(1), (2), and (5) of this section shall be
submitted in the initial report. The remainder of the information
required by paragraph (c) of this section that is not available within
the five-day period shall be submitted within 5 working days after the
manufacturer has confirmed the accuracy of the information. In addition,
each manufacturer shall amend information required by paragraphs (c)(2),
(3), and (8)(i) or (ii) within 5 working days after it has new
information that updates or corrects information that was previously
reported. Each manufacturer submitting new information relative to a
previously submitted report shall refer to the recall campaign number
when a number has been assigned by the NHTSA.
(c) Each manufacturer shall include in each report the information
specified below.
(1) The manufacturer's name: The full corporate or individual name
of the fabricating manufacturer and any brand name or trademark owner of
the vehicle or item of equipment shall be spelled out, except that such
abbreviations as ``Co.'' or ``Inc.'', and their foreign equivalents, and
the first and middle initials of individuals, may be used.
[[Page 176]]
In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an imported
vehicle or item of equipment, the agency designated by the fabricating
manufacturer pursuant to 49 U.S.C. section 30164(a) shall be also
stated. If the fabricating manufacturer is a corporation that is
controlled by another corporation that assumes responsibility for
compliance with all requirements of this part the name of the
controlling corporation may be used.
(2) Identification of the vehicles or items of motor vehicle
equipment potentially containing the defect or noncompliance, including
a description of the manufacturer's basis for its determination of the
recall population and a description of how the vehicles or items of
equipment to be recalled differ from similar vehicles or items of
equipment that the manufacturer has not included in the recall.
(i) In the case of passenger cars, the identification shall be by
the make, line, model year, the inclusive dates (month and year) of
manufacture, and any other information necessary to describe the
vehicles.
(ii) In the case of vehicles other than passenger cars, the
identification shall be by body style or type, inclusive dates (month
and year) of manufacture and any other information necessary to describe
the vehicles, such as GVWR or class for trucks, displacement (cc) for
motorcycles, and number of passengers for buses.
(iii) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the
identification shall be by the generic name of the component (tires,
child seating systems, axles, etc.), part number (for tires, a range of
tire identification numbers, as required by 49 CFR 574.5), size and
function if applicable, the inclusive dates (month and year) of
manufacture if available, brand (or trade) name, model name, model
number, as applicable, and any other information necessary to describe
the items.
(iv) In the case of motor vehicles or items of motor vehicle
equipment in which the component that contains the defect or
noncompliance was manufactured by a different manufacturer from the
reporting manufacturer, the reporting manufacturer shall identify the
component and, if known, the component's country of origin (i.e. final
place of manufacture or assembly), the manufacturer and/or assembler of
the component by name, business address, and business telephone number.
If the reporting manufacturer does not know the identity of the
manufacturer of the component, it shall identify the entity from which
it was obtained. If at the time of submission of the initial report, the
reporting manufacturer does not know the country of origin of the
component, the manufacturer shall ascertain the country of origin and
submit a supplemental report with that information once it becomes
available.
(v) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the
manufacturer of the equipment shall identify by name, business address,
and business telephone number every manufacturer that purchases the
defective or noncomplying component for use or installation in new motor
vehicles or new items of motor vehicle equipment.
(3) The total number of vehicles or items of equipment potentially
containing the defect or noncompliance, and where available the number
of vehicles or items of equipment in each group identified pursuant to
paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(4) The percentage of vehicles or items of equipment specified
pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section estimated to actually
contain the defect or noncompliance.
(5) A description of the defect or noncompliance, including both a
brief summary and a detailed description, with graphic aids as
necessary, of the nature and physical location (if applicable) of the
defect or noncompliance. In addition, the manufacturer shall identify
and describe the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably related to the
defect or noncompliance consistent with its evaluation of risk required
by 49 CFR 577.5(f).
(6) In the case of a defect, a chronology of all principal events
that were the basis for the determination that the defect related to
motor vehicle safety, including a summary of all warranty claims, field
or service reports, and other information, with their dates of receipt.
(7) In the case of a noncompliance, the test results and other
information
[[Page 177]]
that the manufacturer considered in determining the existence of the
noncompliance. The manufacturer shall identify the date of each test and
observation that indicated that a noncompliance might or did exist.
(8)(i) A description of the manufacturer's program for remedying the
defect or noncompliance. This program shall include a plan for
reimbursing an owner or purchaser who incurred costs to obtain a remedy
for the problem addressed by the recall within a reasonable time in
advance of the manufacturer's notification of owners, purchasers and
dealers, in accordance with Sec. 573.13 of this part. A manufacturer's
plan may incorporate by reference a general reimbursement plan it
previously submitted to NHTSA, together with information specific to the
individual recall. Information required by Sec. 573.13 that is not in a
general reimbursement plan shall be submitted in the manufacturer's
report to NHTSA under this section. If a manufacturer submits one or
more general reimbursement plans, the manufacturer shall update each
plan every two years, in accordance with Sec. 573.13. The manufacturer's
remedy program and reimbursement plans will be available for inspection
by the public at NHTSA headquarters.
(ii) The estimated date(s) on which it will begin sending
notifications to owners, and to dealers and distributors, that there is
a safety-related defect or noncompliance and that a remedy without
charge will be available to owners, and the estimated date(s) on which
it will complete such notifications (if different from the beginning
date). If a manufacturer subsequently becomes aware that either the
beginning or the completion dates reported to the agency for any of the
notifications will be delayed by more than two weeks, it shall promptly
advise the agency of the delay and the reasons therefore, and furnish a
revised estimate.
(iii) If a manufacturer intends to file a petition for an exemption
from the recall requirements of the Act on the basis that a defect or
noncompliance is inconsequential as it relates to motor vehicle safety,
it shall notify NHTSA of that intention in its report to NHTSA of the
defect or noncompliance under this section. If such a petition is filed
and subsequently denied, the manufacturer shall provide the information
required by paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section within five Federal
government business days from the date the petition denial is published
in the Federal Register.
(iv) If a manufacturer advises NHTSA that it intends to file such a
petition for exemption from the notification and remedy requirements on
the grounds that the defect or noncompliance is inconsequential as it
relates to motor vehicle safety, and does not do so within the 30-day
period established by 49 CFR 556.4(c), the manufacturer must submit the
information required by paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section no later
than the end of that 30-day period.
(9) In the case of a remedy program involving the replacement of
tires, the manufacturer's program for remedying the defect or
noncompliance shall:
(i) Address how the manufacturer will assure that the entities
replacing the tires are aware of the legal requirements related to
recalls of tires established by 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301 and regulations
thereunder. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall notify its owned stores
and/or distributors, as well as all independent outlets that are
authorized to replace the tires that are the subject of the recall,
annually or for each individual recall that the manufacturer conducts,
about the ban on the sale of new defective or noncompliant tires (49 CFR
573.11); the prohibition on the sale of new and used defective and
noncompliant tires (49 CFR 573.12); and the duty to notify NHTSA of any
sale of a new or used recalled tire for use on a motor vehicle (49 CFR
573.10). For tire outlets that are manufacturer-owned or otherwise
subject to the control of the manufacturer, the manufacturer shall also
provide directions to comply with these statutory provisions and the
regulations thereunder.
(ii) Address how the manufacturer will prevent, to the extent
reasonably within its control, the recalled tires from being resold for
installation on a motor vehicle. At a minimum, the
[[Page 178]]
manufacturer shall include the following information, to be furnished to
each tire outlet that it owns, or that is authorized to replace tires
that are recalled, either annually or for each individual recall the
manufacturer conducts:
(A) Written directions to manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-
controlled outlets to alter the recalled tires permanently so that they
cannot be used on vehicles. These shall include instructions on the
means to render recalled tires unsuitable for resale for installation on
motor vehicles and instructions to perform the incapacitation of each
recalled tire, with the exception of any tires that are returned to the
manufacturer pursuant to a testing program, within 24 hours of receipt
of the recalled tire at the outlet. If the manufacturer has a testing
program for recalled tires, these directions shall also include criteria
for selecting recalled tires for testing and instructions for labeling
those tires and returning them promptly to the manufacturer for testing.
(B) Written guidance to all other outlets which are authorized to
replace the recalled tires on how to alter the recalled tires promptly
and permanently so that they cannot be used on vehicles.
(C) A requirement that manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-
controlled outlets report to the manufacturer, either on a monthly basis
or within 30 days of the deviation, the number of recalled tires removed
from vehicles by the outlet that have not been rendered unsuitable for
resale for installation on a motor vehicle within the specified time
frame (other than those returned for testing) and describe any such
failure to act in accordance with the manufacturer's plan;
(iii) Address how the manufacturer will limit, to the extent
reasonably within its control, the disposal of the recalled tires in
landfills and, instead, channel them into a category of positive reuse
(shredding, crumbling, recycling, and recovery) or another alternative
beneficial non-vehicular use. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall
include the following information, to be furnished to each tire outlet
that it owns or that is authorized to replace tires that are recalled,
either annually or for each individual recall that the manufacturer
conducts:
(A)(1) Written directions that require manufacturer-owned and other
manufacturer-controlled outlets either:
(i) To ship recalled tires to one or more locations designated by
the manufacturer as part of the program or allow the manufacturer to
collect and dispose of the recalled tires; or
(ii) To ship recalled tires to a location of their own choosing,
provided that they comply with applicable state and local laws and
regulations regarding disposal of tires.
(2) Under option (c)(9)(iii)(A)(1)(ii) of this section, the
directions must also include further direction and guidance on how to
limit the disposal of recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel
them into a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling,
and recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use.
(B)(1) Written guidance that authorizes all other outlets that are
authorized to replace the recalled tires either:
(i) To ship recalled tires to one or more locations designated by
the manufacturer or allow the manufacturer to collect and dispose of the
recalled tires; or
(ii) To ship recalled tires to a location of their own choosing,
provided that they comply with applicable state and local laws and
regulations regarding disposal of tires.
(2) Under option (c)(9)(iii)(B)(1)(ii) of this section, the
manufacturer must also include further guidance on how to limit the
disposal of recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel them into
a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling, and
recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use.
(C) A requirement that manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-
controlled outlets report to the manufacturer, on a monthly basis or
within 30 days of the deviation, the number of recalled tires disposed
of in violation of applicable state and local laws and regulations, and
describe any such failure to act in accordance with the manufacturer's
plan; and
[[Page 179]]
(D) A description of the manufacturer's program for disposing of the
recalled tires that are returned to the manufacturer or collected by the
manufacturer from the retail outlets, including, at a minimum,
statements that the returned tires will be disposed of in compliance
with applicable state and local laws and regulations regarding disposal
of tires, and will be channeled, insofar as possible, into a category of
positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling and recovery) or another
alternative beneficial non-vehicular use, instead of being disposed of
in landfills.
(iv) To the extent that the manufacturer wishes to limit the
frequency of shipments of recalled tires, it must specify both a minimum
time period and a minimum weight for the shipments and provide that
shipments may be made at whichever minimum occurs first.
(v) Written directions required under this paragraph to be furnished
to a manufacturer-owned or controlled outlet shall be sent to the person
in charge of each outlet by first-class mail or by electronic means,
such as FAX transmissions or e-mail, with further instructions to notify
all employees of the outlet who are involved with removal, rendering
unsuitable for use, or disposition of recalled tires of the applicable
requirements and procedures.
(vi) Manufacturers must implement the plans for disposition of
recalled tires that they file with NHTSA pursuant to this paragraph. The
failure of a manufacturer to implement its plan in accordance with its
terms constitutes a violation of the Safety Act.
(10) A representative copy of all notices, bulletins, and other
communications that relate directly to the defect or noncompliance and
are sent to more than one manufacturer, distributor, dealer or
purchaser. These copies shall be submitted to NHTSA's Recall Management
Division (NVS-215) (RMD), not later than 5 days after they are initially
sent to manufacturers, distributors, dealers, or purchasers. Submission
shall be made pursuant to Sec. 573.9 of this part.
(11) The manufacturer's campaign number, if not identical to the
identification number assigned by NHTSA.
[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 20437, Apr. 5, 1979; 48
FR 44081, Sept. 27, 1983; 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 278, Jan. 4,
1996. Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002, as amended at 67 FR
64063, Oct. 17, 2002; 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004; 69 FR 50084, Aug. 13,
2004; 70 FR 38814, July 6, 2005; 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007; 74 FR
47757, Sept. 17, 2009; 78 FR 51421, Aug. 20, 2013; 79 FR 43677, July 28,
2014]
Sec. 573.7 Quarterly reports.
(a) Each manufacturer who is conducting a defect or noncompliance
notification campaign to manufacturers, distributors, dealers, or owners
shall submit to NHTSA a report in accordance with paragraphs (b), (c),
and (d) of this section. Unless otherwise directed by the NHTSA, the
information specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section
shall be included in the quarterly report, with respect to each
notification campaign, for each of six consecutive quarters beginning
with the quarter in which the campaign was initiated (i.e., the date the
manufacturer notifies its purchasers of the availability of a remedy) or
corrective action has been completed on all defective or noncomplying
vehicles or items of replacement equipment involved in the campaign,
whichever occurs first.
(b) Each report shall include the following information identified
by and in the order of the subparagraph headings of this paragraph.
(1) The notification campaign number assigned by NHTSA.
(2) The date notification began and the date completed.
(3) The number of vehicles or items of equipment involved in the
notification campaign.
(4) The number of vehicles and equipment items which have been
inspected and repaired and the number of vehicles and equipment items
inspected and determined not to need repair.
(5) The number of vehicles or items of equipment determined to be
unreachable for inspection due to export, theft, scrapping, failure to
receive notification, or other reasons (specify). The number of vehicles
or items or equipment in each category shall be specified.
[[Page 180]]
(6) In reports by equipment manufacturers, the number of items of
equipment repaired and/or returned by dealers, other retailers, and
distributors to the manufacturer prior to their first sale to the
public.
(7) For all recalls that involve the replacement of tires, the
manufacturer shall provide:
(i) The aggregate number of recalled tires that the manufacturer
becomes aware have not been rendered unsuitable for resale for
installation on a motor vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer's
plan provided to NHTSA pursuant to Sec. 573.6(c)(9);
(ii) The aggregate number of recalled tires that the manufacturer
becomes aware have been disposed of in violation of applicable state and
local laws and regulations; and
(iii) A description of any failure of a tire outlet to act in
accordance with the directions in the manufacturer's plan, including an
identification of the outlet(s) in question.
(c) Information supplied in response to the paragraphs (b)(4) and
(5) of this section shall be cumulative totals.
(d) The reports required by this section shall be submitted in
accordance with the following schedule, except that if the due date
specified below falls on a Saturday, Sunday or Federal holiday, the
report shall be submitted on the next day that is a business day for the
Federal government:
(1) For the first calendar quarter (January 1 through March 31), on
or before April 30;
(2) For the second calendar quarter (April 1 through June 30), on or
before July 30;
(3) For the third calendar quarter (July 1 through September 30), on
or before October 30; and
(4) For the fourth calendar quarter (October 1 through December 31),
on or before January 30.
[51 FR 398, Jan. 6, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 17269, Apr. 5, 1995.
Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002, as amended at 69 FR 50085,
Aug. 13, 2004; 79 FR 43677, July 28, 2014]
Sec. 573.8 Lists of purchasers, owners, dealers, distributors,
lessors, and lessees.
(a) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall maintain, in a form
suitable for inspection such as computer information storage devices or
card files, a list of the names and addresses of registered owners, as
determined through State motor vehicle registration records or other
sources or the most recent purchasers where the registered owners are
unknown, for all vehicles involved in a defect or noncompliance
notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part.
The list shall include the vehicle identification number for each
vehicle and the status of remedy with respect to each vehicle, updated
as of the end of each quarterly reporting period specified in
Sec. 573.7. Each vehicle manufacturer shall also maintain such a list of
the names and addresses of all dealers and distributors to which a
defect or noncompliance notification was sent. Each list shall be
retained for 5 years, beginning with the date on which the defect or
noncompliance information report required by Sec. 573.6 is initially
submitted to NHTSA.
(b) Each manufacturer (including brand name owners) of tires shall
maintain, in a form suitable for inspection such as computer information
storage devices or card files, a list of the names and addresses of the
first purchasers of his tires for all tires involved in a defect or
noncompliance notification campaign initiated after the effective date
of this part. The list shall include the tire identification number of
all tires and shall show the status of remedy with respect to each owner
involved in each notification campaign, updated as of the end of each
quarterly reporting period specified in Sec. 573.6. Each list shall be
retained, beginning with the date on which the defect information report
is initially submitted to the NHTSA, for 3 years.
(c) For each item of equipment involved in a defect or noncompliance
notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part,
each manufacturer of motor vehicle equipment other than tires shall
maintain, in a form suitable for inspection, such as computer
information storage devices or card files, a list of the names and
addresses of each distributor and dealer of such manufacturer, each
motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment manufacturer and most recent
[[Page 181]]
purchaser known to the manufacturer to whom a potentially defective or
noncomplying item of equipment has been sold and to whom notification is
sent, the number of such items sold to each, and the date of shipment.
The list shall show as far as is practicable the number of items
remedied or returned to the manufacturer and the dates of such remedy or
return. Each list shall be retained, beginning with the date on which
the defect report required by Sec. 573.5 is initially submitted to the
NHTSA, for 5 years.
(d) Each lessor of leased motor vehicles that receives a
notification from the manufacturer of such vehicles that the vehicle
contains a safety-related defect or fails to comply with a Federal motor
vehicle safety standard shall maintain, in a form suitable for
inspection, such as computer information storage devices or card files,
a list of the names and addresses of all lessees to which the lessor has
provided notification of a defect or noncompliance pursuant to 49 CFR
577.5(h). The list shall also include the make, model, model year, and
vehicle identification number of each such leased vehicle, and the date
on which the lessor mailed notification of the defect or noncompliance
to the lessee. The information required by this paragraph must be
retained by the lessor for one calendar year from the date the vehicle
lease expires.
[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 20437, Apr. 5, 1979; 60
FR 17269, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 278, Jan. 4, 1996. Redesignated at 67 FR
45872, July 10, 2002; 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]
Sec. 573.9 Address for submitting required reports and other
information.
All submissions, except as otherwise required by this part, shall be
submitted to NHTSA on the Internet Web page http://www.safercar.gov/
Vehicle + Manufacturers. A manufacturer must use the templates provided
at this Web page for all submissions required under this section. Defect
and noncompliance information reports required by Sec. 573.6 of this
part shall be submitted using one of the following forms, depending upon
the type of product that is the subject of the report: ``Defect and/or
Noncompliance Information Report Form--Vehicles;'' ``Defect and/or
Noncompliance Information Report Form--Equipment;'' ``Defect and/or
Noncompliance Information Report Form--Tires;'' ``Defect and/or
Noncompliance Information Report Form--Child Restraints;'' ``Defect and/
or Noncompliance Information Report--Vehicle Alterers.'' Reports
required under Sec. 573.7 of this part shall be submitted using the
form, ``Quarterly Report Form'' also located at this Web page.
[78 FR 51421, Aug. 20, 2013]
Sec. 573.10 Reporting the sale or lease of defective or noncompliant
tires.
(a) Reporting requirement. Subject to paragraph (b) of this section,
any person who knowingly and willfully sells or leases for use on a
motor vehicle a defective tire or a tire that is not compliant with an
applicable tire safety standard with actual knowledge that the
manufacturer of such tire has notified its dealers of such defect or
noncompliance as required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) or as required by an
order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) must report that sale or lease to the
Associate Administrator for Enforcement, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave.,
SE., Washington, DC 20590.
(b) Exclusions from reporting requirement. Paragraph (a) of this
section is not applicable where, before delivery under a sale or lease
of a tire:
(1) The defect or noncompliance of the tire is remedied as required
under 49 U.S.C. 30120; or
(2) Notification of the defect or noncompliance is required by an
order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), but enforcement of the order is
restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49
U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.
(c) Contents of report; requirement of signature. (1) A report
submitted pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section must contain the
following information, where that information is available to the person
selling or leasing the defective or noncompliant tire:
(i) A statement that the report is being submitted pursuant to 49
CFR 573.10(a) (sale or lease of defective or noncompliant tires);
[[Page 182]]
(ii) The name, address and phone number of the person who purchased
or leased the tire;
(iii) The name of the manufacturer of the tire;
(iv) The tire's brand name, model name, and size;
(v) The tire's DOT identification number;
(vi) The date of the sale or lease; and
(vii) The name, address, and telephone number of the seller or
lessor.
(2) Each report must be dated and signed, with the name of the
person signing the report legibly printed or typed below the signature.
(d) Reports required to be submitted pursuant to this section must
be submitted no more than that five working days after a person to whom
a tire covered by this section has been sold or leased has taken
possession of that tire. Submissions must be made by any means which
permits the sender to verify promptly that the report was in fact
received by NHTSA and the day it was received by NHTSA.
[65 FR 81413, Dec. 26, 2000, as amended at 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007]
Sec. 573.11 Prohibition on sale or lease of new defective and
noncompliant motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment.
(a) If notification is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b)
or is required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) and the manufacturer has
provided to a dealer (including retailers of motor vehicle equipment)
notification about a new motor vehicle or new item of replacement
equipment in the dealer's possession, including actual and constructive
possession, at the time of notification that contains a defect related
to motor vehicle safety or does not comply with an applicable motor
vehicle safety standard issued under 49 CFR part 571, the dealer may
sell or lease the motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment only
if:
(1) The defect or noncompliance is remedied as required by 49 U.S.C.
30120 before delivery under the sale or lease; or
(2) When the notification is required by an order under 49 U.S.C.
30118(b), enforcement of the order is restrained or the order is set
aside in a civil action to which 49 U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.
(b) Paragraph (a) of this section does not prohibit a dealer from
offering the vehicle or equipment for sale or lease, provided that the
dealer does not sell or lease it.
[67 FR 19697, Apr. 23, 2002]
Sec. 573.12 Prohibition on sale or lease of new and used defective
and noncompliant motor vehicle equipment.
(a) Subject to Sec. 573.12(b), no person may sell or lease any new
or used item of motor vehicle equipment (including a tire) as defined by
49 U.S.C. 30102(a)(7), for installation on a motor vehicle, that is the
subject of a decision under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) or a notice required
under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c), in a condition that it may be reasonably used
for its original purpose.
(b) Paragraph (a) of this section is not applicable where:
(1) The defect or noncompliance is remedied as required under 49
U.S.C. 30120 before delivery under the sale or lease;
(2) Notification of the defect or noncompliance is required by an
order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), but enforcement of the order is
restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49
U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.
[67 FR 19698, Apr. 23, 2002]
Sec. 573.13 Reimbursement for pre-notification remedies.
(a) Pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30120(d) and Sec. 573.6(c)(8)(i) of this
part, this section specifies requirements for a manufacturer's plan
(including general reimbursement plans submitted pursuant to
Sec. 573.6(c)(8)(i)) to reimburse owners and purchasers for costs
incurred for remedies in advance of the manufacturer's notification of
safety-related defects and noncompliance with Federal motor vehicle
safety standards under subsection (b) or (c) of 49 U.S.C. 30118.
(b) Definitions. The following definitions apply to this section:
(1) Booster seat means either a backless child restraint system or a
belt-positioning seat.
(2) Claimant means a person who seeks reimbursement for the costs of
a pre-
[[Page 183]]
notification remedy for which he or she paid.
(3) Pre-notification remedy means a remedy that is performed on a
motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment for a problem
subsequently addressed by a notification under subsection (b) or (c) of
49 U.S.C. 30118 and that is obtained during the period for reimbursement
specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Other child restraint system means all child restraint systems
as defined in 49 CFR 571.213 S4 not included within the categories of
rear-facing infant seat or booster seat.
(5) Rear-facing infant seat means a child restraint system that is
designed to position a child to face only in the direction opposite to
the normal direction of travel of the motor vehicle.
(6) Warranty means a warranty as defined in Sec. 579.4(c) of this
chapter.
(c) The manufacturer's plan shall specify a period for
reimbursement, as follows:
(1) The beginning date shall be no later than a date based on the
underlying basis for the recall determined as follows:
(i) For a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety
standard, the date shall be the date of the first test or observation by
either NHTSA or the manufacturer indicating that a noncompliance may
exist.
(ii) For a safety-related defect that is determined to exist
following the opening of an Engineering Analysis (EA) by NHTSA's Office
of Defects Investigation (ODI), the date shall be the date the EA was
opened, or one year before the date of the manufacturer's notification
to NHTSA pursuant to Sec. 573.6 of this part, whichever is earlier.
(iii) For a safety-related defect that is determined to exist in the
absence of the opening of an EA, the date shall be one year before the
date of the manufacturer's notification to NHTSA pursuant to Sec. 573.6
of this part.
(2) The ending date shall be no earlier than:
(i) For motor vehicles, 10 calendar days after the date on which the
manufacturer mailed the last of its notifications to owners pursuant to
part 577 of this chapter.
(ii) For replacement equipment, 10 calendar days after the date on
which the manufacturer mailed the last of its notifications to owners
pursuant to part 577 of this chapter (where applicable) or 30 days after
the conclusion of the manufacturer's initial efforts to provide public
notice of the existence of the defect or noncompliance pursuant to
Sec. 577.7, whichever is later.
(d) The manufacturer's plan shall provide for reimbursement of costs
for pre-notification remedies, subject to the conditions established in
the plan. The following conditions and no others may be established in
the plan.
(1) The plan may exclude reimbursement for costs incurred within the
period during which the manufacturer's original or extended warranty
would have provided for a free repair of the problem addressed by the
recall, without any payment by the consumer unless a franchised dealer
or authorized representative of the manufacturer denied warranty
coverage or the repair made under warranty did not remedy the problem
addressed by the recall. The exclusion based on an extended warranty may
be applied only when the manufacturer provided written notice of the
terms of the extended warranty to owners.
(2)(i) For a motor vehicle, the plan may exclude reimbursement:
(A) If the pre-notification remedy was not of the same type (repair,
replacement, or refund of purchase price) as the recall remedy;
(B) If the pre-notification remedy did not address the defect or
noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or
noncompliance; or
(C) If the pre-notification remedy was not reasonably necessary to
correct the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a
manifestation of the defect or noncompliance.
(ii) However, the plan may not require that the pre-notification
remedy be identical to the remedy elected by the manufacturer pursuant
to 49 U.S.C. 30120(a)(1)(A).
(3)(i) For replacement equipment, the plan may exclude
reimbursement:
[[Page 184]]
(A) If the pre-notification remedy did not address the defect or
noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or
noncompliance;
(B) If the pre-notification remedy was not reasonably necessary to
correct the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a
manifestation of the defect and noncompliance; or
(C) In the case of a child restraint system that was replaced, if
the replacement child restraint is not the same type (i.e., rear-facing
infant seat, booster seat, or other child restraint system) as the
restraint that was the subject of the recall.
(ii) However, the plan may not require that the pre-notification
remedy be identical to the remedy elected by the manufacturer pursuant
to 49 U.S.C. 30120(a)(1)(B).
(4) The plan may exclude reimbursement if the claimant did not
submit adequate documentation to the manufacturer at an address or
location designated pursuant to Sec. 573.13(f). The plan may require, at
most, that the following documentation be submitted:
(i) Name and mailing address of the claimant;
(ii) Identification of the product that was recalled:
(A) For motor vehicles, the vehicle make, model, model year, and
vehicle identification number of the vehicle;
(B) For replacement equipment other than child restraint systems and
tires, a description of the equipment, including model and size as
appropriate;
(C) For child restraint systems, a description of the restraint,
including the type (rear-facing infant seat, booster seat, or other
child restraint system) and the model; or
(D) For tires, the model and size;
(iii) Identification of the recall (either the NHTSA recall number
or the manufacturer's recall number);
(iv) Identification of the owner or purchaser of the recalled motor
vehicle or replacement equipment at the time that the pre-notification
remedy was obtained;
(v) A receipt for the pre-notification remedy, which may be an
original or copy:
(A) If the reimbursement sought is for a repair, the manufacturer
may require that the receipt indicate that the repair addressed the
defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the
defect or noncompliance, and state the total amount paid for the repair
of that problem. Itemization of a receipt of the amount for parts,
labor, other costs and taxes, may not be required unless it is unclear
on the face of the receipt that the repair for which reimbursement is
sought addressed only the pre-notification remedy relating to the
pertinent defect or noncompliance or manifestation thereof.
(B) If the reimbursement sought is for the replacement of a vehicle
part or an item of replacement equipment, the manufacturer may require
that the receipt identify the item and state the total amount paid for
the item that replaced the defective or noncompliant item;
(vi) In the case of items of replacement equipment that were
replaced, documentation that the claimant or a relative thereof (with
relationship stated) owned the recalled item. Such documentation could
consist of:
(A) An invoice or receipt showing purchase of the recalled item of
replacement equipment;
(B) If the claimant sent a registration card for a recalled child
restraint system or tire to the manufacturer, a statement to that
effect;
(C) A copy of the registration card for the recalled child restraint
system or tire; or
(D) Documentation demonstrating that the claimant had replaced a
recalled tire that was on a vehicle that he, she, or a relative owned;
and
(vii) If the pre-notification remedy was obtained at a time when the
vehicle or equipment could have been repaired or replaced at no charge
under a manufacturer's original or extended warranty program,
documentation indicating that the manufacturer's dealer or authorized
facility either refused to remedy the problem addressed by the recall
under the warranty or that the warranty repair did not correct the
problem addressed by the recall.
(e) The manufacturer's plan shall specify the amount of costs to be
reimbursed for a pre-notification remedy.
(1) For motor vehicles:
[[Page 185]]
(i) The amount of reimbursement shall not be less than the lesser
of:
(A) The amount paid by the owner for the remedy, or
(B) The cost of parts for the remedy, plus associated labor at local
labor rates, miscellaneous fees such as disposal of waste, and taxes.
Costs for parts may be limited to the manufacturer's list retail price
for authorized parts.
(ii) Any associated costs, including, but not limited to, taxes or
disposal of wastes, may not be limited.
(2) For replacement equipment:
(i) The amount of reimbursement ordinarily would be the amount paid
by the owner for the replacement item.
(ii) In cases in which the owner purchased a brand or model
different from the item of motor vehicle equipment that was the subject
of the recall, the manufacturer may limit the amount of reimbursement to
the retail list price of the defective or noncompliant item that was
replaced, plus taxes.
(iii) If the item of motor vehicle equipment was repaired, the
provisions of paragraph (e)(1) of this section apply.
(f) The manufacturer's plan shall identify an address to which
claimants may mail reimbursement clams and may identify franchised
dealer(s) and authorized facilities to which claims for reimbursement
may be submitted directly.
(g) The manufacturer (either directly or through its designated
dealer or facility) shall act upon requests for reimbursement as
follows:
(1) The manufacturer shall act upon a claim for reimbursement within
60 days of its receipt. If the manufacturer denies the claim, the
manufacturer must send a notice to the claimant within 60 days of
receipt of the claim that includes a clear, concise statement of the
reasons for the denial.
(2) If a claim for reimbursement is incomplete when originally
submitted, the manufacturer shall advise the claimant within 60 days of
receipt of the claim of the documentation that is needed and offer an
opportunity to resubmit the claim with complete documentation.
(h) Reimbursement shall be in the form of a check or cash from the
manufacturer or a designated dealer or facility.
(i) The manufacturer shall make its reimbursement plan available to
the public upon request.
(j) Any disputes over the denial in whole or in part of a claim for
reimbursement shall be resolved between the claimant and the
manufacturer. NHTSA will not mediate or resolve any disputes regarding
eligibility for, or the amount of, reimbursement.
(k) Each manufacturer shall implement each plan for reimbursement in
accordance with this section and the terms of the plan.
(l) Nothing in this section requires that a manufacturer provide
reimbursement in connection with a fraudulent claim for reimbursement.
(m) A manufacturer's plan may provide that it will not apply to
recalls based solely on noncompliant or defective labels.
(n) The requirement that reimbursement for a pre-notification remedy
be provided to an owner does not apply if, in the case of a motor
vehicle or replacement equipment other than a tire, it was bought by the
first purchaser more than 10 calendar years before notice is given under
49 U.S.C. 30118(c) or an order is issued under section 49 U.S.C.
30118(b). In the case of a tire, this period shall be 5 calendar years.
[67 FR 64063, Oct. 17, 2002]
Sec. 573.14 Accelerated remedy program.
(a) An accelerated remedy program is one in which the manufacturer
expands the sources of replacement parts needed to remedy the defect or
noncompliance, or expands the number of authorized repair facilities
beyond those facilities that usually and customarily provide remedy work
for the manufacturer, or both.
(b) The Administrator may require a manufacturer to accelerate its
remedy program if:
(1) The Administrator finds that there is a risk of serious injury
or death if the remedy program is not accelerated;
(2) The Administrator finds that acceleration of the remedy program
can be reasonably achieved by expanding
[[Page 186]]
the sources of replacement parts, expanding the number of authorized
repair facilities, or both; and
(3) The Administrator determines that the manufacturer's remedy
program is not likely to be capable of completion within a reasonable
time.
(c) The Administrator, in deciding whether to require the
manufacturer to accelerate a remedy program and what to require the
manufacturer to do, will consult with the manufacturer and may consider
a wide range of information, including, but not limited to, the
following: the manufacturer's initial or revised report submitted under
Sec. 573.6(c), information from the manufacturer, information from other
manufacturers and suppliers, information from any source related to the
availability and implementation of the remedy, and the seriousness of
the risk of injury or death associated with the defect or noncompliance.
(d) As required by the Administrator, an accelerated remedy program
shall include the manner of acceleration (expansion of the sources of
replacement parts, expansion of the number of authorized repair
facilities, or both), may require submission of a plan, may identify the
parts to be provided and/or the sources of those parts, may require the
manufacturer to notify the agency and owners about any differences among
different sources or brands of parts, may require the manufacturer to
identify additional authorized repair facilities, and may specify
additional owner notifications related to the program. The Administrator
may also require the manufacturer to include a program to provide
reimbursement to owners who incur costs to obtain the accelerated
remedy.
(e) Under an accelerated remedy program, the remedy that is provided
shall be equivalent to the remedy that would have been provided if the
manufacturer's remedy program had not been accelerated. The replacement
parts used to remedy the defect or noncompliance shall be reasonably
equivalent to those that would have been used if the remedy program were
not accelerated. The service procedures shall be reasonably equivalent.
In the case of tires, all replacement tires shall be the same size and
type as the defective or noncompliant tire, shall be suitable for use on
the owner's vehicle, shall have the same or higher load index and speed
rating, and, for passenger car tires, shall have the same or better
rating in each of the three categories enumerated in the Uniform Tire
Quality Grading System. See 49 CFR 575.104. In the case of child
restraints systems, all replacements shall be of the same type (e.g.,
rear-facing infant seats with a base, rear-facing infant seats without a
base, convertible seats (designed for use in both rear- and forward-
facing modes), forward-facing only seats, high back booster seats with a
five-point harness, and belt positioning booster seats) and the same
overall quality.
(f) In those instances where the accelerated remedy program provides
that an owner may obtain the remedy from a source other than the
manufacturer or its dealers or authorized facilities by paying for the
remedy and/or its installation, the manufacturer shall reimburse the
owner for the cost of obtaining the remedy as specified on paragraphs
(f)(1) through (f)(3) of this section. Under these circumstances, the
accelerated remedy program shall include, to the extent required by the
Administrator:
(1) A description of the remedy and costs that are eligible for
reimbursement, including identification of the equipment and/or parts
and labor for which reimbursement is available;
(2) Identification, with specificity or as a class, of the
alternative repair facilities at which reimbursable repairs may be
performed, including an explanation of how to arrange for service at
those facilities; and
(3) Other provisions assuring appropriate reimbursement that are
consistent with those set forth in Sec. 573.13, including, but not
limited to, provisions regarding the procedures and needed documentation
for making a claim for reimbursement, the amount of costs to be
reimbursed, the office to which claims for reimbursement shall be
submitted, the requirements on manufacturers for acting on claims for
reimbursement, and the methods by which owners can obtain information
about the program.
[[Page 187]]
(g) In response to a manufacturer's request, the Administrator may
authorize a manufacturer to terminate its accelerated remedy program if
the Administrator concludes that the manufacturer can meet all future
demands for the remedy through its own sources in a prompt manner. If
required by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall provide notice of
the termination of the program to all owners of unremedied vehicles and
equipment at least 30 days in advance of the termination date, in a form
approved by the Administrator.
(h) Each manufacturer shall implement any accelerated remedy program
required by the Administrator according to the terms of that program.
[67 FR 72392, Dec. 5, 2002]
Sec. 573.15 Public availability of motor vehicle recall information.
(a) General--Manufacturers that have manufactured for sale, sold,
offered for sale, introduced or delivered for introduction in interstate
commerce, or imported into the United States 25,000 or more light
vehicles or 5,000 or more motorcycles in the current calendar year or
the prior calendar year shall make motor vehicle safety recall
information applicable to the vehicles they manufactured available to
the public on the Internet. The information shall be in a format that is
searchable by vehicle make and model and vehicle identification number
(VIN), that preserves consumer privacy, and that includes information
about each recall that has not been completed for each vehicle.
(b) Specific requirements--The system that manufacturers use to
provide the information as specified in paragraph (a) of this section
must also meet the following requirements:
(1) Be free of charge and not require users to register or submit
information, other than a make, model, and a VIN, in order to obtain
information on recalls;
(2) Have a hyperlink (Internet link) to it conspicuously placed on
the manufacturer's main United States' Web page;
(3) Not include sales or marketing messages with the page for
entering a make, model, and VIN, or with the page where the results are
displayed;
(4) Allow users to search a vehicle's recall remedy status, and
report that a recall has not been completed on that vehicle, as soon as
possible and no later than the date when the manufacturer includes that
vehicle on its list compiled for purposes of 49 CFR 573.8(a);
(5) Ensure safety recalls subject to paragraph (b)(4) of this
section are conspicuously placed first, before any other information
that is displayed;
(6) For vehicles that have been identified as covered by a safety
recall, but for which the recall remedy is not yet available, state that
the vehicle is covered by the safety recall and that the remedy is not
yet available;
(7) Be updated at least once every seven (7) calendar days. The date
of the last update must display on both the page for entering the make,
model, and VIN to search for recall completion information and the
results page;
(8) Where the search results in identification of a recall that has
not been completed, state the recall campaign number NHTSA assigned to
the matter; state the date the defect or noncompliance was reported
pursuant to Part 573; provide a brief description of the safety defect
or noncompliance, including the risk to safety, identified in the
manufacturer's information report or owner notification letter filed
pursuant to this part; and describe the remedy program;
(9) At a minimum, include recall completion information for each
vehicle covered by any safety recall for which the owner notification
campaign started at any time within the previous fifteen (15) calendar
years;
(10) State the earliest date for which recall completion information
is available, either on the search page or on the results page, and
provide information for all owner notification campaigns after that
date;
(11) Instruct the user to contact the manufacturer if the user has
questions or wishes to question the accuracy of any information, and
provide a hyperlink or other contact information for doing so;
(12) Ensure, through adherence with technical specifications that
NHTSA makes available through a secure area of its Web site http://
www.safercar.gov/Vehicle + Manufacturers/RecallsPortal,
[[Page 188]]
the secure electronic transfer of the recall information and data
required to be made publicly available by this section, to NHTSA for its
use in displaying that information and data on its Web sites or other
public portals.
[78 FR 51421, Aug. 20, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 43677, July 28, 2014]
Sec. 573.16 Reporting bankruptcy petition.
Each manufacturer that files a bankruptcy petition, or is the
subject of an involuntary petition for which relief has been ordered,
pursuant to Title 11 of the United States Code, 11 U.S.C. 101 et seq.,
shall provide NHTSA a report as specified below.
(a) The name of the court, the docket number, and the name, address
and telephone number of the manufacturer's legal representative;
(b) A copy of the bankruptcy petition;
(c) A list of the recalls for which the manufacturer filed a
``Defect and noncompliance information report'' with NHTSA pursuant to
49 CFR 573.6; and
(d) The information specified in 49 CFR 573.7(b) for each recall
listed pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.
(e) Each report pursuant to this section must be received by NHTSA
not more than 5 working days after the date the petition is filed in the
United States Bankruptcy Court. Reports shall be addressed to the
Associate Administrator for Enforcement, National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, Attention: Recall Management Division (NVS-215), 1200
New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590, or submitted as an attachment
to an email message to [email protected] in a portable document format
(.pdf).
[78 FR 51422, Aug. 20, 2013]
PART 574_TIRE IDENTIFICATION AND RECORDKEEPING--Table of Contents
Sec.
574.1 Scope.
574.2 Purpose.
574.3 Definitions.
574.4 Applicability.
574.5 Tire identification requirements.
574.6 How to obtain a plant code.
574.7 Information requirements--new tire manufacturers, new tire brand
name owners.
574.8 Information requirements--tire distributors and dealers.
574.9 Requirements for motor vehicle dealers.
574.10 Requirements for motor vehicle manufacturers.
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166; delegation
of authority at 49 CFR 1.95.
Editorial Note: An interpretation of manufacturer's designee issued
by NHTSA and published at 36 FR 9780, May 28, 1971, provides as follows:
``A request for an interpretation has been received from the Rubber
Manufacturers Association asking that it be made clear that, under the
Tire Identification and Recordkeeping Regulation (part 574),
particularly Secs. 574.7 and 574.8, only the tire manufacturer, brand
name owner, or retreader may designate a third party to provide the
necessary recording forms or to maintain the records required by the
regulation.
``Another person has requested an interpretation concerning the
questions whether: (1) A tire manufacturer, brand name owner or
retreader may designate one or more persons to be its designee for the
purpose of maintaining the information, (2) an independent distributor
or dealer may select a designee for the retention of the manufacturer's
records, provided the manufacturer approves the designation, and (3) the
independent distributor or dealer may seek administrative relief in the
event he believes the information retained by the manufacturer is being
used to his detriment.
``Under section 113(f) of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 1402(f) and part 574, it is the tire manufacturer
who has the ultimate responsibility for maintaining the records of first
purchasers. Therefore, it is the tire manufacturer or his designee who
must maintain these records. The term designee, as used in the
regulation, was not intended to preclude multiple designees; if the tire
manufacturer desires, he may designate more than one person to maintain
the required information. Furthermore, neither the Act nor the
regulation prohibits the distributor or dealer from being the
manufacturer's designee nor do they prohibit a distributor or dealer
from selecting someone to be the manufacturer's designee provided the
manufacturer approves of the selection.
``With respect to the possibility of manufacturers using the
maintained information to the detriment of a distributor or dealer, the
NHTSA will of course investigate claims
[[Page 189]]
by distributors or dealers of alleged misconduct and, if the maintained
information is being misused, take appropriate action.
``Issued under the authority of sections 103, 113, and 119 of the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act, 15 U.S.C. 1392, 1402, and
1407, and the delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51.''
Sec. 574.1 Scope.
This part sets forth the method by which new tire manufacturers and
new tire brand name owners shall identify tires for use on motor
vehicles and maintain records of tire purchasers, and the methods by
which retreaders and retreaded tire brand name owners shall identify
tires for use on motor vehicles. This part also sets forth the methods
by which independent tire dealers and distributors shall record, on
registration forms, their names and addresses and the identification
number of the tires sold to tire purchasers and provide the forms to the
purchasers, so that the purchasers may report their names to the new
tire manufacturers and new tire brand name owners, and by which other
tire dealers and distributors shall record and report the names of tire
purchasers to the new tire manufacturers and new tire brand name owners.
(Authority: Secs. 108, 119, and 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15
U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1421); sec. 4, Pub. L. 97-311, 96 Stat. 1619 (15
U.S.C. 1418); and delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)
[49 FR 4760, Feb. 8, 1984]
Sec. 574.2 Purpose.
The purpose of this part is to facilitate notification to purchasers
of defective or nonconforming tires, pursuant to Sections 30118 and
30119 of Title 49, United States Code, so that they may take appropriate
action in the interest of motor vehicle safety.
[61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]
Sec. 574.3 Definitions.
(a) Statutory definitions. All terms in this part that are defined
in Section 30102 of Title 49, United States Code, are used as defined
therein.
(b) Motor vehicle safety standard definitions. Unless otherwise
indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter the
Standards), are used as defined therein.
(c)(1) Independent means, with respect to a tire distributor or
dealer, one whose business is not owned or controlled by a tire
manufacturer or brand name owner.
(2) Mileage contract purchaser means a person who purchases or
leases tire use on a mileage basis.
(3) New tire brand name owner means a person, other than a new tire
manufacturer, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a
new tire or a person who licenses another to purchase new tires from a
new tire manufacturer bearing the licensor's brand name.
(4) Retreaded tire brand name owner means a person, other than a
retreader, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a
retreaded tire or a person who licenses another to purchase retreaded
tires from a retreader bearing the licensor's brand name.
(5) Tire purchaser means a person who buys or leases a new tire, or
who buys or leases for 60 days or more a motor vehicle containing a new
tire for purposes other than resale.
(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718
(15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L.
93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C.
1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)
[36 FR 1197, Jan. 26, 1971, as amended at 44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979; 49
FR 38612, Oct. 1, 1984; 61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]
Sec. 574.4 Applicability.
This part applies to manufacturers, brand name owners, retreaders,
distributors, and dealers of new and retreaded tires, and new non-
pneumatic tires and non-pneumatic tire assemblies for use on motor
vehicles manufactured after 1948 and to manufacturers and dealers of
motor vehicles manufactured after 1948. However, it does not apply to
persons who retread tires solely for their own use.
[36 FR 5422, Mar. 23, 1971, as amended at 55 FR 29596, July 20, 1990]
[[Page 190]]
Sec. 574.5 Tire identification requirements.
(a) Tire identification number (TIN) labeling requirement--(1) New
tires. Each new tire manufacturer must conspicuously label on one
sidewall of each tire it manufactures, except non-pneumatic tires or
non-pneumatic tire assemblies, by permanently molding into or onto the
sidewall, in the manner and location specified in Figure 1, a TIN
consisting of 13 symbols and containing the information set forth in
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section. NOTE: The Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards may have more specific TIN marking
requirements for some tires. See 49 CFR part 571.
(2) Retreaded tires. Each tire retreader must conspicuously label at
least one sidewall of each tire it retreads by permanently molding or
branding into or onto the sidewall, in the manner and location specified
by Figure 2, a TIN consisting of seven symbols and containing the
information set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(3) of this section.
(3) Non-pneumatic tires and non-pneumatic tire assemblies. Each
manufacturer of a non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly must
permanently mold, stamp, or otherwise permanently mark into or onto at
least one side of the non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly
a TIN consisting of 13 symbols and containing the information set forth
in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section.
(4) Tires for mileage-contract purchasers. Manufacturers or
retreaders of tires exclusively for mileage-contract purchasers may,
instead of meeting any other requirements of this section, permanently
mold into or onto the tire sidewall in lettering at least 6 mm (0.25
inch) high the phrase ``for mileage contract use only''.
(5) Optional phase-out of two-symbol plant code. NHTSA will assign
to tire manufacturers who were previously assigned a plant code
consisting of two symbols a new three-symbol plant code to replace each
two-symbol plant code. A manufacturer may continue to use a previously
assigned two-symbol plant code until April 13, 2025. Manufacturers who
use a two-symbol plant code must comply with paragraph (g) of this
section in lieu of the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section.
Retreaders may also optionally comply with paragraph (g) of this section
in lieu of paragraph (b) of this section until April 13, 2025.
(b) TIN content requirements--(1) Plant code. The plant code,
consisting of three symbols, must be the first group of the TIN. The
plant code represents the identity of the new tire manufacturer or
retreader. The plant code is assigned to the manufacturer or retreader
by NHTSA upon request. See Sec. 574.6.
(2) Manufacturer's code. The manufacturer's code, consisting of six
symbols, is the second group of the TIN for all new tires, but it cannot
be used for retreaded tires. The manufacturer's code must be located
between the plant code and the date code as shown in Figure 1. For new
tires, the manufacturer's code may be used as a descriptive code for the
purpose of identifying significant characteristics of the tire or to
identify the brand name owner. For a new non-pneumatic tire or a non-
pneumatic tire assembly, the manufacturer's code must identify the non-
pneumatic tire identification code. Each manufacturer must maintain a
detailed record of each manufacturer's code it uses with the
corresponding tire size, tire characteristic, brand name owner, and non-
pneumatic tire identification code as applicable and their respective
meanings, which it must provide to NHTSA upon request.
(3) Date code. The date code, consisting of four numerical symbols,
is the final group. The date code must identify the week and year of
manufacture. The first and second symbols of the date code must identify
the week of the year by using ``01'' for the first full calendar week in
each year, ``02'' for the second full calendar week, and so on. The
calendar week runs from Sunday through the following Saturday. The final
week of each year may include no more than six days of the following
year. The third and fourth symbols of the date code must identify the
last two digits of the year of manufacture. For example, 0109 means the
tire was manufactured in the first full calendar week of 2009, or the
week beginning on Sunday, January 4, 2009, and
[[Page 191]]
ending on Saturday, January 10, 2009. The date code must be positioned
as shown in Figures 1 or 2 for new tires and retreaded tires,
respectively.
(c) Retreaded tire mark. The symbol ``R'' must be used to identify
retreaded tires, and must be marked at the time of TIN marking in a
location specified in Figure 2. The ``R'' is not part of the TIN.
(d) Method of marking. (1) At the option of the manufacturer or
retreader, the information contained in paragraph (b)(3) of this section
may, instead of being permanently molded, be laser etched into or onto
the sidewall in the location specified in Figures 1 or 2, respectively,
during the manufacturing process of the tire and not later than 24 hours
after the tire is removed from the mold.
(2) The labeling for a non-pneumatic tire or a non-pneumatic tire
assembly must be in the manner specified in Figure 1 and positioned on
the non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly such that it is
not placed on the tread or the outermost edge of the tire and is not
obstructed by any portion of the non-pneumatic rim or wheel center
member designated for use with that non-pneumatic tire in S4.4 of
Standard No. 129 (49 CFR 571.129).
(e) The DOT symbol. (1) The DOT symbol constitutes a certification
that the marked tire conforms to an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard.
(2) If required, a manufacturer or retreader must place the DOT
symbol as shown and positioned relative to the TIN in Figure 1 for new
tires and as shown in Figure 2 for retreaded tires.
(3) The DOT symbol must not appear on tires to which no Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard is applicable, except that retreaders of
tires for use on motor vehicles other than passenger cars may, prior to
retreading, remove the DOT symbol from the sidewall or allow it to
remain on the sidewall, at the retreader's option.
(f) Authorized symbols. The only symbols that manufacturers and
retreaders are allowed to use in the tire identification number are: A,
B, C, D, E, F, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, T, U, V, W, X, Y, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9, and 0.
(g) Old TIN content requirement. The following requirements are
applicable to tire manufacturers who were previously assigned two-symbol
plant codes by NHTSA and to retreaders. A new tire manufacturer who
continues to use a previously assigned two-symbol plant code in place of
a new three-symbol plant code and a retreader may optionally comply with
this paragraph instead of paragraph (b) of this section until April 13,
2025.
(1) First grouping. The plant code, consisting of two symbols, must
be the first group of the TIN. The plant code represents the identity of
the new tire manufacturer and was previously assigned to the
manufacturer by NHTSA.
(2) Second grouping. For new tires, the second group, consisting of
no more than two symbols, must be used to identify the tire size. For a
non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly, the second group,
consisting of no more than two symbols, must be used to identify the
non-pneumatic tire identification code. For retreaded tires, the second
group, consisting of no more than two symbols, must identify the retread
matrix in which the tire was processed or a tire size code if a matrix
was not used to process the retreaded tire. Each new tire manufacturer
and retreader must maintain a record of each symbol used, with the
corresponding matrix or tire size, which it must provide to NHTSA upon
request.
(3) Third grouping. The third group, consisting of no more than four
symbols, may be used at the option of the manufacturer or retreader as a
descriptive code for the purpose of identifying significant
characteristics of the tire. However, if the tire is manufactured for a
brand name owner, one of the functions of the third grouping must be to
identify the brand name owner. Each manufacturer or retreader who uses
the third grouping must maintain a detailed record of any descriptive
brand name owner code used, which it must provide to NHTSA upon request.
(4) Fourth grouping. The date code, consisting of four numerical
symbols, is the final group. The date code must identify the week and
year of manufacture. The first and second symbols of the date code must
identify the week of
[[Page 192]]
the year by using ``01'' for the first full calendar week in each year,
``02'' for the second full calendar week, and so on. The calendar week
runs from Sunday through the following Saturday. The final week of each
year may include no more than six days of the following year. The third
and fourth symbols of the date code must identify the last two digits of
the year of manufacture. For example, 0109 means the tire was
manufactured in the first full calendar week of 2009, or the week
beginning on Sunday, January 4, 2009, and ending on Saturday, January
10, 2009. The date code must be positioned as shown in Figures 1 or 2
for new tires and retreaded tires, respectively.
[[Page 193]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13AP15.004
[[Page 194]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13AP15.005
[80 FR 19560, Apr. 13, 2015]
Sec. 574.6 How to obtain a plant code.
To obtain a plant code required by Sec. 574.5(b)(1), each
manufacturer of new
[[Page 195]]
or retreaded pneumatic tires, non-pneumatic tires, or non-pneumatic tire
assemblies must apply in writing to the Office of Vehicle Safety
Compliance, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New
Jersey Ave. SW., Washington, DC 20590, identify itself as a tire
manufacturer or retreader, and furnish the following information:
(a) The name, or other designation identifying the applicant, and
its main office address;
(b) The name, or other identifying designation, of each individual
plant operated by the manufacturer and the address of each plant, if
applicable;
(c) The name, or other identifying designation, of the corporate
owner, if applicable, of each plant;
(d) The email addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers for each
person or corporation listed, including the main office; and
(e) The type of tires manufactured at each plant, e.g., pneumatic
tires for passenger cars, buses, trucks, or motorcycles; pneumatic
retreaded tires; or non-pneumatic tires or non-pneumatic tire
assemblies.
Note to Sec. 574,6: Additional requirements for new tire
manufacturers may be applicable. See 49 CFR parts 551 and 566.
[80 FR 19560, Apr. 13, 2015]
Sec. 574.7 Information requirements--new tire manufacturers,
new tire brand name owners.
(a)(1) Each new tire manufacturer and each new tire brand name owner
(hereinafter referred to in this section and Sec. 574.8 as ``tire
manufacturer'') or its designee, shall provide tire registration forms
to every distributor and dealer of its tires which offers new tires for
sale or lease to tire purchasers.
(2) Each tire registration form provided to independent distributors
and dealers pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall contain
space for recording the information specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i)
through (a)(4)(iii) of this section. Each form shall:
(i) Have the following physical characteristics:
(A) Be rectangular;
(B) Be not less than 3\1/2\ inches high, 5 inches long, and 0.007
inches thick;
(C) Be not more than 4\1/4\ inches high, 6 inches long, and 0.016
inch thick.
(ii) On the address side of the form, be addressed with the name and
address of the manufacturer or its designee, and include, in the upper
right hand corner, the statement ``Affix a postcard stamp.''
(iii) On the other side of the form:
(A) Include the tire manufacturer's name, unless it appears on the
address side of the form;
(B) Include a statement explaining the purpose of the form and how a
consumer may register tires. The statement shall:
(1) Include the heading ``IMPORTANT''.
(2) Include the sentence: ``In case of a recall, we can reach you
only if we have your name and address.''
(3) Indicate that sending in the card will add a person to the
manufacturer's recall list.
(4) A tire manufacturer may voluntarily provide means for tire
registration via the Internet, by telephone or other electronic means.
If a tire manufacturer voluntarily provides a Web site or other means by
which its tires can be registered, it may (but is not required to)
include a sentence listing one or more such means, beginning with the
phrase ``Instead of mailing this form, you can * * *.'' Example: Instead
of mailing this form, you can register online at [insert tire
manufacturer's registration Web site address].
(5) Include the sentence: ``Do it today.''
(C) Include space for recording tire identification numbers for six
tires.
(D) Use shading to distinguish between areas of the form to be
filled in by sellers and customers.
(1) Include the statement: ``Shaded areas must be filled in by
seller.''
(2) The areas of the form for recording tire identification numbers
and information about the seller of the tires must be shaded.
(3) The area of the form for recording the customer name and address
must not be shaded.
(E) Include, in the top right corner, the phrase ``OMB Control No.
2127-0050''.
[[Page 196]]
(3) Each tire registration form provided to distributors and dealers
that are not independent distributors or dealers pursuant to paragraph
(a)(1) of this section must contain space for recording the information
specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(iii) of this section.
Each form must include:
(A) A statement indicating where the form should be returned,
including the name and mailing address of the manufacturer or its
designee.
(B) The tire manufacturers' logo or other identification, if the
manufacturer is not identified as part of the statement indicating where
the form should be returned.
(C) The statement: ``IMPORTANT: FEDERAL LAW REQUIRES TIRE
IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS MUST BE REGISTERED''.
(D) In the top right corner, the phrase ``OMB Control No. 2127-
0050''.
(4)(i) Name and address of the tire purchaser.
(ii) Tire identification number.
(iii) Name and address of the tire seller or other means by which
the tire manufacturer can identify the tire seller.
(b) Each tire manufacturer shall record and maintain, or have
recorded and maintained for it by a designee, the information from
registration forms which are submitted to it or its designee. No tire
manufacturer shall use the information on the registration forms for any
commercial purpose detrimental to tire distributors and dealers. Any
tire manufacturer to which registration forms are mistakenly sent shall
forward those registration forms to the proper tire manufacturer within
90 days of the receipt of the forms.
(c) Each tire manufacturer shall maintain, or have maintained for it
by a designee, a record of each tire distributor and dealer that
purchases tires directly from the manufacturer and sells them to tire
purchasers, the number of tires purchased by each such distributor or
dealer, the number of tires for which reports have been received from
each such distributor or dealer other than an independent distributor or
dealer, the number of tires for which reports have been received from
each such independent distributor or dealer, the total number of tires
for which registration forms have been submitted to the manufacturer or
its designee, and the total number of tires sold by the manufacturer.
(d) The information that is specified in paragraph (a)(4) of this
section and recorded on registration forms submitted to a tire
manufacturer or its designee shall be maintained for a period of not
less than five years from the date on which the information is recorded
by the manufacturer or its designee.
(e) Tire manufacturers may voluntarily provide means for tire
registration via the Internet, by telephone or other electronic means.
(f) Each tire manufacturer shall meet the requirements of paragraphs
(b), (c) and (d) of this section with respect to tire registration
information submitted to it or its designee by any means authorized by
the manufacturer in addition to the use of registration forms.
(Authority: Secs. 108, 119, and 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15
U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1421); sec. 4, Pub. L. 97-311, 96 Stat. 1619 (15
U.S.C. 1418); and delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)
[49 FR 4760, Feb. 8, 1984; 49 FR 5621, Feb. 14, 1984, as amended at 56
FR 49427, Sept. 30, 1991; 64 FR 36815, July 8, 1999; 67 FR 45872, July
10, 2002; 71 FR 39233, July 12, 2006; 73 FR 72368, Nov. 28, 2008]
Sec. 574.8 Information requirements--tire distributors and dealers.
(a) Independent distributors and dealers.
(1) Each independent distributor and each independent dealer selling
or leasing new tires to tire purchasers or lessors (hereinafter referred
to in this section as ``tire purchasers'') shall comply with paragraph
(a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii) or (a)(1)(iii) of this section:
(i) At the time of sale or lease of the tire, provide each tire
purchaser with a paper tire registration form on which the distributor
or dealer has recorded the following information:
(A) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or
leased to the tire purchaser, and
(B) The distributor's or dealer's name and street address. In lieu
of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or
dealer's e-mail address or
[[Page 197]]
Web site may be recorded. Other means of identifying the distributor or
dealer known to the manufacturer may also be used.
(ii) Record the following information on a paper tire registration
form and return it to the tire manufacturer, or its designee, on behalf
of the tire purchaser, at no charge to the tire purchaser and within 30
days of the date of sale or lease:
(A) The purchaser's name and address,
(B) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or
leased to the tire purchaser, and
(C) The distributor's or dealer's name and street address. In lieu
of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or
dealer's e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of
identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also
be used.
(iii) Electronically transmit the following information on the tire
registration form by any means listed on the form by the tire
manufacturer, or by such other means as may be authorized by the tire
manufacturer, to the tire manufacturer or its designee, using secure
means (e.g., https on the Web), at no charge to the tire purchaser and
within 30 days of the date of sale or lease:
(A) The purchaser's name and address,
(B) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or
leased to the tire purchaser, and
(C) The distributor's or dealer's name and street address. In lieu
of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or
dealer's e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of
identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also
be used.
(2) Each independent distributor or dealer that complies with
paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section shall use either the tire
registration forms provided by the tire manufacturers pursuant to
Sec. 574.7(a) or registration forms obtained from another source. Paper
forms obtained from other sources must comply with the requirements
specified in Sec. 574.7(a) for forms provided by tire manufacturers to
independent distributors and dealers.
(3) Multiple tire sales or leases by the same tire purchaser may be
recorded on a single paper registration form or in a single Web site
transaction.
(4) Each independent distributor or dealer that is complying with
paragraph (a)(1)(iii) with respect to a sale or lease shall include a
statement to that effect on the invoice for that sale or lease and
provide the invoice to the tire purchaser.
(b) Other distributors and dealers.
(1) Each distributor and each dealer, other than an independent
distributor or dealer, selling new tires to tire purchasers:
(i) shall submit, using paper registration forms or, if authorized
by the tire manufacturer, secure electronic means, the information
specified in Sec. 574.7(a)(4) to the manufacturer of the tires sold, or
to the manufacturer's designee.
(ii) shall submit the information specified in Sec. 574.7(a)(4) to
the tire manufacturer or the manufacturer's designee, not less often
than every 30 days. A distributor or dealer selling fewer than 40 tires
of all makes, types and sizes during a 30 day period may wait until a
total of 40 new tires is sold. In no event may more than six months
elapse before the Sec. 574.7(a)(4) information is forwarded to the
respective tire manufacturers or their designees.
(c) Each distributor and each dealer selling new tires to other tire
distributors or dealers shall supply to the distributor or dealer a
means to record the information specified in Sec. 574.7(a)(4), unless
such means has been provided to that distributor or dealer by another
person or by a manufacturer.
(d) Each distributor and each dealer shall immediately stop selling
any group of tires when so directed by a notification issued pursuant to
49 U.S.C. 30118, Notification of defects and noncompliance.
[73 FR 72368, Nov. 28, 2008]
Sec. 574.9 Requirements for motor vehicle dealers.
(a) Each motor vehicle dealer who sells a used motor vehicle for
purposes other than resale, who leases a motor
[[Page 198]]
vehicle for more than 60 days, that is equipped with new tires is
considered, for purposes of this part, to be a tire dealer and shall
meet the requirements specified in Sec. 574.8.
(b) Each person selling a motor vehicle to first purchasers for
purposes other than resale, that is equipped with new tires that were
not on the motor vehicle when shipped by the vehicle manufacturer is
considered a tire dealer for purposes of this part and shall meet the
requirements specified in Sec. 574.8.
(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718
(15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L.
93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C.
1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)
[44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979]
Sec. 574.10 Requirements for motor vehicle manufacturers.
Each motor vehicle manufacturer, or his designee, shall maintain a
record of the new tires on or in each vehicle shipped by him or a motor
vehicle distributor or dealer, and shall maintain a record of the name
and address of the first purchaser for purposes other than resale of
each vehicle equipped with such tires. These records shall be maintained
for a period of not less than 5 years from the date of sale of the
vehicle to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale.
(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718
(15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L.
93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C.
1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)
[44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979, as amended at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]
PART 575_CONSUMER INFORMATION--Table of Contents
Subpart A_Regulations Issued Under Section 112(d) of the National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act; General
Sec.
575.1 Scope.
575.2 Definitions.
575.3 Matter incorporated by reference.
575.4 Application.
575.5 Separability.
575.6 Requirements.
575.7 Special vehicles.
Subpart B_Regulations; Consumer Information Items
575.101-575.102 [Reserved]
575.103 Truck-camper loading.
575.104 Uniform tire quality grading standards.
575.105 Vehicle rollover.
575.106 Tire fuel efficiency consumer information program.
Subpart C_Transportation Recall Enhancement, Accountability, and
Documentation Act; Consumer Information
575.201 Child restraint performance.
Subpart D_Safe, Accountable, Flexible, Efficient Transportation Equity
Act: A Legacy for Users (SAFETEA LU); Consumer Information
575.301 Vehicle labeling of safety rating information (applicable
unless a vehicle is subject to Sec. 575.302).
575.302 Vehicle labeling of safety rating information (compliance
required for model year 2012 and later vehicles manufactured
on or after January 31, 2012).
Subpart E_Energy Independence and Security Act; Consumer Information
575.401 Vehicle labeling of fuel economy, greenhouse gas, and other
pollutant emissions information.
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 32302, 32304A, 30111, 30115, 30117, 30123,
30166, 30181, 30182, 30183, and 32908, Pub. L. 104-414, 114 Stat. 1800,
Pub. L. 109-59, 119 Stat. 1144, Pub. L. 110-140, 121 Stat. 1492, 15
U.S.C. 1232(g); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95.
Subpart A_Regulations Issued Under Section 112(d) of the National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act; General
Source: 35 FR 6867, Apr. 30, 1970, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 575.1 Scope.
This part contains National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
regulations relating to consumer information.
[75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010]
[[Page 199]]
Sec. 575.2 Definitions.
(a) Statutory definitions. (1) All terms used in this part, subject
to paragraph (a)(2) of this section, that are defined in 49 U.S.C.
30102, are used as defined therein.
(2) All terms used in Subpart D of this part that are defined in 15
U.S.C. 1231, are used as defined therein.
(b) Motor Vehicle Safety Standard definitions. Unless otherwise
indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter ``the
Standards''), are used as defined in the Standards without regard to the
applicability of a standard in which a definition is contained.
(c) Definitions used in this part.
Owners manual means the document which contains the manufacturers
comprehensive vehicle operating and maintenance instructions, and which
is intended to remain with the vehicle for the life of the vehicle.
Skid number means the frictional resistance measured in accordance
with ASTM E 274 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3) at 40 miles
per hour, omitting water delivery as specified in paragraph 7.1 of ASTM
E 274 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3).
[35 FR 6867, Apr. 30, 1970, as amended at 38 FR 5339, Feb. 28, 1973; 48
FR 44081, Sept. 27, 1983; 54 FR 48749, Nov. 27, 1989; 64 FR 27924, May
24, 1999; 75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010]
Sec. 575.3 Matter incorporated by reference.
(a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part
with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C.
552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that
specified in this section, the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) must publish notice of change in the Federal
Register and the material must be available to the public. All approved
material is available for inspection at the NHTSA Technical Information
Services Reading Room (http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/trd/),
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590 (888-327-4236), and at
the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information
on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go
to: http://www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. All
approved material is also available from the sources listed below. If
you experience difficulty obtaining the standards referenced below,
contact NHTSA's Office of Rulemaking, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590, phone number: (202) 366-0846.
(b) International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de
la Voie-Creuse, CP 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland, + 41 22 749 01
11, http://www.iso.org/iso/home.htm. All ISO materials are also
available from the U.S. ISO member, American National Standards
Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036-
7417, 212-642-4900, http://www.ansi.org/.
(1) International Organization for Standardization (ISO), ISO
28580:2009(E) (``ISO 28580''), ``Passenger car, truck and bus tyres--
Methods of measuring rolling resistance--Single point test and
correlation of measurement results,'' First edition (July 1, 2009), IBR
approved for Sec. 575.106.
(2) [Reserved]
(c) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr
Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, 610-832-
9500, http://www.astm.org/.
(1) ASTM E 501-08 (``ASTM E 501''), ``Standard Specification for
Standard Rib Tire for Pavement Skid-Resistance Tests'' (June 2008), IBR
approved for Sec. 575.104 and Sec. 575.106.
(2) ASTM E 1136-93 (Reapproved 2003) (``ASTM E 1136''), ``Standard
Specification for a Radial Standard Reference Test Tire'' (July 1993),
IBR approved for Sec. 575.104.
(3) ASTM E 1337-90 (Reapproved 2002) (``ASTM E 1337''), ``Standard
Test Method for Determining Longitudinal Peak Braking Coefficient of
Paved Surfaces Using a Standard Reference Test Tire'' (April 1990), IBR
approved for Sec. 575.106.
(d) The following standards are not available from the original
publisher or a standards reseller. As indicated in paragraph (a) of this
section, the standards are available for inspection at the NHTSA
Technical Information Services Reading Room (http://
[[Page 200]]
www.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/trd/), 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590 (888-327-4236), and at NARA. For information on the
availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. If you
experience difficulty obtaining the standards referenced below, contact
NHTSA's Office of Rulemaking, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 20590, phone number (202) 366-0846.
(1) ASTM E 274-79 (``ASTM E 274''), ``Standard Test Method for Skid
Resistance of Paved Surfaces Using a Full-Scale Tire'' (February 1980),
IBR approved for Sec. 575.104.
(2) ASTM F 377-74 (``ASTM F 377''), ``Standard Method for
Calibration of Braking Force for Testing of Pneumatic Tires'' (March
1974), IBR approved for Sec. 575.104.
[75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010, as amended at 76 FR 79121, Dec. 21, 2011]
Sec. 575.4 Application.
(a) General. Except as provided in paragraphs (b) through (d) of
this section, each section set forth in subpart B of this part applies
according to its terms to motor vehicles and tires manufactured after
the effective date indicated.
(b) Military vehicles. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or
tires sold directly to the Armed Forces of the United States in
conformity with contractual specifications.
(c) Export. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires
intended solely for export and so labeled or tagged.
(d) Import. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires
imported for purposes other than resale.
[39 FR 1039, Jan. 4, 1974]
Sec. 575.5 Separability.
If any section established in this part or its application to any
person or circumstances is held invalid, the remainder of the part and
the application of that section to other persons or circumstances is not
affected thereby.
Sec. 575.6 Requirements.
(a)(1) At the time a motor vehicle is delivered to the first
purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer of that
vehicle shall provide the Uniform Tire Quality Grading information
required by Sec. 575.104(d)(1)(iii) in the owner's manual of each
vehicle it produces. The vehicle manufacturer shall also provide to the
purchaser, in writing and in the English language, the information
specified in Sec. 575.103 of this part that is applicable to that
vehicle. The information provided with a vehicle may contain more than
one table, but the document must either:
(i) Clearly and unconditionally indicate which of the tables apply
to the vehicle with which it is provided, or
(ii) Contain a statement on its cover referring the reader to the
vehicle certification label for specific information concerning which of
the tables apply to that vehicle. If the manufacturer chooses option in
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section, the vehicle certification label
shall include such specific information.
Example 1. Manufacturer X furnishes a document containing several
tables that apply to various groups of vehicles that it produces. The
document contains the following notation on its front page: ``The
information that applies to this vehicle is contained in Table 5.'' That
notation satisfies the requirement.
Example 2. Manufacturer Y furnishes a document containing several
tables as in Example 1, with the following notation on its front page:
``Information applies as follows:
Model P. Regular cab, 135 in. (3,430 mm) wheel base--Table 1.
Model P. Club cab, 142 in. (3,607 mm) wheel base--Table 2.
Model Q--Table 3.''
This notation does not satisfy the requirement, since it is
conditioned on the model or the equipment of the vehicle with which the
document is furnished, and therefore additional information is required
to select the proper table.
(2)(i) At the time a motor vehicle manufactured on or after
September 1, 1990 is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other
than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the purchaser, in writing
in the English language and not less than 10 point type, the following
statement in the owner's manual, or, if there is no owner's manual, on a
one-page document:
[[Page 201]]
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying [INSERT NAME OF MANUFACTURER].
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or [INSERT
NAME OF MANUFACTURER].
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
(ii) The manufacturer shall specify in the table of contents of the
owner's manual the location of the statement in 575.6(a)(2)(i). The
heading in the table of contents shall state ``Reporting Safety
Defects.''
(3) For vehicles manufactured prior to September 1, 2000, at the
time a motor vehicle is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes
other than resale, the manufacturer of that vehicle shall provide the
purchaser, in writing and in the English language, the information
specified in Secs. 575.103 and 575.104 of this part that is applicable
to that vehicle and its tires. The document provided with a vehicle may
contain more than one table, but the document must either clearly and
unconditionally indicate which of the tables apply to the vehicle with
which it is provided, or contain a statement on its cover referring the
reader to the vehicle certification label for specific information
concerning which of the tables apply to that vehicle. If the
manufacturer chooses option (a)(2) of this section, the vehicle
certification label shall include such specific information.
Example 1. Manufacturer X furnishes a document containing several
tables, which apply to various groups of vehicles that it produces. The
document contains the following notation on its front page: ``The
information that applies to this vehicle is contained in Table 5.'' The
notation satisfies the requirement.
Example 2. Manufacturer Y furnishes a document containing several
tables as in Example 1, with the following notation on its front page:
Information applies as follows:
Model P, 6-cylinder engine--Table 1.
Model P, 8-cylinder engine--Table 2.
Model Q--Table 3.
This notation does not satisfy the requirement, since it is
conditioned on the model or the equipment of the vehicle with which the
document is furnished, and therefore additional information is required
to select the proper table.
(4) When a motor vehicle that has a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less,
except a motorcycle or low speed vehicle, and that is manufactured on or
after September 1, 2005, is delivered to the first purchaser for
purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the
purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point
type, a discussion of the items specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i)
through (v) of this section in the owner's manual, or, if there is no
owner's manual, in a document:
(i) Tire labeling, including a description and explanation of each
marking on the tires provided with the vehicle, and information about
the location of the Tire Identification Number (TIN);
(ii) Recommended tire inflation pressure, including a description
and explanation of:
(A) Recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
(B) The vehicle placard and tire inflation pressure label specified
in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 110 and their location in
the vehicle,
(C) Adverse safety consequences of underinflation (including tire
failure), and
(D) Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper
inflation;
(iii) Glossary of tire terminology, including ``cold tire
pressure,'' ``maximum inflation pressure,'' and ``recommended inflation
pressure,'' and all non-technical terms defined in S3 of FMVSS Nos. 110
& 139;
(iv) Tire care, including maintenance and safety practices;
(v) Vehicle load limits, including a description and explanation of:
(A) Locating and understanding load limit information, total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity, and cargo capacity,
[[Page 202]]
(B) Calculating total and cargo load capacities with varying seating
configurations including quantitative examples showing/illustrating how
the vehicle's cargo and luggage capacity decreases as the combined
number and size of occupants increases,
(C) Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capabilities,
(D) Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and
stopping and on tires.
(5) When a motor vehicle that has a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less,
except a motorcycle or low speed vehicle, and that is manufactured on or
after September 1, 2005, is delivered to the first purchaser for
purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the
purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point
type, the following verbatim statement, as applicable, in the owner's
manual, or, if there is no owner's manual, in a document:
(i) For vehicles except trailers: ``Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit--
(1) Locate the statement ``The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the ``XXX'' amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.''
(ii) For trailers: ``Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit--
(1) Locate the statement ``The weight of cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.
(2) This figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.''
(3) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity.
(b) At the time a motor vehicle tire is delivered to the first
purchaser for a purpose other than resale, the manufacturer of that
tire, or in the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the brand
name owner, shall provide to that purchaser the information specified in
subpart B of this part that is applicable to that tire.
(c) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles, each brand name owner of
tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name
owner shall provide for examination by prospective purchasers, at each
location where its vehicles or tires are offered for sale by a person
with whom the manufacturer or brand name owner has a contractual,
proprietary, or other legal relationship, or by a person who has such a
relationship with a distributor of the manufacturer or brand name owner
concerning the vehicle or tire in question, the information specified in
subpart B of this part that is applicable to each of the vehicles or
tires offered for sale at that location. The information shall be
provided without charge and in sufficient quantity to be available for
retention by prospective purchasers or sent by mail to a prospective
purchaser upon his request. With respect to newly introduced vehicles or
tires, the information shall be provided for examination by prospective
purchasers not later than the day on which the manufacturer or brand
name owner first authorizes those vehicles or tires to be put on general
public display and sold to consumers.
(d)(1)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this
section, in the case of all sections of subpart B other than
Sec. 575.104, as they apply to information submitted prior to new model
introduction, each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall submit to the
Administrator 2 copies of the information
[[Page 203]]
specified in subpart B of this part that is applicable to the vehicles
offered for sale, at least 90 days before information on such vehicles
is first provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to
paragraph (c) of this section.
(ii) Where an unforeseen preintroduction modification in vehicle
design or equipment results in a change in vehicle performance for a
characteristic included in subpart B of this part, a manufacturer of
motor vehicles may revise information previously furnished under
paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section by submission to the Administrator
of 2 copies of the revised information reflecting the performance
changes, at least 30 days before information on such vehicles is first
provided to prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this
section.
(2)(i) In the case of Sec. 575.104, each brand name owner of tires,
and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name owner
shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the information specified
in Subpart B of this part that is applicable to the tires offered for
sale, at least 30 days before it is first provided for examination by
prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.
(ii) In the case of all other sections of Subpart B of this Part as
they apply to post-introduction changes in information submitted for the
current model year, each manufacturer of motor vehicles, each brand name
owner of tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no
brand name owner shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the
information specified in Subpart B of this part that is applicable to
the vehicles or tires offered for sale, at least 30 days before it is
first provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to
paragraph (c) of this section.
[39 FR 1039, Jan. 4, 1974, as amended at 41 FR 13923, Apr. 1, 1976; 45
FR 47153, July 14, 1980; 47 FR 7258, Feb. 18, 1982; 52 FR 27810, July
24, 1987; 54 FR 48749, Nov. 27, 1989; 64 FR 27924, May 24, 1999; 67 FR
69631, Nov. 18, 2002; 69 FR 31320, June 3, 2004; 70 FR 35557, June 21,
2005]
Sec. 575.7 Special vehicles.
A manufacturer who produces vehicles having a configuration not
available for purchase by the general public need not make available to
ineligible purchasers, pursuant to Sec. 575.6(c), the information for
those vehicles specified in subpart B of this part, and shall identify
those vehicles when furnishing the information required by
Sec. 575.6(d).
[40 FR 11727, Mar. 13, 1975]
Subpart B_Regulations; Consumer Information Items
Secs. 575.101-575.102 [Reserved]
Sec. 575.103 Truck-camper loading.
(a) Scope. This section requires manufacturers of slide-in campers
to affix to each camper a label that contains information relating to
identification and proper loading of the camper and to provide more
detailed loading information in the owner's manual. This section also
requires manufacturers of trucks that would accommodate slide-in campers
to specify the cargo weight ratings and the longitudinal limits within
which the center of gravity for the cargo weight rating should be
located.
(b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to provide information
that can be used to reduce overloading and improper load placement in
truck-camper combinations and unsafe truck- camper matching in order to
prevent accidents resulting from the adverse effects of these conditions
on vehicle steering and braking.
(c) Application. This section applies to slide-in campers and to
trucks that are capable of accommodating slide- in campers.
(d) Definitions.
Camper means a structure designed to be mounted in the cargo area of
a truck, or attached to an incomplete vehicle with motive power, for the
purpose of providing shelter for persons.
Cargo Weight Rating means the value specified by the manufacturer as
the cargo-carrying capacity, in pounds or kilograms, of a vehicle,
exclusive of the weight of occupants in designated
[[Page 204]]
seating positions, computed as 68 kilograms or 150 pounds times the
number of designated seating positions.
Slide-in Camper means a camper having a roof, floor, and sides,
designed to be mounted on and removable from the cargo area of a truck
by the user.
(e) Requirements--(1) Slide-in Camper--(i) Labels. Each slide-in
camper shall have permanently affixed to it, in such a manner that it
cannot be removed without defacing or destroying it, and in a plainly
visible location on an exterior rear surface other than the roof, steps,
or bumper extension, a label containing the following information in the
English language lettered in block capitals and numerals not less than
2.4 millimeters (three thirty-seconds of an inch) high, of a color
contrasting with the background, in the order shown below and in the
form illustrated in Figure 1.
(A) Name of camper manufacturer. The full corporate or individual
name of the actual assembler of the camper shall be spelled out, except
that such abbreviations as ``Co.'' or ``Inc.'' and their foreign
equivalents, and the first and middle initials of individuals may be
used. The name of the manufacturer shall be preceded by the words
``Manufactured by'' or ``Mfd by.''
(B) Month and year of manufacture. It may be spelled out, such as
``June 1995'' or expressed in numerals, such as ``695.''
(C) The following statement completed as appropriate:
``Camper weight is ______ kg. (______ lbs.) maximum when it contains
standard equipment, ______ liters (______ gal.) of water, ______ kg.
(______ lbs.) of bottled gas, and ______ cubic meters (______ cubic ft.)
refrigerator (or icebox with ______ kg. (______ lbs.) of ice, as
applicable). Consult owner's manual (or data sheet, as applicable) for
weights of additional or optional equipment.''
(D) ``Liters (or gal.) of water'' refers to the volume of water
necessary to fill the camper's fresh water tanks to capacity. ``Kg. (or
lbs.) of bottled gas'' refers to the amount of gas necessary to fill the
camper's bottled gas tanks to capacity. The statement regarding a
``refrigerator'' or ``icebox'' refers to the capacity of the
refrigerator with which the vehicle is equipped or the weight of the ice
with which the icebox may be filled. Any of these items may be omitted
from the statement if the corresponding accessories are not included
with the camper, provided that the omission is noted in the camper
owner's manual as required in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section.
(ii) Owner's manual. Each slide-in camper manufacturer shall provide
with each camper a manual or other document containing the information
specified in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) (A) through (F) of this section.
(A) The statement and information provided on the label as specified
in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section. Instead of the information
required by paragraphs (e)(1)(i)(B) of this section, a manufacturer may
use the statements ``See camper identification label located (as
applicable) for month and year of manufacture.'' If water, bottled gas,
or refrigerator (icebox) has been omitted from this statement, the
manufacturer's information shall note such omission and advise that the
weight of any such item when added to the camper should be added to the
maximum camper weight figure used in selecting an appropriate truck.
(B) A list of other additional or optional equipment that the camper
is designed to carry, and the maximum weight of each if its weight is
more than 9 kg. (20 lbs) when installed.
(C) The statement: ``To estimate the total cargo load that will be
placed on a truck, add the weight of all passengers in the camper, the
weight of supplies, tools, and all other cargo, the weight of installed
additional or optional camper equipment, and the manufacturer's camper
weight figure. Select a truck that has a cargo weight rating that is
equal to or greater than the total cargo load of the camper and whose
manufacturer recommends a cargo center of gravity zone that will contain
the camper's center of gravity when it is installed.''
(D) The statements: ``When loading this camper, store heavy gear
first, keeping it on or close to the camper floor. Place heavy things
far enough forward to keep the loaded camper's
[[Page 205]]
center of gravity within the zone recommended by the truck manufacturer.
Store only light objects on high shelves. Distribute weight to obtain
even side-to-side balance of the loaded vehicle. Secure loose items to
prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle.
When the truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front
and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. The load on
an axle should not exceed its gross axle weight rating (GAWR). The total
of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). These weight ratings are given on the vehicle certification
label that is located on the left side of the vehicle, normally on the
dash panel, hinge pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the
driver on trucks manufactured on or after January 1, 1972. If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below
the ratings.''
(E) A picture showing the location of the longitudinal center of
gravity of the camper within an accuracy of 5 centimeters (2 inches)
under the loaded condition specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i)(D) of this
section in the manner illustrated in Figure 2.
(F) A picture showing the proper match of a truck and slide-in
camper in the form illustrated in Figure 3.
(2) Trucks. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this
section, each manufacturer of a truck that is capable of accommodating a
slide-in camper shall provide to the purchaser in the owner's manual or
other document delivered with the truck, in writing and in the English
language, the information specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) (A) through
(E) of this section.
(A) A picture showing the manufacturer's recommended longitudinal
center of gravity zone for the cargo weight rating in the form
illustrated in Figure 4. The boundaries of the zone shall be such that
when a slide-in camper equal in weight to the truck's cargo weight
rating is installed, no GAWR of the truck is exceeded.
(B) The truck's cargo weight rating.
(C) The statements: ``When the truck is used to carry a slide-in
camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer's
camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper
equipment not included in the manufacturer's camper weight figure, the
weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The
total cargo load should not exceed the truck's cargo weight rating and
the camper's center of gravity should fall within the truck's
recommended center of gravity zone when installed.''
(D) A picture showing the proper match of a truck and slide-in
camper in the form illustrated in Figure 3.
(E) The statements: ``Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is
loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not
exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the
axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is
located on the left side of the vehicle, normally the dash, hinge
pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the driver. If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below
the ratings.''
(ii) If a truck would accommodate a slide-in camper but the
manufacturer of the truck recommends that the truck not be used for that
purpose, the information specified in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this
section shall not be provided but instead the manufacturer shall provide
a statement that the truck should not be used to carry a slide-in
camper.
MFD. BY: (CAMPER MANUFACTURER'S NAME)
(MONTH AND YEAR OF MANUFACTURE)
CAMPER WEIGHT IS ______ KG (______ LB) MAXIMUM WHEN IT CONTAINS
STANDARD EQUIPMENT, ______ LITERS (______ GAL) OF WATER, ______ KG
(______ LB) OF BOTTLED GAS, AND ______ CUBIC METERS (______ CUBIC FT)
REFRIGERATOR (OR ICEBOX WITH ______ KG (______ LB) OF ICE, AS
APPLICABLE). CONSULT OWNER'S MANUAL (OR DATA SHEET AS APPLICABLE) FOR
WEIGHTS OF ADDITIONAL OR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.
[[Page 206]]
Figure 1. Label for Camper
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.181
[[Page 207]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.182
[[Page 208]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.183
[61 FR 36657, July 12, 1996, as amended at 70 FR 39970, July 12, 2005]
[[Page 209]]
Sec. 575.104 Uniform tire quality grading standards.
(a) Scope. This section requires motor vehicle and tire
manufacturers and tire brand name owners to provide information
indicating the relative performance of passenger car tires in the areas
of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
(b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to aid the consumer in
making an informed choice in the purchase of passenger car tires.
(c) Application. (1) This section applies to new pneumatic tires for
use on passenger cars. However, this section does not apply to deep
tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to limited
production tires as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(2) ``Limited production tire'' means a tire meeting all of the
following criteria, as applicable:
(i) The annual domestic production or importation into the United
States by the tire's manufacturer of tires of the same design and size
as the tire does not exceed 15,000 tires;
(ii) In the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the annual
domestic purchase or importation into the United States by a brand name
owner of tires of the same design and size as the tire does not exceed
15,000 tires;
(iii) The tire's size was not listed as a vehicle manufacturer's
recommended tire size designation for a new motor vehicle produced in or
imported into the United States in quantities greater than 10,000 during
the calendar year preceding the year of the tire's manufacture; and
(iv) The total annual domestic production or importation into the
United States by the tire's manufacturer, and in the case of a tire
marketed under a brand name, the total annual domestic purchase or
purchase for importation into the United States by the tire's brand name
owner, of tires meeting the criteria of paragraphs (c)(2) (i), (ii), and
(iii) of this section, does not exceed 35,000 tires.
Tire design is the combination of general structural characteristics,
materials, and tread pattern, but does include cosmetic, identifying or
other minor variations among tires.
(d) Requirements--(1) Information. (i) Each manufacturer of tires,
or in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, each brand name
owner, shall provide grading information for each tire of which he is
the manufacturer or brand name owner in the manner set forth in
paragraphs (d)(1)(i) (A) and (B) of this section. The grades for each
tire shall be only those specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
Each tire shall be able to achieve the level of performance represented
by each grade with which it is labeled. An individual tire need not,
however, meet further requirements after having been subjected to the
test for any one grade.
(A) Except for a tire of a new tire line, manufactured within the
first six months of production of the tire line, each tire shall be
graded with the words, letters, symbols, and figures specified in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section, permanently molded into or onto the
tire sidewall between the tire's maximum section width and shoulder in
accordance with one of the methods described in Figure 1. For purposes
of this paragraph, new tire line shall mean a group of tires differing
substantially in construction, materials, or design from those
previously sold by the manufacturer or brand name owner of the tires. As
used in this paragraph, the term ``construction'' refers to the internal
structure of the tire (e.g., cord angles, number and placement of
breakers), ``materials'' refers to the substances used in manufacture of
the tire (e.g., belt fiber, rubber compound), and ``design'' refers to
properties or conditions imposed by the tire mold (e.g., aspect ratio,
tread pattern).
(B) Each tire manufactured on and after the effective date of these
amendments, other than a tire sold as original equipment on a new
vehicle, shall have affixed to its tread surface so as not to be easily
removable a label or labels containing its grades and other information
in the form illustrated in Figure 2, Parts I and II. The treadwear grade
attributed to the tire shall be either imprinted or indelibly stamped on
the label containing the material in Part I of Figure 2, directly to the
right of or below the word ``TREADWEAR.''
[[Page 210]]
The traction grade attributed to the tire shall be indelibly circled in
an array of the potential grade letters AA, A, B, or C, directly to the
right of or below the word ``TRACTION'' in Part I of Figure 2. The
temperature resistance grade attributed to the tire shall be indelibly
circled in an array of the potential grade letters A, B, or C, directly
to the right of or below the word ``TEMPERATURE'' in Part I of Figure 2.
The words ``TREADWEAR,'' ``TRACTION,'' AND ``TEMPERATURE,'' in that
order, may be laid out vertically or horizontally. The text of Part II
of Figure 2 may be printed in capital letters. The text of Part I and
the text of Part II of Figure 2 need not appear on the same label, but
the edges of the two texts must be positioned on the tire tread so as to
be separated by a distance of no more than one inch. If the text of Part
I and the text of Part II of Figure 2 are placed on separate labels, the
notation ``See EXPLANATION OF DOT QUALITY GRADES'' shall be added to the
bottom of the Part I text, and the words ``EXPLANATION OF DOT QUALITY
GRADES'' shall appear at the top of the Part II text. The text of Figure
2 shall be oriented on the tire tread surface with lines of type running
perpendicular to the tread circumference. If a label bearing a tire size
designation is attached to the tire tread surface and the tire size
designation is oriented with lines type running perpendicular to the
tread circumference, the text of Figure 2 shall read in the same
direction as the tire size designation.
(ii) In the case of the information required by Sec. 575.6(c) to be
furnished to prospective purchasers of tires, each tire manufacturer or
brand name owner shall, as part of that information, list all possible
grades for traction and temperature resistance, and restate verbatim the
explanation for each performance area specified in Figure 2. The
information need not be in the same format as in Figure 2. The
information must indicate clearly and unambiguously the grade in each
performance area for each tire of that manufacturer or brand name owner
offered for sale at the particular location.
(iii) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles equipped with passenger
car tires shall include in the owner's manual of each such vehicle a
list of all possible grades for traction and temperature resistance and
restate verbatim the explanation for each performance area specified in
Figure 2, Part II. The information need not be in the exact format of
Figure 2, Part II, but it must contain a statement referring the reader
to the tire sidewall for the specific tire grades for the tires with
which the vehicle is equipped, as follows:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
(iv) In the case of information required in accordance with
Sec. 575.6(a) to be furnished to the first purchaser of a new motor
vehicle, each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall, as part of the
required information, list all possible grades for traction and
temperature resistance and restate verbatim the explanation for each
performance area specified in Figure 2 to this section. The information
need not be in the format of Figure 2 to this section, but it must
contain a statement referring the reader to the tire sidewall for the
specific tire grades for the tires with which the vehicle is equipped.
(2) Performance--(i) Treadwear. Each tire shall be graded for
treadwear performance with the word ``TREADWEAR'' followed by a number
of two or three digits representing the tire's grade for treadwear,
expressed as a percentage of the NHTSA nominal treadwear value, when
tested in accordance with the conditions and procedures specified in
paragraph (e) of this section. Treadwear grades shall be expressed in
multiples of 20 (for example, 80, 120, 160).
(ii) Traction. Each tire shall be graded for traction performance
with the word ``TRACTION,'' followed by the symbols AA, A, B, or C, when
the tire is tested in accordance with the conditions and
[[Page 211]]
procedures specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
(A) The tire shall be graded C when the adjusted traction
coefficient is either:
(1) 0.38 or less when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of
this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of
this section, or
(2) 0.26 or less when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of
this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of
this section.
(B) The tire may be graded B only when its adjusted traction
coefficient is both:
(1) More than 0.38 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)
of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i)
of this section, and
(2) More than 0.26 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)
of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i)
of this section.
(C) The tire may be graded A only when its adjusted traction
coefficient is both:
(1) More than 0.47 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)
of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i)
of this section, and
(2) More than 0.35 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)
of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i)
of this section.
(D) The tire may be graded AA only when its adjusted traction
coefficient is both:
(1) More than 0.54m when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)
of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i)
of this section; and
(2) More than 0.38m when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)
of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i)
of this section.
(iii) Temperature resistance. Each tire shall be graded for
temperature resistance performance with the word ``TEMPERATURE''
followed by the letter A, B, or C, based on its performance when the
tire is tested in accordance with the procedures specified in paragraph
(g) of this section. A tire shall be considered to have successfully
completed a test stage in accordance with this paragraph if, at the end
of the test stage, it exhibits no visual evidence of tread, sidewall,
ply, cord, innerliner, or bead separation, chunking, broken cords,
cracking or open splices as defined in Sec. 571.109 of this chapter, and
the tire pressure is not less than the pressure specified in paragraph
(g)(1) of this section.
(A) The tire shall be graded C if it fails to complete the 500 rpm
test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.
(B) The tire may be graded B only if it successfully completes the
500 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.
(C) The tire may be graded A only if it successfully completes the
575 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.
(e) Treadwear grading conditions and procedures--(1) Conditions. (i)
Tire treadwear performance is evaluated on a specific roadway course
approximately 400 miles in length, which is established by the NHTSA
both for its own compliance testing and for that of regulated persons.
The course is designed to produce treadwear rates that are generally
representative of those encountered by tires in public use. The course
and driving procedures are described in appendix A of this section.
(ii) Treadwear grades are evaluated by first measuring the
performance of a candidate tire on the government test course, and then
correcting the projected mileages obtained to account for environmental
variations on the basis of the performance of the course monitoring
tires run in the same convoy.
(iii) In convoy tests, each vehicle in the same convoy, except for
the lead vehicle, is throughout the test within human eye range of the
vehicle immediately ahead of it.
(iv) A test convoy consists of two or four passenger cars, light
trucks, or MPVs, each with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less.
(v) On each convoy vehicle, all tires are mounted on identical rims
of design or measuring rim width specified for tires of that size in
accordance with
[[Page 212]]
49 CFR 571.109, S4.4.1 (a) or (b), or a rim having a width within ^0 to
+ 0.50 inches of the width listed.
(2) Treadwear grading procedure. (i) Equip a convoy as follows:
Place four course monitoring tires on one vehicle. Place four candidate
tires with identical size designations on each other vehicle in the
convoy. On each axle, place tires that are identical with respect to
manufacturer and line.
(ii) Inflate each candidate and each course monitoring tire to the
applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.
(iii) Load each vehicle so that the load on each course monitoring
and candidate tire is 85 percent of the test load specified in
Sec. 575.104(h).
(iv) Adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the vehicle
manufacturer's specifications, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not
recommended by the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment to
the manufacturer's recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is
within the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment
machine.
(v) Subject candidate and course monitoring tires to ``break-in'' by
running the tires in the convoy for two circuits of the test roadway
(800 miles). At the end of the first circuit, rotate each vehicle's
tires by moving each front tire to the same side of the rear axle and
each rear tire to the opposite side of the front axle. Visually inspect
each tire for any indication of abnormal wear, tread separation, bulging
of the sidewall, or any sign of tire failure. Void the grading results
from any tire with any of these anomalies, and replace the tire.
(vi) After break-in, allow the air pressure in the tires to fall to
the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section or for 2
hours, whichever occurs first. Measure, to the nearest 0.001 inch, the
tread depth of each candidate and each course monitoring tire, avoiding
treadwear indicators, at six equally spaced points in each groove. For
each tire compute the average of the measurements. Do not measure those
shoulder grooves which are not provided with treadwear indicators.
(vii) Adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the manufacturer's
specifications, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by
the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment according to the
manufacturer's recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is within
the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment machine.
(viii) Drive the convoy on the test roadway for 6,400 miles.
(A) After each 400 miles, rotate each vehicle's tires by moving each
front tire to the same side of the rear axle and each rear tire to the
opposite side of the front axle. Visually inspect each tire for
treadwear anomalies.
(B) After each 800 miles, rotate the vehicles in the convoy by
moving the last vehicle to the lead position. Do not rotate driver
positions within the convoy. In four-car convoys, vehicle one shall
become vehicle two, vehicle two shall become vehicle three, vehicle
three shall become vehicle four, and vehicle four shall become vehicle
one.
(C) After each 800 miles, if necessary, adjust wheel alignment to
the midpoint of the vehicle manufacturer's specification, unless
adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by the manufacturer; in
that case, adjust the alignment to the manufacturer's recommended
setting. In all cases, the setting is within the tolerance specified by
the manufacturer of the alignment machine.
(D) After each 800 miles, if determining the projected mileage by
the 9-point method set forth in (e)(2)(ix)(A)(1), measure the average
tread depth of each tire following the procedure set forth in paragraph
(e)(2)(vi) of this section.
(E) After each 1,600 miles, move the complete set of four tires to
the following vehicle. Move the tires on the last vehicle to the lead
vehicle. In moving the tires, rotate them as set forth in
(e)(2)(viii)(A) of this section.
(F) At the end of the test, measure the tread depth of each tire
pursuant to the procedure set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(vi) of this
section.
(ix)(A) Determine the projected mileage for each candidate tire
either by the nine-point method of least squares set forth in paragraph
(e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section and appendix C to this section, or by
the two-point arithmetical
[[Page 213]]
method set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A)(2) of this section. Notify
NHTSA about which of the alternative grading methods is being used.
(1) Nine-Point Method of Least Squares. For each course monitoring
and candidate tire in the convoy, using the average tread depth
measurements obtained in accordance with paragraphs (e)(2)(vi) and
(e)(2)(viii)(D) of this section and the corresponding mileages as data
points, apply the method of least squares as described in appendix C to
this section to determine the estimated regression line of y on x given
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.184
Where:
y = average tread depth in mils
x = miles after break-in,
a = y intercept of regression line (reference tread depth) in mils,
calculated using the method of least squares; and
b = the slope of the regression line in mils of tread depth per 1,000
miles, calculated using the method of least squares. This
slope will be negative in value. The tire's wear rate is
defined as the absolute value of the slope of the regression
line.
(2) Two-Point Arithmetical Method. For each course monitoring and
candidate tire in the convoy, using the average tread depth measurements
obtained in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(vi) and (e)(2)(viii)(F) of
this section and the corresponding mileages as data points, determine
the slope (m) of the tire's wear in mils of tread depth per 1,000 miles
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.185
Where:
Yo = average tread depth after break-in, mils
Y1 = average tread depth at 6,400 miles, mils
Xo = 0 miles (after break-in).
X1 = 6,400 miles of travel
This slope (m) will be negative in value. The tire's wear rate is
defined as the slope (m) expressed in mils per 1,000 miles.
(B) Average the wear rates of the four course monitoring tires as
determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A) of this section.
(C) Determine the course severity adjustment factor by dividing the
base course wear rate for the course monitoring tires (see Note to this
paragraph) by the average wear rate for the four course monitoring
tires.
Note to paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(C): The base wear rate for the course
monitoring tires will be obtained by the government by running the tire
specified in ASTM E 1136 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3)
course monitoring tires for 6,400 miles over the San Angelo, Texas,
UTQGS test route 4 times per year, then using the average wear rate from
the last 4 quarterly CMT tests for the base course wear rate
calculation. Each new base course wear rate will be published in the
Federal Register. The course monitoring tires used in a test convoy must
be no more than one year old at the commencement of the test and must be
used within two months after removal from storage.
(D) Determine the adjusted wear rate for each candidate tire by
multiplying its wear rate determined in accordance with paragraph
(e)(2)(ix)(A) of this section by the course severity adjustment factor
determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(C) of this section.
(E) Determine the projected mileage for each candidate tire by
applying the appropriate formula set forth below:
(1) If the projected mileage is calculated pursuant to paragraph
(e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section, then:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.186
Where:
a = y intercept of regression line (reference tread depth) for the
candidate tire as determined in accordance with paragraph
(e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section.
b\1\ = the adjusted wear rate for the candidate tire as determined in
accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(D) of this section.
(2) If the projected mileage is calculated pursuant to
(e)(2)(ix)(a)(2) of this section, then:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07SE99.000
Where:
Yo = average tread depth after break-in, mils
mc = the adjusted wear rate for the candidate tires as determined in
accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(D) of this section.
(F) Compute the grade (P) of the NHTSA nominal treadwear value for
[[Page 214]]
each candidate tire by using the following formula:
P = Projected mileage x base course wear raten/402
Where base course wear raten = new base course wear rate,
i.e., average treadwear of the last 4 quarterly course monitoring tire
tests conducted by NHTSA.
Round off the percentage to the nearest lower 20-point increment.
(f) Traction grading conditions and procedures--(1) Conditions. (i)
Tire traction performance is evaluated on skid pads that are
established, and whose severity is monitored, by the NHTSA both for its
compliance testing and for that of regulated persons. The test pavements
are asphalt and concrete surfaces constructed in accordance with the
specifications for pads ``C'' and ``A'' in the ``Manual for the
Construction and Maintenance of Skid Surfaces,'' National Technical
Information Service No. DOT-HS-800-814. The surfaces have locked wheel
traction coefficients when evaluated in accordance with paragraphs
(f)(2)(i) through (f)(2)(vii) of this section of 0.50 0.10 for the
asphalt and 0.35 0.10 for the concrete. The location of the skid pads
is described in appendix B to this section.
(ii) The standard tire is the tire specified in ASTM E 501
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3).
(iii) The pavement surface is wetted in accordance with paragraph
4.7, ``Pavement Wetting System,'' of ASTM E 274 (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 575.3).
(iv) The test apparatus is a test trailer built in conformity with
the specifications in paragraph 4, ``Apparatus,'' of ASTM E 274
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3). The test apparatus is
instrumented in accordance with paragraph 4.5 of that method, except
that the ``wheel load'' in paragraph 4.3 and tire and rim specifications
in paragraph 4.4 of that method are as specified in the procedures in
paragraph (f)(2) of this section for standard and candidate tires.
(v) The test apparatus is calibrated in accordance with ASTM F 377
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3), with the trailer's tires
inflated to 24 psi and loaded to 1,085 pounds.
(vi) Consecutive tests on the same surface are conducted not less
than 30 seconds apart.
(vii) A standard tire is discarded in accordance with ASTM E 501
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3).
(2) Procedure. (i) Prepare two standard tires as follows:
(A) Condition the tires by running them for 200 miles on a pavement
surface.
(B) Mount each tire on a rim of design or measuring rim width
specified for tires of its size in accordance with 49 CFR 571.109,
S4.4.1 (a) or (b), or a rim having a width within ^0 to + 0.50 inches of
the width listed. Then inflate the tire to 24 psi, or, in the case of a
tire with inflation pressure measured in kilopascals, to 180 kPa.
(C) Statically balance each tire-rim combination.
(D) Allow each tire to cool to ambient temperature and readjust its
inflation pressure to 24 psi, or, in the case of a tire with inflation
pressure measured in kilopascals, to 180 kPa.
(ii) Mount the tires on the test apparatus described in paragraph
(f)(1)(iv) of this section and load each tire to 1,085 pounds.
(iii) Tow the trailer on the asphalt test surface specified in
paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section at a speed of 40 mph, lock one
trailer wheel, and record the locked-wheel traction coefficient on the
tire associated with that wheel between 0.5 and 1.5 seconds after
lockup.
(iv) Repeat the test on the concrete surface, locking the same
wheel.
(v) Repeat the tests specified in paragraphs (f)(2) (iii) and (iv)
of this section for a total of 10 measurements on each test surface.
(vi) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(2) (iii)
through (v) of this section, locking the wheel associated with the other
tire.
(vii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to
find the standard tire traction coefficient for the asphalt surface.
Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the
standard tire traction coefficient for the concrete surface. The
standard tire traction coefficient so determined may be used in the
[[Page 215]]
computation of adjusted traction coefficients for more than one
candidate tire.
(viii) Prepare two candidate tires of the same construction type,
manufacturer, line, and size designation in accordance with paragraph
(f)(2)(i) of this section, mount them on the test apparatus, and test
one of them according to the procedures of paragraph (f)(2)(ii) through
(v) of this section, except load each tire to 85% of the test load
specified in Sec. 575.104(h). For CT tires, the test inflation of
candidate tires shall be 230 kPa. Candidate tire measurements may be
taken either before or after the standard tire measurements used to
compute the standard tire traction coefficient. Take all standard tire
and candidate tire measurements used in computation of a candidate
tire's adjusted traction coefficient within a single three hour period.
Average the 10 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the
candidate tire traction coefficient for the asphalt surface. Average the
10 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the candidate tire
traction coefficient for the concrete surface.
(ix) Compute a candidate tire's adjusted traction coefficient for
asphalt (ma) by the following formula:
(ma) = Measured candidate tire coefficient for asphalt + 0.50
^ Measured standard tire coefficient for asphalt
(x) Compute a candidate tire's adjusted traction coefficient for
concrete (mc) by the following formula:
mc = Measured candidate tire coefficient for concrete + 0.35m
Measured standard tire coefficient for concrete
(g) Temperature resistance grading. (1) Mount the tire on a rim of
design or measuring rim width specified for tires of its size in
accordance with Sec. 571.109, paragraph S4.4.1 (a) or (b) and inflate it
to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.
(2) Condition the tire-rim assembly to a temperature of 95 F for at
least 3 hours.
(3) Adjust the pressure again to the applicable pressure specified
in Table 1 of this section.
(4) Mount the tire-rim assembly on an axle, and press the tire tread
against the surface of a flat-faced steel test wheel that is 67.23
inches in diameter and at least as wide as the section width of the
tire.
(5) During the test, including the pressure measurements specified
in paragraphs (g) (1) and (3) of this section, maintain the temperature
of the ambient air, as measured 12 inches from the edge of the rim
flange at any point on the circumference on either side of the tire at
95 F. Locate the temperature sensor so that its readings are not
affected by heat radiation, drafts, variations in the temperature of the
surrounding air, or guards or other devices.
(6) Press the tire against the test wheel with a load of 88 percent
of the tire's maximum load rating as marked on the tire sidewall.
(7) Rotate the test wheel at 250 rpm for 2 hours.
(8) Remove the load, allow the tire to cool to 95 F or for 2 hours,
whichever occurs last, and readjust the inflation pressure to the
applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.
(9) Reapply the load and without interruption or readjustment of
inflation pressure, rotate the test wheel at 375 rpm for 30 minutes, and
then at successively higher rates in 25 rpm increments, each for 30
minutes, until the tire has run at 575 rpm for 30 minutes, or to
failure, whichever occurs first.
Table I--Test Inflation Pressures
[Maximum permissible inflation pressure for the following test]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tires other than CT tires CT tires
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test type psi kPa kPa
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
32 36 40 60 240 280 300 340 350 290 330 350 390
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Treadwear test............................................... 24 28 32 52 180 220 180 220 180 230 270 230 270
Temperature resistant test................................... 30 34 38 58 220 260 220 260 220 270 310 270 310
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 216]]
(h) Determination of test load. (1) To determine test loads for
purposes of paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) and (f)(2)(viii), follow the
procedure set forth in paragraphs (h) (2) through (5) of this section.
(2) Determine the tire's maximum inflation pressure and maximum load
rating both as specified on the tire's sidewall.
(3) Determine the appropriate multiplier corresponding to the tire's
maximum inflation pressure, as set forth in Table 2.
(4) Multiply the tire's maximum load rating by the multiplier
determined in paragraph (h)(3). This is the tire's calculated load.
(5) Round the product determined in paragraph (h)(4) (the calculated
load) to the nearest multiple of ten pounds or, if metric units are
used, 5 kilograms. For example, 903 pounds would be rounded to 900 and
533 kilograms would be rounded to 535. This figure is the test load.
Table 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Multiplier Multiplier
to be used to be used
Maximum inflation pressure for for
treadwear traction
testing testing
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tires other than CT tires
------------------------------------------------------------------------
32 psi.......................................... .851 .851
36 psi.......................................... .870 .797
40 psi.......................................... .883 .753
240 kPa......................................... .866 .866
280 kPa......................................... .887 .804
300 kPa......................................... .866 .866
340 kPa......................................... .887 .804
350 kPa......................................... .866 .866
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CT tires
------------------------------------------------------------------------
290 kPa......................................... .866 .866
330 kPa......................................... .887 .804
305 kPa......................................... .866 .866
390 kPa......................................... .887 .804
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 2A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temp resistance Treadwear
--------------------------- --------------------------
Tire size designation Max pressure Traction Max pressure
--------------------------- --------------------------
32 36 40 32 36 40
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
145/70 R13...................................... 615 650 685 523 523 553 582
155/70 R13...................................... 705 740 780 599 599 629 663
165/70 R13...................................... 795 835 880 676 676 710 748
175/70 R13...................................... 890 935 980 757 757 795 833
185/70 R13...................................... 990 1040 1090 842 842 884 926
195/70 R13...................................... 1100 1155 1210 935 935 982 1029
155/70 R14...................................... 740 780 815 629 629 663 693
175/70 R14...................................... 925 975 1025 786 786 829 871
185/70 R14...................................... 1045 1100 1155 888 888 935 982
195/70 R14...................................... 1155 1220 1280 982 982 1037 1088
155/70 R15...................................... 770 810 850 655 655 689 723
175/70 R15...................................... 990 1040 1090 842 842 884 927
185/70 R15...................................... 1100 1155 1210 935 935 982 1029
5.60-13......................................... 725 810 880 616 616 689 748
5.20-14......................................... 695 785 855 591 591 667 727
165-15.......................................... 915 1,015 1,105 779 779 863 939
185/60 R 13..................................... 845 915 980 719 719 778 833
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)-(l) [Reserved]
[[Page 217]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.196
Figure 2--[Part I]--DOT QUALITY GRADES
TREADWEAR
TRACTION AA A B C
TEMPERATURE A B C
[[Page 218]]
(Part II) All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1\1/2\) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Appendix A--Treadwear Test Course and Driving Procedures
Introduction. The test course consists of three loops of a total of
400 miles in the geographical vicinity of Goodfellow AFB, San Angelo,
Tex.
The first loop runs south 143 miles through the cities of Eldorado,
Sonora, and Juno, Tex. to the Camp Hudson Historical Marker, and returns
by the same route.
The second loop runs east over Farm and Ranch Roads (FM) and returns
to its starting point.
The third loop runs northwest to Water Valley, northeast toward
Robert Lee and returns via Texas 208 to the vicinity of Goodfellow AFB.
Route. The route is shown in Figure 3. The table identifies key
points by number. These numbers are encircled in Figure 3 and in
parentheses in the descriptive material that follows.
Southern Loop. The course begins at the intersection (1) of Ft.
McKavitt Road and Paint Rock Road (FM388) at the northwest corner of
Goodfellow AFB. Drive east via FM 388 to junction with Loop Road 306
(2). Turn right onto Loop Road 306 and proceed south to junction with
US277 (3). Turn onto US277 and proceed south through Eldorado and Sonora
(4), continuing on US277 to junction with FM189 (5). Turn right onto
FM189 and proceed to junction with Texas 163 (6). Turn left onto Texas
163, and at the option of the manufacturer:
(A) Proceed south to Camp Hudson Historical Marker and onto the
paved shoulder (7). Reverse route to junction of Loop Road 306 and FM
388 (2); or
(B) Proceed south to junction with Frank's Crossing. Reverse route
at Frank's Crossing and proceed north on Texas 163 to junction with
Highway 189; Reverse route at junction with Highway 189; proceed south
on Texas 163 to junction with Frank's Crossing; reverse route at Frank's
Crossing and proceed north to junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2).
Eastern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM388 (2), make
right turn onto FM388 and drive east to junction with FM2334 (13). Turn
right onto FM2334 and proceed south across FM765 (14) to junction of
FM2334 and US87 (15). For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, make
U-turn and return to junction of FM388 and Loop Road 306 (2) by the same
route. For convoys that do not originate at Goodfellow AFB, upon
reaching junction of FM2334 and US87 (15), make U-Turn and continue
north on FM2334 past the intersection with FM388 to Veribest Cotton Gin,
a distance of 1.8 miles beyond the intersection. Make U-turn and return
to junction of FM2334 and FM388. Turn right onto FM388, proceed west to
junction FM388 and Loop Road 306.
Northwestern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM388 (2),
make right turn onto Loop Road 306. Proceed onto US277, to junction with
FM2105 (8). Turn left onto FM2105 and proceed west to junction with US87
(10). Turn right on US87 and proceed northwest to the junction with
FM2034 near the town of Water Valley (11). Turn right onto FM2034 and
proceed north to Texas 208 (12). Turn right onto Texas 208 and proceed
south to junction with FM2105 (9). Turn left onto FM2105 and proceed
east to junction with
[[Page 219]]
US277 (8). Turn right onto US277 and proceed south onto Loop Road 306 to
junction with FM388 (2). For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB,
turn right onto FM388 and proceed to starting point at junction of Ft.
McKavitt Road and FM388 (1). For convoys that do not originate at
Goodfellow AFB, do not turn right onto FM388 but continue south on Loop
Road 306.
Alternate Route When FM 189 and Texas 163 are Closed. This alternate
test course route consists of a Modified Southern Loop, the Eastern Loop
and Northwestern Loop described above, and a Modified Northwestern Loop.
Modified Southern Loop. The course begins at the intersection (1) of
Ft. McKavitt Road and Paint Rock Road (FM 388) at the northwest corner
of Goodfellow AFB. Drive east via FM 388 to junction with Loop Road 306
(2). Turn right onto Loop Road 306 and proceed south to junction with US
277 (3). Turn onto US 277 and proceed south through Eldorado and Sonora
(4), continuing on US 277 approximately 5.5 miles (from traffic light at
separation of US 277 and Loop 467) to picnic area on right. Reverse
route at this location and proceed north to junction of Loop 306 and FM
388 (2).
Eastern Loop and Northwestern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306
and FM 388 (2), complete the Eastern Loop, the Northwestern Loop, and
then, from junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2), repeat the Eastern
Loop.
Modified Northwestern Loop. Proceed north on Northwestern Loop as
normal until reaching the intersection of FM 2105 and Texas 208 and turn
right onto Texas 208. Proceed on Texas 208 until the intersection with
FM 2034. Turn left onto FM 2034 and continue on FM 2034 to the
intersection with US 87. Turn left onto US 87. At the intersection of US
87 and FM 2105 turn left onto FM 2105 and proceed to the intersection
with US 277. Turn right onto US 277 and proceed to the intersection of
Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2).
Repeat Eastern Loop. Turn left onto FM 388 and repeat the Eastern
Loop. For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, continue on FM 388
and proceed to starting point at junction of Ft. McKavitt Road and FM
388 (1). For convoys that do not originate at Goodfellow AFB, turn left
onto Loop Road 306.
Driving instructions. The drivers shall run at posted speed limits
throughout the course unless an unsafe condition arises. If such
condition arises, the speed should be reduced to the maximum safe
operating speed.
Braking Procedures at STOP signs. There are a number of
intersections at which stops are required. At each of these
intersections a series of signs is placed in a fixed order at follows:
Sign Legend
Highway Intersection 1000 (or 2000) Feet
STOP AHEAD
Junction XXX
Direction Sign (Mereta)
STOP or YIELD
Procedures. 1. Approach each intersection at posted speed limit.
2. When abreast of the STOP AHEAD sign, apply the brakes so that the
vehicle decelerates smoothly to 20 mph when abreast of the direction
sign.
3. Come to a complete stop at the STOP sign or behind any vehicle
already stopped.
[[Page 220]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.190
[[Page 221]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.191
Appendix B--Traction Skid Pads
Two skid pads have been laid on an unused runway and taxi strip on
Goodfellow AFB. Their location is shown in Figure 4.
The asphalt skid pad is 600 ft. x 60 ft. and is shown in black on
the runway in Figure 4. The pad is approached from either end by a
[[Page 222]]
75 ft. ramp followed by 100 ft. of level pavement. This arrangement
permits the skid trailers to stabilize before reaching the test area.
The approaches are shown on the figure by the hash-marked area.
The concrete pad is 600 ft. x 48 ft. and is on the taxi strip. The
approaches to the concrete pad are of the same design as those for the
asphalt pads.
A two lane asphalt road has been built to connect the runway and
taxi strip. The road is parallel to the northeast-southwest runway at a
distance of 100 ft. The curves have super-elevation to permit safe exit
from the runway at operating speeds.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.192
Appendix C--Method of Least Squares
The method of least squares is a method of calculation by which it
is possible to obtain a reliable estimate of a true physical
relationship from a set of data which involve random error. The method
may be used to establish a regression line that minimizes the sum of the
squares of the deviations of the measured data points from the line. The
regression line is consequently described as the line of ``best fit'' to
the data points. It is described in terms of its slope and its ``y''
intercept.
The graph in Figure 5 depicts a regression line calculated using the
least squares method from data collected from a hypothetical treadwear
test of 6,400 miles, with tread depth measurements made at every 500
miles.
[[Page 223]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.193
In this graph, xj,yj (j = 0, 1,..;. 8) are
the individual data points representing the tread depth measurements
(the overall average for the tire with 6 measurements in each tire
groove) at the beginning of the test (after break-in) and at the end of
each 800-mile segment of the test.
The absolute value of the slope of the regression line is an
expression of the mils of tread worn per 1,000 miles, and is calculated
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.194
The ``y'' intercept of the regression line (a) in mils is calculated
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01AU91.195
Appendix D--User Fees
1. Use of Government Traction Skid Pads: A fee of $125 will be
assessed for each hour, or fraction thereof, that the traction skid pads
at Goodfellow Air Force Base, San Angelo, Texas are used. This fee is
based upon the market price of the use of the traction skid pads.
2. Fee payments shall be by check, draft, money order, or Electronic
Funds Transfer System made payable to the Treasurer of the United
States.
3. The fee set forth in this Appendix continues in effect until
adjusted by the Administrator of NHTSA. The Administrator reviews the
fee set forth in this Appendix and, if appropriate, adjusts it by rule
at least every 2 years.
[43 FR 30549, July 17, 1978]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting
Sec. 575.104, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.fdsys.gov.
[[Page 224]]
Sec. 575.105 Vehicle rollover.
(a) Purpose and scope. This section requires manufacturers of
utility vehicles to alert the drivers of those vehicles that they have a
higher possibility of rollover than other vehicle types and to advise
them of steps that can be taken to reduce the possibility of rollover
and/or to reduce the likelihood of injury in a rollover.
(b) Application. This section applies to utility vehicles.
(c) Definitions.
Utility vehicles means multipurpose passenger vehicles (other than
those which are passenger car derivatives) which have a wheelbase of 110
inches or less and special features for occasional off-road operation.
(d) Required information--(1) Rollover Warning Label. (i) Except as
provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, each vehicle must have a
label permanently affixed to either side of the sun visor, at the
manufacturer's option, at the driver's seating position. The label must
conform in content, form and sequence to the label shown in Figure 1 of
this section, and must comply with the following requirements:
(A) The heading area must be yellow, with the text and the alert
symbol in black.
(B) The message area must be white with black text.
(C) The pictograms must be black with a white background.
(D) The label must be appropriately sized so that it is legible,
visible and prominent to the driver.
(ii) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 1999 and before
September 1, 2000. When the rollover warning label required by paragraph
(d)(1)(i) of this section and the air bag warning label required by
paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR 571.208 are affixed to the same side of
the driver side sun visor, either:
(A) The rollover warning label must be affixed to the right (as
viewed from the driver's seat) of the air bag warning label and the
labels may not be contiguous; or
(B) The pictogram of the air bag warning label must be separated
from the pictograms of the rollover warning label by text, and
(1) The labels must be located such that the shortest distance from
any of the lettering or graphics on the rollover warning label to any of
the lettering or graphics on the air bag warning label is not less than
3 cm, or
(2) If the rollover warning and air bag warning labels are each
completely surrounded by a continuous solid-lined border, the shortest
distance from the border of the rollover warning label to the border of
the air bag warning label is not less than 1 cm.
(iii) The manufacturer must select the option to which a vehicle is
certified by the time the manufacturer certifies the vehicle and may not
thereafter select a different option for that vehicle. If a manufacturer
chooses to certify compliance with more than one compliance option, the
vehicle must satisfy the requirements applicable to each of the options
selected.
(iv) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 2000. When the
rollover warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section
and the air bag warning label required by paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR
571.208 are affixed to the same side of the driver side sun visor the
pictogram of the air bag warning label must be separated from the
pictograms of the rollover warning label by text and:
(A) The labels must be located such that the shortest distance from
any of the lettering or graphics on the rollover warning label to any of
the lettering or graphics on the air bag warning label is not less than
3 cm, or
(B) If the rollover warning and air bag warning labels are each
completely surrounded by a continuous solid-lined border, the shortest
distance from the border of the rollover warning label to the border of
the air bag warning label must be not less than 1 cm.
(2) Alternate location for warning label. As an alternative to
affixing the warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this
section to the driver's sun visor, a manufacturer may permanently affix
the label to the lower rear corner of the forwardmost driver's side
window. The label must be legible, visible and prominent to a person
next to the exterior of the driver's door.
(3) Rollover Alert Label. If the label required by paragraph (d)(1)
of this section and affixed to the driver side sun visor is not visible
when the sun visor
[[Page 225]]
is in the stowed position, an alert label must be permanently affixed to
that visor so that the label is visible when the visor is in that
position. The alert label must comply with the following requirements:
(i) The label must read:
ROLLOVER WARNING
Flip Visor Over
(ii) The label must be black with yellow text.
(iii) The label must be no less than 20 square cm.
(4) Owner's Manual. The owner's manual must include the following
statements and discussions:
(i) The statement ``Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.''
(ii) A discussion of the vehicle design features which cause this
type of vehicles to be more likely to rollover (e.g., higher center of
gravity);
(iii) A discussion of the driving practices that can reduce the risk
of a rollover (e.g., avoiding sharp turns at excessive speed); and
(iv) The statement: ``In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.''
(5) Combined Rollover and Air Bag Alert Warning. If the warnings
required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section and paragraph S4.5.1(b) of
49 CFR 571.208 to be affixed to the driver side sun visor are not
visible when the sun visor is in the stowed position, a combined
rollover and air bag alert label may be permanently affixed to that
visor in lieu of the alert labels required by paragraph (d)(3) of this
section and paragraph S4.5.1(c)(2) of 49 CFR 571.208. The combined
rollover and air bag alert label must be visible when the visor is in
the stowed position. The combined rollover and air bag alert warning
must conform in content to the label shown in Figure 2 of this section,
and must comply with the following requirements:
(i) The label must read:
AIR BAG AND ROLLOVER WARNINGS
Flip Visor Over
(ii) The message area must be black with yellow text. The message
area must be no less than 20 square cm.
(iii) The pictogram shall be black with a red circle and slash on a
white background. The pictogram must be not less than 20 mm in diameter.
(6) At the option of the manufacturer, the requirements in paragraph
(d)(1)(i) for labels that are permanently affixed to specified parts of
the vehicle may instead be met by permanent marking and molding of the
required information.
[[Page 226]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09MR99.056
[[Page 227]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU99.020
[64 FR 11733, Mar. 9, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 47123, Aug. 30, 1999]
Sec. 575.106 Tire fuel efficiency consumer information program.
(a) Scope. This section requires tire manufacturers, tire brand name
owners, and tire retailers to provide information indicating the
relative performance of replacement passenger car tires in the areas of
fuel efficiency, safety, and durability.
(b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to aid consumers in
making better educated choices in the purchase of passenger car tires.
(c) Application. This section applies to replacement passenger car
tires. However, this section does not apply to light truck tires, deep
tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to limited
production tires as defined in Sec. 575.104(c)(2). Tire manufacturers
may comply with the requirements in this Sec. 575.106 as an alternative
to complying with the requirements in Sec. 575.104(d)(1)(i)(A) and (B).
(d) Definitions. (1) All terms used in this section that are defined
in Section 32101 of Title 49, United States Code, are used as defined
therein.
(2) As used in this section:
Brand name owner means a person, other than a tire manufacturer, who
owns or has the right to control the brand name of a tire or a person
who licenses another to purchase tires from a tire manufacturer bearing
the licensor's brand name.
CT means a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim
[[Page 228]]
flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the
underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside
the air cavity of the tire.
Dealer means a person selling and distributing new motor vehicles or
motor vehicle equipment primarily to purchasers that in good faith
purchase the vehicle or equipment other than for resale.
Distributor means a person primarily selling and distributing motor
vehicles or motor vehicle equipment for resale.
Lab alignment tires or LATs means the reference tires which the
reference lab will test to be used to align other rolling resistance
machines with the reference lab in accordance with the machine alignment
procedure in ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3),
section 10.
Light truck (LT) tire means a tire designated by its manufacturer as
primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Manufacturer means a person manufacturing or assembling motor
vehicles or motor vehicle equipment, or importing motor vehicles or
motor vehicle equipment for resale. This term includes any parent
corporation, any subsidiary or affiliate, and any subsidiary or
affiliate of a parent corporation of such a person.
Passenger car tire means a tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less.
Reference lab means the laboratory or laboratories that the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration designates and which maintains and
operates a rolling resistance test machine to test LATs for rolling
resistance so that other testing laboratories may correlate the results
from its rolling resistance test machine in accordance with the machine
alignment procedure in ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 575.3), section 10.
Replacement passenger car tire means any passenger car tire offered
for sale to consumers, other than a passenger car tire sold as original
equipment on a new vehicle.
Size designation means the alpha-numeric designation assigned by a
manufacturer that identifies a tire's size. This can include
identifications of tire class, nominal width, aspect ratio, tire
construction, and wheel diameter.
Stock keeping unit or SKU means the alpha-numeric designation
assigned by a manufacturer to uniquely identify a tire product. This
term is sometimes referred to as a product code, a product identifier,
or a part number.
Tire line means the entire name used by a tire manufacturer to
designate a tire product including all prefixes and suffixes as they
appear on the sidewall of a tire.
Tire retailer means a dealer or distributor of new replacement
passenger car tires sold for use on passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less.
(e) Requirements--(1) Information--(i) Requirements for tire
manufacturers. Subject to paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, each
manufacturer of tires, or in the case of tires marketed under a brand
name, each brand name owner shall provide rating information for each
tire of which it is the manufacturer or brand name owner in the manner
set forth in paragraphs (e)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this section. The
ratings for each tire shall be only those specified in paragraph (e)(2)
of this section. For the purposes of this section, each tire of a
different SKU is to be rated separately. Each tire shall be able to
achieve the level of performance represented by each rating.
(A) Ratings. Each tire shall be rated with the words, letters,
symbols, and figures specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(B) Tire label. [Reserved]
(C) Reporting requirements. The information collection requirements
contained in this section have been approved by the Office of Management
and Budget under the provisions of the Paperwork Reduction Act (44
U.S.C. 3501 et seq.) and are awaiting an assigned OMB Control Number.
(1) Subject to paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, manufacturers
of tires or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, brand
name owners of
[[Page 229]]
tires subject to this section shall submit to NHTSA, either directly or
through an agent, the following data for each rated replacement
passenger car tire:
(i) Manufacturer or Brand name owner.
(ii) Tire line.
(iii) SKU.
(iv) Tire size.
(v) Rolling resistance rating, as determined in paragraph (e)(2)(i)
of this section.
(vi) Wet traction rating, as determined in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of
this section.
(vii) Treadwear rating, as determined in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of
this section.
(2) Format of data submitted. The information required under
paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) of this section may be submitted to NHTSA by
mail, by facsimile, or by email. Submissions by mail must be addressed
to the Associate Administrator for Rulemaking, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, Attention: Consumer Standards Division (NVS-131),
1200 New Jersey Avenue SE., Washington, DC 20590. Submissions by
facsimile must be addressed to the Associate Administrator for
Rulemaking and transmitted to (202) 366-7002. Submissions by email must
be sent to [email protected].
(3) Exempted tires.
(i) Each manufacturer of tires or, in the case of tires marketed
under a brand name, brand name owner of tires subject to this section
shall submit to NHTSA all tire lines, size designations, and stock
keeping units for deep tread, winter-type snow tires and limited
production tires that it manufactures which are exempt from this section
(Sec. 575.106) under paragraph (c) of this section.
(ii) Where a manufacturer or brand name owner is required to report
ratings under this section, the information required in paragraph
(e)(1)(i)(C)(3)(i) of this section may be submitted with the ratings
information reported in accordance with paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) of
this section.
(iii) Where a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed
under a brand name, brand name owner only manufactures tires that are
exempt from this section under paragraph (c) of this section, that
manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit a statement listing the
information specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3)(i) of this section
and certifying that none of the tires it manufactures are required to be
rated under this section.
(4) New ratings information.
(i) Whenever a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed
under a brand name, a brand name owner introduces a new tire for sale,
the tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit either the
information required under paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) of this section or
the information required under paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3) of this section
for the tire to NHTSA on or before the date 30 calendar days before the
tire is first introduced for sale.
(ii) Whenever a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed
under a brand name, a brand name owner makes a design change to a tire
that would result in new or different information required under either
paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) or paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3) of this section
for the tire, the tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit the
new or different information to NHTSA on or before the date 30 calendar
days before the redesigned tire is first introduced for sale.
(iii) Whenever a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed
under a brand name, a brand name owner receives information that would
determine new or different information required under either paragraph
(e)(1)(i)(C)(1) or paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3) of this section for a tire,
the tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit the new or
different information to NHTSA on or before the date 120 calendar days
after the receipt of the new information by the tire 26manufacturer or
brand name owner.
(5) Voluntary submission of data. Manufacturers of tires or, in the
case of tires marketed under a brand name, brand name owners of tires
not subject to this section may submit to NHTSA data meeting the
requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section for any tire
they wish to have included in the database of information available to
consumers on NHTSA's Web site.
[[Page 230]]
(ii) Requirements for tire retailers. Subject to paragraph
(e)(1)(iii) of this section, each tire retailer shall provide rating
information for each passenger car tire offered for sale in the manner
set forth in this section.
(iii) Date for compliance. The requirements of paragraphs (e)(1)(i)
and (e)(1)(ii) of this section will be implemented as indicated in a
forthcoming final rule. These dates will be announced in the Federal
Register.
(2) Performance--(i) Fuel efficiency. [Reserved]
(ii) Traction. [Reserved]
(iii) Treadwear. [Reserved]
(f) Fuel efficiency rating conditions and procedures--(1)
Conditions. (i) Measurement of rolling resistance force under the test
procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be made
using either the force or the torque method.
(ii) The test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this
section shall be carried out on an 80-grit roadwheel surface.
(iii) The machine alignment procedure specified in section 10 of the
test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be
conducted using pairs of the LATs specified in paragraph (f)(1)(iv) of
this section, and tested by the reference lab.
(iv) Lab alignment tires. The LATs to be used in the machine
alignment procedure in section 10 of the test procedure specified in
paragraph (f)(2) of this section will be specified in this section in a
forthcoming final rule.
(v) Break-in procedure for bias ply tires. Before starting the
rolling resistance testing under the test procedure specified in
paragraph (f)(2) of this section on a bias ply replacement passenger car
tire, the tire shall be broken in by running it for one (1) hour with
the speed, loading, and inflation pressure as specified in paragraphs
(f)(1)(v)(A), (f)(1)(v)(B), and (f)(1)(v)(C) of this section. After the
one hour break-in, allow the tire to cool for two (2) hours and re-
adjust to the required ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 575.3) test inflation pressure, and verify 10 minutes after the
adjustment is made. After break-in, the bias ply tire should follow the
30 minute warm-up procedure of ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see
Sec. 575.3).
(A) Speed. The speed shall be 80 kilometer per hour (kph).
(B) Loading. The tire loading shall be 80 percent of the maximum
tire load capacity.
(C) Inflation pressure. The inflation pressure shall be 210
kilopascals (kPa) for standard load tires, or 250 kPA for reinforced or
extra load tires.
(2) Procedure. The test procedure shall be as specified in ISO 28580
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3), except that the conditions
specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this section shall be used.
(g) Traction rating conditions and procedures. (1) Conditions. Test
conditions are as specified in Sec. 575.104(f)(1), subject to the
changes in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (g)(1)(iii) of this section to
additionally measure the peak coefficient of friction.
(i) The sampling rate of the data acquisition is to be no less than
100 Hertz in accordance with Section 6.6.1.8 of ASTM E 1337
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3).
(ii) The rate of brake application shall be sufficient to control
the time interval between initial brake application and peak
longitudinal force to be between 0.3 and 0.5 seconds, and shall be
determined in accordance with Section 6.3.2 of ASTM E 1337 (incorporated
by reference, see Sec. 575.3).
(iii) The peak coefficient of friction (or peak braking coefficient)
shall be determined in accordance with Section 12 of ASTM E 1337
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 575.3) for each dataset.
(iv) The slide coefficient of friction will be determined in
accordance with Sec. 575.104(f)(2)(iii).
(2) Procedure. (i) Prepare two standard tires as specified in
Sec. 575.104(f)(2)(i).
(ii) Mount the tires on the test apparatus described in
Sec. 575.104(f)(1)(iv) and load each tire to 1,085 pounds.
(iii) Tow the trailer on the asphalt test surface specified in
Sec. 575.104(f)(1)(i) at a speed of 40 mph, lock one trailer wheel, and
record the slide and peak coefficient of friction on the tire associated
with that wheel.
(iv) Repeat the test on the concrete surface, locking the same
wheel.
[[Page 231]]
(v) Repeat the tests specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(iii) and (iv) of
this section for a total of 10 measurements on each test surface.
(vi) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(iii)
through (v) of this section, locking the wheel associated with the other
standard tire.
(vii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to
find the standard tire average peak coefficient of friction for the
asphalt surface. Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete
surface to find the standard tire average peak coefficient of friction
for the concrete surface. The standard tire average peak coefficient of
friction so determined may be used in the computation of adjusted peak
coefficients of friction for more than one candidate tire.
(viii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to
find the standard tire average slide coefficient of friction for the
asphalt surface. Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete
surface to find the standard tire average slide coefficient of friction
for the concrete surface. The standard tire average slide coefficient of
friction so determined may be used in the computation of adjusted slide
coefficients of friction for more than one candidate tire.
(ix) Prepare two candidate tires of the same SKU in accordance with
paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section, mount them on the test apparatus,
and test one of them according to the procedures of paragraphs
(g)(2)(ii) through (v) of this section, except load each tire to 85
percent of the test load specified in Sec. 575.104(h). For CT tires, the
test inflation of candidate tires shall be 230 kPa. Candidate tire
measurements may be taken either before or after the standard tire
measurements used to compute the standard tire traction coefficient.
Take all standard tire and candidate tire measurements used in
computation of a candidate tire's adjusted peak coefficient and adjusted
slide coefficient of friction within a single three-hour period. Average
the 10 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the candidate
tire average peak coefficient and average slide coefficient of friction
for the asphalt surface. Average the 10 measurements taken on the
concrete surface to find the candidate tire average peak coefficient of
friction for the concrete surface. Average the 10 measurements taken on
the concrete surface to find the candidate tire average slide
coefficient of friction for the concrete surface.
(x) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraph (g)(2)(viii) of
this section, using the second candidate tire as the tire being tested.
(h) Treadwear rating conditions and procedures--(1) Conditions. Test
conditions are as specified in Sec. 575.104(e)(1).
(2) Procedure. Test procedure is as specified in Sec. 575.104(e)(2).
[75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010, as amended at 76 FR 79121, Dec. 21, 2011]
Subpart C_Transportation Recall Enhancement, Accountability, and
Documentation Act; Consumer Information
Sec. 575.201 Child restraint performance.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has established a
program for rating the performance of child restraints. The agency makes
the information developed under this rating program available through a
variety of means, including postings on its Web site, http://
www.nhtsa.dot.gov.
[67 FR 67494, Nov. 5, 2002]
Subpart D_Safe, Accountable, Flexible, Efficient Transportation Equity
Act: A Legacy for Users (SAFETEA LU); Consumer Information
Source: 71 FR 53585, Sept. 12, 2006, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 575.301 Vehicle labeling of safety rating information
(applicable unless a vehicle is subject to Sec. 575.302).
(a) Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this section is to aid
potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger motor vehicles by
providing them with safety rating information developed by NHTSA in its
New Car Assessment Program (NCAP) testing. Manufacturers of passenger
motor vehicles described in paragraph (b) of this
[[Page 232]]
section are required to include this information on the Monroney label.
Although NHTSA also makes the information available through means such
as postings at http://www.safercar.gov and http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov, the
additional Monroney label information is intended to provide consumers
with relevant information at the point of sale.
(b) Application. This section applies to automobiles with a GVWR of
10,000 pounds or less, manufactured on or after September 1, 2007, that
are required by the Automobile Information Disclosure Act, 15 U.S.C.
1231-1233, to have price sticker labels (Monroney labels), e.g.
passenger vehicles, station wagons, passenger vans, and sport utility
vehicles, except for vehicles that are subject to Sec. 575.302. Model
Year 2012 or later vehicles manufactured prior to January 31, 2012 may
be labeled according to the provisions of Sec. 575.302 instead of this
section provided the ratings placed on the safety rating label are
derived from vehicle testing conducted by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration under the enhanced NCAP testing and rating
program.
(c) Definitions. (1) Monroney label means the label placed on new
automobiles with the manufacturer's suggested retail price and other
consumer information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233.
(2) Safety rating label means the label with NCAP safety rating
information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1232(g). The safety rating label
is part of the Monroney label.
(d) Required Label. (1) Except as specified in paragraph (f) of this
section, each vehicle must have a safety rating label that is part of
its Monroney label, meets the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of
this section, and conforms in content, format and sequence to the sample
label depicted in Figure 1 of this section. If NHTSA has not provided a
safety rating for any category of vehicle performance for a vehicle, the
manufacturer may use the smaller label specified in paragraph (f) of
this section.
(2) The label must depict the star ratings for that vehicle as
reported to the vehicle manufacturer by NHTSA.
(3) Whenever NHTSA informs a manufacturer in writing of a new safety
rating for a specified vehicle or the continued applicability of an
existing safety rating for a new model year, including any safety
concerns, the manufacturer shall include the new or continued safety
rating on vehicles manufactured on or after the date 30 calendar days
after receipt by the manufacturer of the information.
(4) If, for a vehicle that has an existing safety rating for a
category, NHTSA informs the manufacturer in writing that it has approved
an optional NCAP test that will cover that category, the manufacturer
may depict vehicles manufactured on or after the date of receipt of the
information as ``Not Rated'' or ``To Be Rated'' for that category.
(5) The text ``Frontal Crash,'' ``Side Crash,'' ``Rollover,''
``Driver,'' ``Passenger,'' ``Front Seat,'' ``Rear Seat'' and where
applicable, ``Not Rated'' or ``To Be Rated,'' the star graphic
indicating each rating, as well as any text in the header and footer
areas of the label, must have a minimum font size of 12 point. All
remaining text and symbols on the label (including the star graphic
specified in paragraph (e)(8)(i)(A) of this section, must have a minimum
font size of 8 point.
(e) Required Information and Format--(1) Safety Rating Label Border.
The safety rating label must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is
a minimum of 3 points in width.
(2) Safety Rating Label Size and Legibility. The safety rating label
must be presented in a legible, visible, and prominent fashion that
covers at least 8 percent of the total area of the Monroney label (i.e.,
including the safety rating label) or an area with a minimum of 4\1/2\
inches in length and 3\1/2\ inches in height on the Monroney label,
whichever is larger.
(3) Heading Area. The words ``Government Safety Ratings'' must be in
boldface, capital letters that are light in color and centered. The
background must be dark.
(4) Frontal Crash Area. (i) The frontal crash area must be placed
immediately below the heading area and must have dark text and a light
background. Both
[[Page 233]]
the driver and the right front passenger frontal crash test ratings must
be displayed with the maximum star ratings achieved.
(ii) The words ``Frontal Crash'' must be in boldface, cover two
lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label.
(iii) The word ``Driver'' must be on the same line as the word
``Frontal'' in ``Frontal Crash,'' and be left justified, horizontally
centered and vertically aligned at the top of the label. The achieved
star rating for ``Driver'' must be on the same line, left justified, and
aligned to the right side of the label.
(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the ``Driver''
position, the text ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as
an alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if
the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Driver'', left justified, and aligned to the right
side of the label.
(v) The word ``Passenger'' must be on the same line as the word
``Crash'' in ``Frontal Crash,'' below the word ``Driver,'' and be left
justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned at the top of
the label. The achieved star rating for ``Passenger'' must be on the
same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.
(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Passenger,''
the words ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an
alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Passenger'', left justified, and aligned to the right
side of the label.
(vii) The words ``Star ratings based on the risk of injury in a
frontal impact.'', followed (on the next line) by the statement
``Frontal ratings should ONLY be compared to other vehicles of similar
size and weight.'' must be placed at the bottom of the frontal crash
area.
(5) Side Crash Area. (i) The side crash area must be immediately
below the frontal crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum
of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light
background. Both the driver and the rear seat passenger side crash test
rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.
(ii) The words ``Side Crash'' must cover two lines, and be aligned
to the left side of the label in boldface.
(iii) The words ``Front seat'' must be on the same line as the word
``Side'' in ``Side Crash'' and be left justified, horizontally centered
and vertically aligned in the middle of the label. The achieved star
rating for ``Front seat'' must be on the same line, left justified, and
aligned to the right side of the label.
(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Front Seat,''
the words ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an
alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Front seat'', left justified, and aligned to the
right side of the label.
(v) The words ``Rear seat'' must be on the same line as the word
``Crash'' in ``Side Crash,'' below the word ``Front seat,'' and be left
justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned in the middle of
the label. The achieved star rating for ``Rear seat'' must be on the
same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.
(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Rear Seat,''
the text ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an
alternative, the text ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Rear seat'', left justified, and aligned to the right
side of the label.
(vii) The words: ``Star ratings based on the risk of injury in a
side impact.'' must be placed at the bottom of the side crash area.
[[Page 234]]
(6) Rollover Area. (i) The rollover area must be immediately below
the side crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three
points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. The
rollover test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating
achieved.
(ii) The word ``Rollover'' must be aligned to the left side of the
label in boldface. The achieved star rating must be on the same line,
aligned to the right side of the label.
(iii) If NHTSA has not tested the vehicle, the words ``Not Rated''
must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words ``To Be
Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received
written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for
NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text
``Rollover'', left justified, and aligned to the right side of the
label.
(iv) The words: ``Star ratings based on the risk of rollover in a
single vehicle crash.'' must be placed at the bottom of the rollover
area.
(7) Graphics. The star graphic is depicted in Figure 3 and the
safety concern graphic is depicted in Figure 4.
(8) General Information Area. (i) The general information area must
be immediately below the rollover area, separated by a dark line that is
a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark and the
background must be light. The text must state the following, in the
specified order, on separate lines:
(A) `` Star ratings range from 1 to 5 stars
(), with 5 being the highest.'' and
(B) ``Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA)''
(9) Footer Area. The text ``www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236''
must be provided in boldface letters that are light in color, and be
centered. The background must be dark.
(10) Safety Concern. For vehicle tests for which NHTSA reports a
safety concern as part of the star rating, the label must:
(i) Depict, as a superscript to the star rating, the related symbol,
as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, at \2/3\ the font size of the
base star, and
(ii) Include at the bottom of the relevant area (i.e., frontal crash
area, side crash area, rollover area), as the last line of that area,
the related symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, as a
superscript of the rest of the line, and the text ``Safety Concern:
Visit www.safercar.gov or call 1-888-327-4236 for more details.''
(11) No additional information may be provided in the safety rating
label area. The specified information provided in a language other than
English is not considered to be additional information.
(f) Smaller Safety Rating Label for Vehicles with No Ratings. (1) If
NHTSA has not released a safety rating for any category for a vehicle,
the manufacturer may use a smaller safety rating label that meets
paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(5) of this section. A sample label is
depicted in Figure 2.
(2) The label must be at least 4\1/2\ inches in width and 1\1/2\
inches in height, and must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a
minimum of 3 points in width.
(3) Heading Area. The text must read ``Government Safety Ratings''
and be in 14-point boldface, capital letters that are light in color,
and be centered. The background must be dark.
(4) General Information. The general information area must be below
the header area. The text must be dark and the background must be light.
The text must state the following, in at least 12-point font, be left-
justified, and aligned to the left side of the label, in the specified
order:
(i) ``This vehicle has not been rated by the government for frontal
crash, side crash, or rollover risk.''
(ii) ``Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA).''
(5) Footer Area. The text ``www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236''
must be provided in 14-point boldface letters that are light in color,
and be centered.The background must be dark.
(6) No additional information may be provided in the smaller safety
rating label area. The specified information provided in a language
other than English is not considered to be additional information.
[[Page 235]]
(g) Labels for alterers. (1) If, pursuant to 49 CFR 567.7, a person
is required to affix a certification label to a vehicle, and the vehicle
has a safety rating label with one or more safety ratings, the alterer
must also place another label on that vehicle as specified in this
paragraph.
(2) The additional label (which does not replace the one required by
49 CFR 567.7) must read: ``This vehicle has been altered. The stated
star ratings on the safety rating label may no longer be applicable.''
(3) The label must be placed adjacent to the Monroney label or as
close to it as physically possible.
[[Page 236]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE06.002
[[Page 237]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE06.003
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12SE06.004
[71 FR 53585, Sept. 12, 2006, as amended at 72 FR 45176, Aug. 13, 2007;
76 FR 45466, July 29, 2011]
Sec. 575.302 Vehicle labeling of safety rating information (compliance
required for model year 2012 and later vehicles manufactured on
or after January 31,2012).
(a) Purpose and scope. The purpose of this section is to aid
potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger motor vehicles by
providing them with safety rating information developed by NHTSA in its
New Car Assessment Program (NCAP) testing. Manufacturers of passenger
motor vehicles described in paragraph (b) of this section are required
to include this information on the Monroney label. Although NHTSA also
makes the information available through means such as postings at http:/
/www.safercar.gov and http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov, the additional Monroney
label information is intended to provide consumers with relevant
information at the point of sale.
(b) Application. This section applies to automobiles with a GVWR of
10,000 pounds or less, manufactured on or after January 31, 2012 that
have vehicle identification numbers that identify the vehicles to be
model year 2012 or later and that are required by the Automobile
Information Disclosure Act, 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233, to have price sticker
labels (Monroney labels), (e.g., passenger vehicles, station wagons,
passenger vans, and sport utility vehicles). Model Year 2012 or later
vehicles manufactured prior to January 31, 2012, at the manufacturer's
option, may be labeled according to the provisions of this Sec. 575.302
provided the ratings placed on the safety rating label are derived from
vehicle testing conducted by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration under the enhanced NCAP testing and rating program.
(c) Definitions.
(1) Monroney label means the label placed on new automobiles with
the manufacturer's suggested retail price and other consumer
information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233.
(2) Safety rating label means the label with NCAP safety rating
information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1232(g). The safety rating label
is part of the Monroney label.
(d) Required label.
(1) Except as specified in paragraph (f) of this section, each
vehicle must have a safety rating label that is part
[[Page 238]]
of its Monroney label, meets the requirements specified in paragraph (e)
of this section, and conforms in content, format and sequence to the
sample label depicted in Figure 1 of this section. If NHTSA has not
provided a safety rating for any category of vehicle performance for a
vehicle, the manufacturer may use the smaller label specified in
paragraph (f) of this section.
(2) The label must depict the star ratings for that vehicle as
reported to the vehicle manufacturer by NHTSA.
(3) Whenever NHTSA informs a manufacturer in writing of a new safety
rating for a specified vehicle or the continued applicability of an
existing safety rating for a new model year, including any safety
concerns, the manufacturer shall include the new or continued safety
rating on vehicles manufactured on or after the date 30 calendar days
after receipt by the manufacturer of the information.
(4) If, for a vehicle that has an existing safety rating for a
category, NHTSA informs the manufacturer in writing that it has approved
an optional NCAP test that will cover that category, the manufacturer
may depict vehicles manufactured on or after the date of receipt of the
information as ``Not Rated'' or ``To Be Rated'' for that category.
(5) The text ``Overall Vehicle Score,'' ``Frontal Crash,'' ``Side
Crash,'' ``Rollover,'' ``Driver,'' ``Passenger,'' ``Front Seat,'' ``Rear
Seat'' and where applicable, ``Not Rated'' or ``To Be Rated,'' the star
graphic indicating each rating, as well as any text in the header and
footer areas of the label, must have a minimum font size of 12 point.
All remaining text and symbols on the label (including the star graphic
specified in paragraph (e)(9)(i) of this section), must have a minimum
font size of 8 point.
(e) Required information and format.
(1) Safety rating label border. The safety rating label must be
surrounded by a solid dark line that is a minimum of 3 points in width.
(2) Safety rating label size and legibility. The safety rating label
must be presented in a legible, visible, and prominent fashion that
covers at least 8 percent of the total area of the Monroney label (i.e.,
including the safety rating label) or an area with a minimum of 4\1/2\
inches in length and 3\1/2\ inches in height on the Monroney label,
whichever is larger.
(3) Heading area. The words ``Government 5-Star Safety Ratings''
must be in boldface, capital letters that are light in color and
centered. The background must be dark.
(4) Overall vehicle score area.
(i) The overall vehicle score area must be placed immediately below
the heading area and must have dark text and a light background. The
overall vehicle score rating must be displayed with the maximum star
rating achieved.
(ii) The words ``Overall Vehicle Score'' must be in boldface aligned
to the left side of the label. The achieved star rating must be on the
same line and be aligned to the right side of the label and left
justified.
(iii) The words ``Based on the combined ratings of frontal, side and
rollover'' followed by the statement ``Should ONLY be compared to other
vehicles of similar size and weight'' (on the following line) must be
placed at the bottom of the overall vehicle score area and left
justified.
(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the ``Frontal
Crash,'' ``Side Crash,'' or ``Rollover'' area, the text ``Not Rated''
must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words ``To Be
Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received
written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for the
NCAP frontal, side, and/or rollover testing such that there will be
ratings in all three areas.
(5) Frontal crash area.
(i) The frontal crash area must be placed immediately below the
overall vehicle score area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum
of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light
background. Both the driver and the right front seat passenger frontal
crash test ratings must be displayed with the maximum star ratings
achieved.
(ii) The words ``Frontal Crash'' must be in boldface, cover two
lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label.
[[Page 239]]
(iii) The word ``Driver'' must be on the same line as the word
``Frontal'' in ``Frontal Crash,'' and be horizontally centered, left
justified and vertically aligned to the top of the frontal crash area.
The achieved star rating for ``Driver'' must be on the same line and be
aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.
(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the ``Driver''
position, the text ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as
an alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if
the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Driver'' and be aligned to the right side of the
label and left justified.
(v) The word ``Passenger'' must be on the same line as the word
``Crash'' in ``Frontal Crash,'' below the word ``Driver,'' and be
horizontally centered, left justified and vertically aligned to the top
of the frontal crash area. The achieved star rating for ``Passenger''
must be on the same line and be aligned to the right side of the label
and left justified.
(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Passenger,''
the words ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an
alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Passenger'' and be aligned to the right side of the
label and left justified.
(vii) The words ``Based on the risk of injury in a frontal impact.''
followed (on the next line) by the statement ``Should ONLY be compared
to other vehicles of similar size and weight.'' must be placed at the
bottom of the frontal crash area and left justified.
(6) Side crash area.
(i) The side crash area must be immediately below the frontal crash
area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in
width. The text must be dark against a light background. Both the driver
and the rear seat passenger side crash test rating must be displayed
with the maximum star rating achieved.
(ii) The words ``Side Crash'' must cover two lines, and be aligned
to the left side of the label in boldface.
(iii) The words ``Front seat'' must be on the same line as the word
``Side'' in ``Side Crash'' and be horizontally centered, left justified
and vertically aligned to the top of the side crash area. The achieved
star rating for ``Front seat'' must be on the same line as the words
``Front seat'' and be aligned to the right side of the label and left
justified.
(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Front Seat,''
the words ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an
alternative, the words ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Front seat'' and be aligned to the right side of the
label and left justified.
(v) The words ``Rear seat'' must be on the same line as the word
``Crash'' in ``Side Crash,'' below the word ``Front seat,'' and be
horizontally centered, left justified and vertically aligned to the top
of the side crash area. The achieved star rating for ``Rear seat'' must
be on the same line as the text ``Rear seat'' and be aligned to the
right side of the label and left justified.
(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for ``Rear Seat,''
the text ``Not Rated'' must be used in boldface. However, as an
alternative, the text ``To Be Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the
manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the
vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same
line as the text ``Rear seat'' and be aligned to the right side of the
label and left justified.
(vii) The words ``Based on the risk of injury in a side impact.''
must be placed at the bottom of the side crash area and left justified.
(7) Rollover area.
(i) The rollover area must be immediately below the side crash area,
separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The
text must be dark against a light background.
[[Page 240]]
The rollover test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating
achieved.
(ii) The word ``Rollover'' must be aligned to the left side of the
label in boldface. The achieved star rating must be on the same line and
be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.
(iii) If NHTSA has not tested the vehicle, the words ``Not Rated''
must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words ``To Be
Rated'' (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received
written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for
NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text
``Rollover'' and be aligned to the right side of the label and left
justified.
(iv) The words ``Based on the risk of rollover in a single-vehicle
crash.'' must be placed at the bottom of the rollover area and left
justified.
(8) Graphics. The star graphic is depicted in Figure 3 and the
safety concern graphic is depicted in Figure 4.
(9) Footer area. The footer area must be placed at the bottom of the
label; the text must be in boldface letters that are light in color and
centered. The background must be dark. The text must state the
following, in the specified order, on separate lines:
(i) ``Star ratings range from 1 to 5 stars (
) with 5 being the highest.''
(ii) ``Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA).''
(iii) ``www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236.''
(10) Safety concern. For vehicle tests for which NHTSA reports a
safety concern as part of the safety rating, and for overall vehicle
scores that are derived from vehicle tests for at least one of which
NHTSA reports a safety concern as part of the safety rating, the label
must:
(i) In both the rating area in which the safety concern was
identified and in the overall vehicle score area, depict, as a
superscript to the star rating, the safety concern symbol, as depicted
in Figure 4 of this section, at \2/3\ the font size of the base star,
and
(ii) Include at the bottom of the overall vehicle score area only as
the last line of that area, in no smaller than 8 point type, the related
symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, as a superscript of the
rest of the line, and the text ``Safety Concern: Visit www.safercar.gov
or call 1-888-327-4236 for more details.''
(11) No additional information may be provided in the safety rating
label area. The specified information provided in a language other than
English is not considered to be additional information.
(f) Smaller safety rating label for vehicles with no ratings.
(1) If NHTSA has not released a safety rating for any category for a
vehicle, the manufacturer may use a smaller safety rating label that
meets paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(5) of this section. A sample label
is depicted in Figure 2.
(2) The label must be at least 4\1/2\ inches in width and 1\1/2\
inches in height, and must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a
minimum of 3 points in width.
(3) Heading area. The text must read ``Government 5-Star Safety
Ratings'' and be at least in 14-point boldface, capital letters that are
light in color, and be centered. The background must be dark.
(4) General information. The general information area must be below
the header area. The text must be dark and the background must be light.
The text must state the following, in at least 12-point font and be left
justified: ``This vehicle has not been rated by the government for
overall vehicle score, frontal crash, side crash, or rollover risk.''
(5) Footer area. The footer area must be placed at the bottom of the
label; the text must be at least in 12-point boldface letters that are
light in color, and centered. The background must be dark. The text must
state the following, in the specified order, on separate lines:
(i) ``Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA)'' and
(ii) ``www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236''.
(6) No additional information may be provided in the smaller safety
rating label area. The specified information provided in a language
other than
[[Page 241]]
English is not considered to be additional information.
(g) Labels for alterers.
(1) If, pursuant to 49 CFR 567.7, a person is required to affix a
certification label to a vehicle, and the vehicle has a safety rating
label with one or more safety ratings, the alterer must also place
another label on that vehicle as specified in this paragraph.
(2) The additional label (which does not replace the one required by
49 CFR 567.7) must read: ``This vehicle has been altered. The stated
star ratings on the safety rating label may no longer be applicable.''
(3) The label must be placed adjacent to the Monroney label or as
close to it as physically possible.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR29JY11.000
[[Page 242]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR29JY11.001
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR29JY11.002
[76 FR 45466, July 29, 2011, as amended at 76 FR 74724, Dec. 1, 2011]
Subpart E_Energy Independence and Security Act; Consumer Information
Source: 76 FR 39577, July 6, 2011, unless otherwise noted.
[[Page 243]]
Sec. 575.401 Vehicle labeling of fuel economy, greenhouse gas,
and other pollutant emissions information.
(a) Purpose and scope. The purpose of this section is to aid
potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger cars and light
trucks by providing them with information about vehicles' performance in
terms of fuel economy, greenhouse gas (GHG), and other air pollutant
emissions. Manufacturers of passenger cars and light trucks are required
to include this information on the label described in this section.
Although this information will also be available through means such as
postings at http://www.fueleconomy.gov, the additional label information
is intended to provide consumers with this information at the point of
sale, and to help them compare between vehicles.
(b) Application. This section applies to passenger cars and light
trucks manufactured in model year 2013 and later. Manufacturers may
optionally comply with this section during model year 2012.
(c) Definitions.
(1) Data element means a piece of information required or permitted
to be included on the fuel economy and environment label.
(2) Fuel economy and environment label means the label with
information about automobile performance in terms of fuel economy,
greenhouse gases, and other emissions and with rating systems for fuel
economy, greenhouse gases, and other emissions that also indicate the
automobile(s) with the highest fuel economy and lowest greenhouse gas
emissions, as specified at 49 U.S.C. 32908(g).
(3) Miles per gasoline gallon equivalent (MPGe) is a measure of
distance traveled per unit of energy consumed, and functions as a
recognizable equivalent to, e.g., kilowatt-hours per mile (kW-hr/mile).
(4) Monroney label means the label placed on new automobiles with
the manufacturer's suggested retail price and other consumer
information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233 (also known as the
``Automobile Information Disclosure Act label'').
(5) Other air pollutants or other emissions means those tailpipe
emissions, other than carbon dioxide (CO2), for which
manufacturers must provide EPA with emissions rates for all new light
duty vehicles each model year under EPA's Tier 2 light duty vehicle
emissions standards requirements (40 CFR Part 86, Subpart S) or the
parallel requirements for those vehicles certified instead to the
California emissions standards. These air pollutants include non-methane
organic gases (NMOG), nitrogen oxides (NOX), particulate
matter (PM), carbon monoxide (CO), and formaldehyde (HCHO).
(6) Slider bar means a horizontal rating scale with a minimum value
at one end and a maximum value at the other end that can accommodate a
designation of a specific value between those values with a box or
arrow. The actual rating value would be printed (displayed) at the
proper position on the scale representing the vehicle's actual rating
value relative to the two end values.
(d) Required label. Prior to being offered for sale, each
manufacturer must affix or cause to be affixed and each dealer must
maintain or cause to be maintained on each passenger car or light truck
a label that meets the requirements specified in this section, and
conforms in content, format, and sequence to the sample labels depicted
in the appendix to this section. The manufacturer must have the fuel
economy label affixed in such a manner that appearance and legibility
are maintained until after the vehicle is delivered to the ultimate
consumer.
(e) Required label information and format--general provisions--(1)
Location. It is preferable that the fuel economy and environment label
information be incorporated into the Monroney label, provided that the
prominence and legibility of the fuel economy and environment label is
maintained. If the fuel economy and environment label is incorporated
into the Monroney label, it must be placed on a separate section in the
Monroney label and must not be intermixed with that label information,
except for vehicle descriptions as noted in 40 CFR 600.302-08(d)(1). If
the fuel economy and environment label is not incorporated into the
Monroney label, it must be located on a side window, and as close as
possible to the
[[Page 244]]
Monroney label. If the window is not large enough to accommodate both
the Monroney label and the fuel economy and environment label, the
latter must be located on another window as close as physically possible
to the Monroney label.
(2) Size and legibility. The fuel economy and environment label must
be readily visible from the exterior of the vehicle and presented in a
legible and prominent fashion. The label must be rectangular in shape
with a minimum height of 4.5 inches (114 mm) and a minimum length of 7.0
inches (177 mm) as specified in the appendix to this section.
(3) Basic appearance. Fuel economy and environment labels must be
printed on white or very light paper with the color specified in this
section; any label markings for which a color is not specified here must
be in black and white. The label can be divided into three separate
fields outlined by a continuous border, as described in the appendix to
this section. Manufacturers must make a good faith effort to conform to
the formats illustrated in the appendix to this section. Label templates
are available for download at http://www.nhtsa.gov/fuel-economy/.
(4) Border. Create a continuous black border to outline the label
and separate the three information fields. Include the following
information in the upper and lower portions of the border:
(i) Upper border, label name. (A) In the left portion of the upper
border, the words ``EPA'' and ``DOT'' must be in boldface, capital
letters that are light in color and left-justified, with a horizontal
line in between them as shown in the appendix to this section.
(B) Immediately to the right of the agency names, the heading ``Fuel
Economy and Environment'' must be in boldface letters that are light in
color.
(ii) Upper border, vehicle fuel type. In the right portion of the
upper border, identify the vehicle's fuel type in black font on a blue-
colored field as follows:
(A) For vehicles designed to operate on a single fuel, identify the
appropriate fuel. For example, identify the vehicle with the words
``Gasoline Vehicle,'' ``Diesel Vehicle,'' ``Compressed Natural Gas
Vehicle,'' ``Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicle,'' etc. This includes hybrid
electric vehicles that do not have plug-in capability. Include a logo
corresponding to the fuel to the left of this designation as follows:
(1) For gasoline, include a fuel pump logo.
(2) For diesel fuel, include a fuel pump logo with a ``D'' inscribed
in the base of the fuel pump.
(3) For natural gas, include the established CNG logo.
(4) For hydrogen fuel cells, include the expression
``H2.''
(B) Identify dual-fueled (``flexible-fueled'') vehicles with the
words ``Flexible-Fuel Vehicle Gasoline-Ethanol (E85),'' ``Flexible-Fuel
Vehicle Diesel-Natural Gas,'' etc. Include a fuel pump logo or a
combination of logos to the left of this designation as appropriate. For
example, for vehicles that operate on gasoline or ethanol, include a
fuel pump logo and the designation ``E85,'' as shown in the appendix to
this section.
(C) Identify plug-in hybrid electric vehicles with the words ``Plug-
In Hybrid Vehicle Electricity-Gasoline'' or ``Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle
Electricity-Diesel.'' Include a fuel pump logo to the lower left of this
designation and an electric plug logo to the upper left of this
designation.
(D) Identify electric vehicles with the words ``Electric Vehicle.''
Include an electric plug logo to the left of this designation.
(iii) Lower border, left side: (A) In the upper left portion of the
lower border, include the statement ``Actual results will vary for many
reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain
your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel
over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per
gallon. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions
are a significant cause of climate change and smog.'' For the value of
a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year
established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year
fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that
model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate
established by EPA. For the value
[[Page 245]]
of d, insert the estimated cost per gallon established by EPA for
gasoline or diesel fuel, as appropriate. See paragraphs (f) through (j)
below for alternate statements that apply for vehicles that use a fuel
other than gasoline or diesel fuel.
(B) In the lower left portion of the lower border, include the Web
site reference, ``fueleconomy.gov,'' and include the following
statement: ``Calculate personalized estimates and compare vehicles''
beneath it.
(iv) Lower border, right side: Include a field in the right-most
portion of the lower border to allow for accessing interactive
information with mobile electronic devices as set forth in 40 CFR
600.302-12(b)(6).
(v) Lower border, center: Along the lower edge of the lower border,
to the left of the field described in paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this
section, include the logos for the Environmental Protection Agency, the
Department of Transportation, and the Department of Energy as shown in
the appendix to this section.
(5) Fuel economy performance and fuel cost values. To the left side
in the white field at the top of the label, include the following
elements for vehicles that run on gasoline or diesel fuel with no plug-
in capability:
(i) The heading ``Fuel Economy'' near the top left corner of the
field.
(ii) The vehicle's combined fuel economy determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy''
below the number in smaller font.
(iii) A fuel pump logo to the left of the combined fuel economy
value (for diesel fuel, include a fuel pump logo with a ``D'' inscribed
in the base of the fuel pump).
(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the
right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:
(A) Include the word ``MPG'' to the upper right of the combined fuel
economy value.
(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(a) and (b) to the right of
the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word
``MPG.'' Include the expression ``city'' in smaller font below the city
fuel economy value, and the expression ``highway'' in smaller font below
the highway fuel economy value.
(v) Below the fuel economy performance values set forth in
paragraphs (e)(5)(ii) and (iv) of this section, include the value for
the fuel consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(1).
(vi) To the right of the word ``MPG'' described in paragraph
(e)(5)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range
of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth
in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2) and below that information, include the
expression ``The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.''
(6) Comparative five-year fuel costs/savings. To the right side in
the white field at the top of the label, include the information
required by EPA at 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(3).
(7) Annual fuel cost value. In the field in the lower left portion
of the label, include the information on annual fuel cost as required by
EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(d).
(8) Fuel economy and environment slider bar ratings. In the field in
the lower right portion of the label,
(i) Include the heading ``Fuel Economy & Greenhouse Gas Rating
(tailpipe only)'' in the top left corner of the field.
(ii) Include a slider bar in the left portion of the field as shown
in the appendix to this section to characterize the vehicle's fuel
economy and CO2 emission rating relative to the range of fuel
economy and CO2 emission rates for all vehicles. Position a
black box with a downward-pointing wedge above the slider bar positioned
to show where that vehicle's fuel economy and CO2 emission
rating falls relative to the total range. Include the vehicle's fuel
economy and CO2 emission rating determined as set forth in 40
CFR 600.311-12(d) inside the box in white text. If the fuel economy and
CO2 emission ratings are different, the black box with a
downward-pointing wedge above the slider bar must contain the fuel
economy rating, with a second upward-pointing wedge below the slider bar
containing the CO2 emission rating. Include the number ``1''
in white text in
[[Page 246]]
the black border at the left end of the slider bar, and include the
number ``10'' in white text in the black border at the right end of the
slider bar, with the expression ``Best'' in black text under the slider
bar directly below the ``10.'' Add color to the slider bar such that it
is blue at the left end of the range, white at the right end of the
range, and shaded continuously across the range.
(iii) Include the heading ``Smog Rating (tailpipe only)'' in the top
right corner of the field.
(iv) Include a slider bar in the right portion of the field to
characterize the vehicle's level of emission control for other air
pollutants relative to that of all vehicles. Position a black box with a
downward-pointing wedge above the slider bar positioned to show where
that vehicle's emission rating falls relative to the total range.
Include the vehicle's emission rating determined as set forth in 40 CFR
600.311-12(g) inside the box in white text. Include the number ``1'' in
white text in the black border at the left end of the slider bar, and
include the number ``10'' in white text in the black border at the right
end of the slider bar, with the expression ``Best'' in black text under
the slider bar directly below the ``10.'' Add color to the slider bar
such that it is blue at the left end of the range, white at the right
end of the range, and shaded continuously across the range.
(v) Below the slider bars described in paragraphs (e)(8)(ii) and
(e)(8)(iv) to this section, include the statement, ``This vehicle emits
e grams CO2 per mile. The best emits 0 grams per mile
(tailpipe only). Producing and distributing fuel also creates emissions;
learn more at fueleconomy.gov.'' For the value of e, insert the
vehicle's specific tailpipe CO2 emission rating determined as
set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(d).
(9) Rounding. Round all numerical values identified in this section
to the nearest whole number unless otherwise specified.
(10) Other label information required by EPA. Manufacturers must
include any additional labeling information required by EPA at 40 CFR
600.302-12 on the fuel economy and environment label.
(f) Required label information and format--flexible-fuel vehicles.
(1) Fuel economy and environment labels for flexible-fuel vehicles must
meet the specifications described in paragraph (e) of this section, with
the exceptions and additional specifications described in this paragraph
(f). This section describes how to label vehicles with gasoline engines.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, all the references to ``gas'' or
``gasoline'' in this section are understood to refer to ``diesel'' or
``diesel fuel,'' respectively.
(2) For qualifying vehicles, include the following additional
expression in the statement identified in paragraph (e)(iv)(3)(A) of
this section as shown in the appendix to this section: ``This is a dual
fueled automobile.''
(3) Include the following elements instead of the information
identified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:
(i) The heading ``Fuel Economy'' near the top left corner of the
field.
(ii) The vehicle's combined fuel economy as set forth in 40 CFR
600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy'' below
the number in smaller font.
(iii) A fuel pump logo and other logos as specified in paragraph
(e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy
value.
(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the
right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:
(A) Include the word ``MPG'' to the upper right of the combined fuel
economy value.
(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(a) and (b) to the right of
the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word
``MPG.'' Include the expression ``city'' in smaller font below the city
fuel economy value, and the expression ``highway'' in smaller font below
the highway fuel economy value.
(v) Below the fuel economy performance value set forth in paragraph
(f)(iii)(2) of this section, include the value for the fuel consumption
rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-
12(c)(1).
(vi) To the right of the word ``MPG'' described in paragraph
(e)(5)(iv)(A) of
[[Page 247]]
this section, include the information about the range of fuel economy of
comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-
12(c)(2), and below that information, include the expression ``The best
vehicle rates 99 MPGe. Values are based on gasoline and do not reflect
performance and ratings based on E85.'' Adjust this statement as
appropriate for vehicles designed to operate on different fuels.
(vii) Below the combined fuel economy value, the manufacturer may
include information on the vehicle's driving range as shown in the
appendix to this section, with the sub-heading ``Driving Range,'' and
with range bars below this sub-heading as required by EPA and set forth
in 40 CFR 600.303-12(b)(6).
(g) Required label information and format--special requirements for
hydrogen fuel cell vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for
hydrogen fuel cell vehicles must meet the specifications set forth in
paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and additional
specifications described in this paragraph (g).
(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the
lower border instead of the statement specified in paragraph
(e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: ``Actual results will vary for many
reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain
your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel
over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per
kilogram of hydrogen. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent.
Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change and smog.''
For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value
for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the
estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for the average
new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert the annual
mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of d, insert the
estimated cost per kilogram established by EPA for hydrogen.
(3) Include the following elements instead of the information
identified above in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:
(i) The heading ``Fuel Economy'' near the top left corner of the
field.
(ii) The vehicle's combined fuel economy determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy''
below the number in smaller font.
(iii) The ``H2'' logo as specified in paragraph
(e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy
value.
(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the
right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:
(A) Include the word ``MPGe'' to the upper right of the combined
fuel economy value.
(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(a) and (b) to the right of
the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word
``MPG.'' Include the expression ``city'' in smaller font below the city
fuel economy value, and the expression ``highway'' in smaller font below
the highway fuel economy value.
(v) To the right of the fuel economy performance values set forth in
paragraph (iv)(B) of this section, include the value for the fuel
consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR
600.302-12(c)(1).
(vi) To the right of the word ``MPGe'' described in paragraph
(g)(3)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range
of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth
in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2) and below that information, include the
expression ``The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.''
(vii) Below the combined fuel economy value, include information on
the vehicle's driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as
required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.304-12(b)(6)
(h) Required label information and format--special requirements for
compressed natural gas vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels
for compressed natural gas vehicles must meet the specifications
described in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions
[[Page 248]]
and additional specifications described in this paragraph (h).
(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the
lower border instead of the statement specified in paragraph
(e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: ``Actual results will vary for many
reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain
your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel
over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per
gasoline gallon equivalent. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon
equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change
and smog.'' For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined
MPG value for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b,
insert the estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for
the average new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert
the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of d, insert
the estimated cost per gasoline gallon equivalent established by EPA for
natural gas.
(3) Include the following elements instead of the information
identified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:
(i) The heading ``Fuel Economy'' near the top left corner of the
field.
(ii) The vehicle's combined fuel economy determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy''
below the number in smaller font.
(iii) The compressed natural gas logo as specified in paragraph
(e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy
value.
(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the
right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:
(A) Include the word ``MPGe'' to the upper right of the combined
fuel economy value.
(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(a) and (b) to the right of
the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word
``MPGe.'' Include the expression ``city'' in smaller font below the city
fuel economy value, and the expression ``highway'' in smaller font below
the highway fuel economy value.
(v) To the right of the fuel economy performance values described in
paragraph (h)(3)(iv)(B) of this section, include the value for the fuel
consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR
600.302-12(c)(1).
(vi) To the right of the word ``MPGe'' described in paragraph
(g)(3)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range
of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth
in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2), and below that information, include the
expression ``The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.''
(vii) Below the combined fuel economy value, include information on
the vehicle's driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as
required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.306-12(b)(6).
(i) Required label information and format--special requirements for
plug-in hybrid electric vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment
labels for plug-in hybrid electric vehicles must meet the specifications
described in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and
additional specifications described in this paragraph (i). This
paragraph (i) describes how to label vehicles equipped with gasoline
engines. If a vehicle has a diesel engine, all the references to ``gas''
or ``gasoline'' in this section are understood to refer to ``diesel'' or
``diesel fuel,'' respectively.
(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the
lower border instead of the statement specified in paragraph
(e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: ``Actual results will vary for many
reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain
your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel
over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per
gallon and $e per kW-hr. This is a dual fueled automobile. MPGe is miles
per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant
cause of climate change and smog.'' For the value of a, insert the
average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year established
by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year fuel cost
value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that model year.
For the
[[Page 249]]
value of c, insert the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the
value of d, insert the estimated cost per gallon established by EPA for
gasoline. For the value of e, insert the estimated cost per kW-hr of
electricity established by EPA.
(3) Include the following elements instead of the information
identified above in paragraph (e)(5):
(i) The heading ``Fuel Economy'' near the top left corner of the
field.
(ii) An outlined box below the heading with the following
information:
(A) The sub-heading ``Electricity'' if the vehicle's engine starts
only after the battery is fully discharged, or the sub-heading
``Electricity + Gasoline'' if the vehicle uses combined power from the
battery and the engine before the battery is fully discharged.
(B) The expression ``Charge Time: x hours (240 V),'' as required by
EPA and as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(2)(ii).
(C) The vehicle's combined fuel economy determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy''
below the number in smaller font.
(D) An electric plug logo as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A) of
this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value. For
vehicles that use combined power from the battery and the engine before
the battery is fully discharged, also include the fuel pump logo as
shown in the appendix to this section.
(E) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the
right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:
(1) Include the word ``MPGe'' to the upper right of the combined
fuel economy value.
(2) If the vehicle's engine starts only after the battery is fully
discharged, identify the vehicle's electricity consumption rate as
required by EPA and determined as set forth in set forth in 40 CFR
600.308-12(b)(2)(v).
(3) If the vehicle uses combined power from the battery and the
engine before the battery is fully discharged, identify the vehicle's
gasoline and electricity consumption rates as required by EPA and
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(2)(v).
(iii) A second outlined box to the right of the box described in
paragraph (i)(3)(ii) of this section with the following information:
(A) The sub-heading ``Gasoline Only.''
(B) The vehicle's combined fuel economy determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy''
below the number in smaller font.
(C) A fuel pump logo to the left of the combined fuel economy value.
(D) The units identifier and consumption values to the right of the
combined fuel economy value as follows:
(1) Include the word ``MPGe'' to the upper right of the combined
fuel economy value.
(2) Identify the vehicle's gasoline consumption rate required by EPA
and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(3).
(iv) Below the boxes specified in paragraphs (i)(3)(ii) and (iii) of
this section, include information on the vehicle's driving range as
shown in the appendix to this section, as required by EPA and as set
forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(4).
(v) To the right of the heading ``Fuel Economy'' described in
paragraph (i)(3)(i) of this section, include the information about the
range of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set
forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2) and to the right of that information,
include the expression ``The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.''
(4) Include the following statement instead of the statement
identified in paragraph (e)(8)(v) of this section: ``This vehicle emits
f grams CO2 per mile. The best emits 0 grams per mile
(tailpipe only). Producing and distributing fuel & electricity also
creates emissions; learn more at fueleconomy.gov.'' For the value of f,
insert the vehicle's specific tailpipe CO2 emission rating
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(d).
(j) Required label information and format--special requirements for
electric vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for electric
vehicles must meet the specifications described in paragraph (e) of this
section, with the exceptions and additional specifications described in
this section.
[[Page 250]]
(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the
lower border instead of the statement specified above in paragraph
(e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: ``Actual results will vary for many
reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain
your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel
over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $e per kW-
hr. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are
a significant cause of climate change and smog.'' For the value of a,
insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year
established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year
fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that
model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate
established by EPA. For the value of e, insert the estimated cost per
kW-hr of electricity established by EPA.
(3) Include the following elements instead of the information
identified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:
(i) The heading ``Fuel Economy'' near the top left corner of the
field.
(ii) The vehicle's combined fuel economy determined as set forth in
40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words ``combined city/hwy''
below the number in smaller font.
(iii) The electric plug logo as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A)
of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value.
(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the
right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:
(A) Include the word ``MPGe'' to the upper right of the combined
fuel economy value.
(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy
determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(a) and (b) to the right of
the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word
``MPGe.'' Include the expression ``city'' in smaller font below the city
fuel economy value, and the expression ``highway'' in smaller font below
the highway fuel economy value.
(v) To the right of the fuel economy performance values described in
paragraph (iv)(B) of this section, include the value for the fuel
consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR
600.310-12(b)(5).
(vi) Below the combined fuel economy value, include information on
the vehicle's driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as
required by EPA and as set forth in 40 CFR 600.310-12(b)(6).
(vii) Below the driving range information and left-justified,
include information on the vehicle's charge time, as required by EPA and
as set forth in 40 CFR 600.310-12(b)(7).
(4) Include the following statement instead of the statement
identified in paragraph (e)(8)(v) of this section: ``This vehicle emits
0 grams CO2 per mile. The best emits 0 grams per mile
(tailpipe only). Does not include emissions from generating electricity;
learn more at fueleconomy.gov.''
Appendix to Sec. 575.401
[[Page 251]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.058
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.059
[[Page 252]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.060
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.061
[[Page 253]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.062
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.063
[[Page 254]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.064
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.065
[[Page 255]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.066
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06JY11.067
[[Page 256]]
PART 576_RECORD RETENTION--Table of Contents
Sec.
576.1 Scope.
576.2 Purpose.
576.3 Application.
576.4 Definitions.
576.5 Basic requirements.
576.6 Records.
576.7 Retention.
576.8 Malfunctions covered.
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 322(a), 30117, 30120(g), 30141-30147;
delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.
Source: 39 FR 30045, Aug. 20, 1974, unless otherwise noted.
Editorial Note: For an interpretation document regarding part 576,
see 40 FR 3296, Jan. 21, 1975.
Sec. 576.1 Scope.
This part establishes requirements for the retention by
manufacturers of motor vehicles and of motor vehicle equipment, of
claims, complaints, reports, and other records concerning alleged and
proven motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment defects and malfunctions
that may be related to motor vehicle safety.
[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 576.2 Purpose.
The purpose of this part is to preserve records that are needed for
the proper investigation, and adjudication or other disposition, of
possible defects related to motor vehicle safety and instances of
nonconformity to the motor vehicle safety standards and associated
regulations.
Sec. 576.3 Application.
This part applies to all manufacturers of motor vehicles, with
respect to all records generated or acquired on or after August 16,
1969, and to all manufacturers of motor vehicle equipment, with respect
to all records in their possession, generated or acquired on or after
August 9, 2002.
[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 576.4 Definitions.
All terms in this part that are defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 and part
579 of this chapter are used as defined therein.
[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 576.5 Basic requirements.
(a) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles, child restraint systems,
and tires shall retain, as specified in Sec. 576.7 of this part, all
records described in Sec. 576.6 of this part for a period of five
calendar years from the date on which they were generated or acquired by
the manufacturer.
(b) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment
shall retain, as specified in Sec. 576.7 of this part, all the
underlying records on which the information reported under part 579 of
this chapter is based, for a period of five calendar years from the date
on which they were generated or acquired by the manufacturer, except as
provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) Manufacturers need not retain copies of documents transmitted to
NHTSA pursuant to parts 573, 577, and 579 of this chapter.
[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 576.6 Records.
Records to be maintained by manufacturers under this part include
all documentary materials, films, tapes, and other information-storing
media that contain information concerning malfunctions that may be
related to motor vehicle safety. Such records include, but are not
limited to, reports and other documents, including material generated or
communicated by computer, telefax or other electronic means, that are
related to work performed under warranties; and any lists, compilations,
analyses, or discussions of such malfunctions contained in internal or
external correspondence of the manufacturer, including communications
transmitted electronically.
[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]
Sec. 576.7 Retention.
Duplicate copies need not be retained. Information may be reproduced
or transferred from one storage medium to another (e.g., from paper
files to microfilm) as long as no information is lost in the
reproduction or transfer,
[[Page 257]]
and when so reproduced or transferred the original form may be treated
as a duplicate.
Sec. 576.8 Malfunctions covered.
For purposes of this part, ``malfunctions that may be related to
motor vehicle safety'' shall include, with respect to a motor vehicle or
item of motor vehicle equipment, any failure or malfunction beyond
normal deterioration in use, or any failure of performance, or any flaw
or unintended deviation from design specifications, that could in any
reasonably foreseeable manner be a causative factor in, or aggravate, an
accident or an injury to a person.
PART 577_DEFECT AND NONCOMPLIANCE NOTIFICATION--Table of Contents
Sec.
577.1 Scope.
577.2 Purpose.
577.3 Application.
577.4 Definitions.
577.5 Notification pursuant to a manufacturer's decision.
577.6 Notification pursuant to Administrator's decision.
577.7 Time and manner of notification.
577.8 Disclaimers.
577.9 Conformity to statutory requirements.
577.10 Follow-up notification.
577.11 Reimbursement notification.
577.12 Notification pursuant to an accelerated remedy program.
577.13 Notification to dealers and distributors.
577.14 Labeling for owner notification letter envelope.
Authority: 49 U.S.C. 30102, 30103, 30116-121, 30166; delegation of
authority at 49 CFR 1.95 and 49 CFR 501.8.
Source: 41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 577.1 Scope.
This part sets forth requirements for manufacturer notification to
owners, dealers, and distributors of motor vehicles and items of
replacement equipment about a defect that relates to motor vehicle
safety or a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard.
[69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]
Sec. 577.2 Purpose.
The purpose of this part is to ensure that notifications of defects
or noncompliances adequately inform and effectively motivate owners of
potentially defective or noncomplying motor vehicles or items of
replacement equipment to have such vehicles or equipment inspected and,
where necessary, remedied as quickly as possible. It is also to ensure
that dealers and distributors of motor vehicles and items of replacement
equipment are made aware of the existence of defects and noncompliances
and of their rights and responsibilities with regard thereto.
[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]
Sec. 577.3 Application.
This part applies to manufacturers of complete motor vehicles,
incomplete motor vehicles, and replacement equipment. In the case of
vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, compliance by either the
manufacturer of the incomplete vehicle, any subsequent manufacturer, or
the manufacturer of affected replacement equipment, shall be considered
compliance by each of those manufacturers.
Sec. 577.4 Definitions.
For the purposes of this part:
Act means 49 U.S.C. Chapter 30101-30169.
Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration or his delegate.
First purchaser means the first purchaser in good faith for a
purpose other than resale.
Leased motor vehicle means any motor vehicle that is leased to a
person for a term of at least four months by a lessor who has leased
five or more vehicles in the twelve months preceding the date of
notification by the vehicle manufacturer of the existence of a safety-
related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety
standard in the motor vehicle.
Lessee means a person who is the lessee of a leased motor vehicle as
defined in this section.
Lessor means a person or entity that is the owner, as reflected on
the vehicle's title, of any five or more leased
[[Page 258]]
vehicles (as defined in this section), as of the date of notification by
the manufacturer of the existence of a safety-related defect or
noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in one or
more of the leased motor vehicles.
Owners includes purchaser.
[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17270, Apr. 5, 1995]
Sec. 577.5 Notification pursuant to a manufacturer's decision.
(a) When a manufacturer of motor vehicles or replacement equipment
determines that any motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment
produced by the manufacturer contains a defect that relates to motor
vehicle safety, or fails to conform to an applicable Federal motor
vehicle safety standard, or the manufacturer files a defect or
noncompliance information report under 49 CFR part 573, the manufacturer
shall provide notification in accordance with Sec. 577.7(a), unless the
manufacturer is exempted by the Administrator (pursuant to 49 U.S.C.
30118(d) or 30120(h)) from giving such notification. The notification
shall contain the information specified in this section. The information
required by paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section shall be presented in
the form and order specified. The information required by paragraphs (d)
through (h) of this section may be presented in any order. Except as
authorized by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall submit a copy of
its proposed owner notification letter, including any provisions or
attachments related to reimbursement, to NHTSA's Recall Management
Division (NVS-215) no fewer than five (5) Federal Government business
days before it intends to begin mailing it to owners. The manufacturer
shall mark the outside of each envelope in which it sends an owner
notification letter with a notation that includes the phrase ``SAFETY
RECALL NOTICE,'' all in capital letters and in a type that is larger
than that used in the address section, and is also distinguishable from
the other type in a manner other than size. It shall also imprint on the
outside of this envelope a label in accordance with Sec. 577.14. Except
where the format of the envelope has been previously approved by NHTSA's
Recall Management Division (NVS-215), each manufacturer must submit the
envelope format it intends to use to that division at least five (5)
Federal Government business days before mailing the notification to
owners. Submission of envelopes and proposed owner notification letters
shall be made by the means identified in 49 CFR 573.9. Notification sent
to an owner whose address is in the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico shall be
written in both English and Spanish.
(b) At the top of the notification, there must be the statement
``IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL,'' in all capital letters and in a type size
that is larger than that used in the remainder of the letter. Then
immediately below, for vehicle recalls, there must be the statement
``This notice applies to your vehicle, (manufacturer to insert VIN for
the particular vehicle).'' If VIN placement is not possible in this
location, the VIN must then be placed in another conspicuous location
within the notification. Immediately below the foregoing, there must be
the opening statement: ``This notice is sent to you in accordance with
the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act.''
(c) Whichever of the following statements is appropriate:
(1) ``(Manufacturer's name or division) has decided that a defect
which relates to motor vehicle safety exists in (identified motor
vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle
manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of
notification sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer);'' or
(2) ``(Manufacturer's name or division) has decided that (identified
motor vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle
manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of
notification sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer) fail to
conform to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. (number and title
of standard).''
(d) When the manufacturer determines that the defect or
noncompliance may not exist in each such vehicle or item of replacement
equipment, he may include an additional statement to that effect.
[[Page 259]]
(e) A clear description of the defect or noncompliance, which shall
include--
(1) An identification of the vehicle system or particular item(s) of
motor vehicle equipment affected.
(2) A description of the malfunction that may occur as a result of
the defect or noncompliance. The description of a noncompliance with an
applicable standard shall include, in general terms, the difference
between the performance of the noncomplying vehicle or item of
replacement equipment and the performance specified by the standard;
(3) A statement of any operating or other conditions that may cause
the malfunction to occur; and
(4) A statement of the precautions, if any, that the owners should
take to reduce the chance that the malfunction will occur before the
defect or noncompliance is remedied.
(f) An evaluation of the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably
related to the defect or noncompliance.
(1) When vehicle crash is a potential occurrence, the evaluation
shall include whichever of the following is appropriate:
(i) A statement that the defect or noncompliance can cause vehicle
crash without prior warning; or
(ii) A description of whatever prior warning may occur, and a
statement that if this warning is not heeded, vehicle crash can occur.
(2) When vehicle crash is not the potential occurrence, the
evaluation must include a statement indicating the general type of
injury to occupants of the vehicle, or to persons outside the vehicle,
that can result from the defect or noncompliance, and a description of
whatever prior warning may occur.
(g) A statement of measures to be taken to remedy the defect or
noncompliance, in accordance with paragraph (g)(1) or (g)(2) of this
section, whichever is appropriate.
(1) When the manufacturer is required by the Act to remedy the
defect or noncompliance without charge, or when he will voluntarily so
remedy in full conformity with the Act, he shall include--
(i) A statement that he will cause such defect to be remedied
without charge, and whether such remedy will be by repair, replacement,
or refund of the purchase price (in the case of remedy of a vehicle,
less depreciation).
(ii) The earliest date on which the defect or noncompliance will be
remedied without charge. In the case of remedy by repair, this date
shall be the earliest date on which the manufacturer reasonably expects
that dealers or other service facilities will receive necessary parts
and instructions. The manufacturer shall specify the last date, if any,
on which he will remedy tires without charge.
(iii) In the case of remedy by repair through the manufacturer's
dealers or other service facilities:
(A) A general description of the work involved in repairing the
defect or noncompliance; and
(B) The manufacturer's estimate of the time reasonably necessary to
perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance.
(iv) In the case of remedy by repair through service facilities
other than those of the manufacturer or its dealers:
(A) The name and part number of each part must be added, replaced,
or modified;
(B) A description of any modifications that must be made to existing
parts, which shall also be identified by name and part number;
(C) Information as to where needed parts will be available;
(D) A detailed description (including appropriate illustrations) of
each step required to correct the defect or noncompliance;
(E) The manufacturer's estimate of the time reasonably necessary to
perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance; and
(F) The manufacturer's recommendations of service facilities where
the owner should have the repairs performed.
(v) In the case of remedy by replacement, a description of the motor
vehicle or item of replacement equipment that the manufacturer will
provide as a replacement for the defective or noncomplying vehicle or
equipment.
(vi) In the case of a remedy of a vehicle by refund of purchase
price, the
[[Page 260]]
method or basis for the manufacturer's assessment of depreciation.
(vii) A statement informing the owner that he or she may submit a
complaint to the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, DC 20590; or call
the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov, if the owner believes that:
(A) The manufacturer, distributor, or dealer has failed or is unable
to remedy the defect or noncompliance without charge.
(B) The manufacturer has failed or is unable to remedy the defect or
noncompliance without charge--
(1) (In the case of motor vehicles or items of replacement
equipment, other than tires) within a reasonable time, which is not
longer than 60 days in the case of repair after the owner's first tender
to obtain repair following the earliest repair date specified in the
notification, unless the period is extended by Administrator.
(2) (In the case of tires) after the date specified in the
notification on which replacement tires will be available.
(2) When the manufacturer is not required to remedy the defect or
noncompliance without charge and he will not voluntarily so remedy, the
statement shall include--
(i) A statement that the manufacturer is not required by the Act to
remedy without charge.
(ii) A statement of the extent to which the manufacturer will
voluntarily remedy, including the method of remedy and any limitations
and conditions imposed by the manufacturer on such remedy.
(iii) The manufacturer's opinion whether the defect or noncompliance
can be remedied by repair. If the manufacturer believes that repair is
possible, the statement shall include the information specified in
paragraph (g)(1)(iv) of this section, except that;
(A) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(A) of this
section shall also indicate the suggested list price of each part.
(B) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(C) of this
section shall also indicate the manufacturer's estimate of the date on
which the parts will be generally available.
(h) Any lessor who receives a notification of a determination of a
safety-related defect or noncompliance pertaining to any leased motor
vehicle shall send a copy of such notice to the lessee as prescribed by
Sec. 577.7(a)(2)(iv). This requirement applies to both initial and
follow-up notifications, but does not apply where the manufacturer has
notified a lessor's lessees directly.
(Authority: Secs. 108, 112, and 119, Pub. L. 89-563; 80 Stat. 718; secs.
102, 103, and 104, Pub. L. 93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1397, 1401,
1408, and 1411-1420); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)
[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 46 FR 6971, Jan. 22, 1981; 46
FR 28657, May 28, 1981; 60 FR 17270, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 279, Jan. 4,
1996; 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 70 FR 35557, June 21, 2005; 72 FR
32016, June 11, 2007; 78 FR 51422, Aug. 20, 2013; 79 FR 43678, July 28,
2014; 80 FR 55037, Sept. 14, 2015]
Sec. 577.6 Notification pursuant to Administrator's decision.
(a) Agency-ordered notification. When a manufacturer is ordered
pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) to provide notification of a defect or
noncompliance, he shall provide such notification in accordance with
Secs. 577.5 and 577.7, except that the statement required by paragraph
(c) of Sec. 577.5 shall indicate that the decision has been made by the
Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
(b) Provisional notification. When a manufacturer does not provide
notification as required by paragraph (a) of this section, and an action
concerning the Administrator's order to provide such notification has
been filed in a United States District Court, the manufacturer shall,
upon the Administrator's further order, provide in accordance with
paragraph (b) of Sec. 577.7 a provisional notification containing the
information specified in this paragraph, in the order and, where
specified, the form of paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(12) of this
section.
(1) An opening statement: ``This notice is sent to you in accordance
with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety
Act.''
(2) Whichever of the following statements is appropriate:
[[Page 261]]
(i) ``The Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration has decided that a defect which relates to motor vehicle
safety exists in (identified motor vehicles, in the case of notification
sent by a manufacturer of motor vehicles; identified replacement
equipment, in the case of notification sent by a manufacturer of
replacement equipment);'' or
(ii) ``The Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration has decided that (identified motor vehicles in the case
of notification sent by a motor vehicle manufacturer; identified
replacement equipment, in the case of notification sent by a
manufacturer of replacement equipment) fail to conform to federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. (number and title of standard).''
(3) When the Administrator decides that the defect or noncompliance
may not exist in each such vehicle or item of replacement equipment, the
manufacturer may include an additional statement to that effect.
(4) The statement: ``(Manufacturer's name or division) is contesting
this determination in a proceeding in the Federal courts and has been
required to issue this notice pending the outcome of the court
proceeding.''
(5) A clear description of the Administrator's stated basis for his
decision, as provided in his order, including a brief summary of the
evidence and reasoning that the Administrator relied upon in making his
decision.
(6) A clear description of the Administrator' stated evaluation as
provided in his order of the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably
related to the defect or noncompliance.
(7) Any measures that the Administrator has stated in his order
should be taken by the owner to avoid an unreasonable hazard resulting
from the defect or noncompliance.
(8) A brief summary of the evidence and reasoning upon which the
manufacturer relies in contesting the Administrator's determination.
(9) A statement regarding the availability of remedy and
reimbursement in accordance with paragraph (b)(9)(i) or (9)(ii) of this
section, whichever is appropriate.
(i) When the purchase date of the vehicle or item of equipment is
such that the manufacturer is required by the Act to remedy without
charge or to reimburse the owner for reasonable and necessary repair
expenses, he shall include--
(A) A statement that the remedy will be provided without charge to
the owner if the Court upholds the Administrator's decision;
(B) A statement of the method of remedy. If the manufacturer has not
yet determined the method of remedy, he will select either repair,
replacement with an equivalent vehicle or item of replacement equipment,
or refund of the purchase price (in the case of remedy of a vehicle,
less depreciation); and
(C) A statement that, if the Court upholds the Administrator's
decision, he will reimburse the owner for any reasonable and necessary
expenses that the owner incurs (not in excess of any amount specified by
the Administrator) in repairing the defect or noncompliance following a
date, specified by the manufacturer, which shall not be later than the
date of the Administrator's order to issue this notification.
(ii) When the manufacturer is not required either to remedy without
charge or to reimburse, he shall include--
(A) A statement that he is not required to remedy or reimburse, or
(B) A statement of the extent to which he will voluntarily remedy or
reimburse, including the method of remedy, if then known, and any
limitations and conditions on such remedy or reimbursement.
(10) A statement indicating whether, in the manufacturer's opinion,
the defect or noncompliance can be remedied by repair. When the
manufacturer believes that such remedy is feasible, the statement shall
include:
(i) A general description of the work and the manufacturer's
estimate of the costs involved in repairing the defect or noncompliance;
(ii) Information on where needed parts and instructions for
repairing the defect or noncompliance will be available, including the
manufacturer's estimate of the day on which they will be generally
available;
[[Page 262]]
(iii) The manufacturer's estimate of the time reasonably necessary
to perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance;
and
(iv) The manufacturer's recommendations of service facilities where
the owner could have the repairs performed, including (in the case of a
manufacturer required to reimburse if the Administrator's decision is
upheld in the court proceeding) at least one service facility for whose
charges the owner will be fully reimbursed if the Administrator's
decision is upheld.
(11) A statement that further notice will be mailed by the
manufacturer to the owner if the Administrator's decision is upheld in
the court proceeding.
(12) An address of the manufacturer where the owner may write to
obtain additional information regarding the notification and remedy.
(c) Post-litigation notification. When a manufacturer does not
provide notification as required in paragraph (a) of this section and
the Administrator prevails in an action commenced with respect to such
notification, the manufacturer shall, upon the Administrator's further
order, provide notification in accordance with paragraph (b) of
Sec. 577.7 containing the information specified in paragraph (a) of this
section, except that--
(1) The statement required by paragraph (c) of Sec. 577.5 shall
indicate that the decision has been made by the Administrator and that
his decision has been upheld in a proceeding in the Federal courts; and
(2) When a provisional notification was issued regarding the defect
or noncompliance and the manufacturer is required under the Act to
reimburse--
(i) The manufacturer shall state that he will reimburse the owner
for any reasonable and necessary expenses that the owner incurred (not
in excess of any amount specified by the Administrator) for repair of
the defect or noncompliance of the vehicle or item of equipment on or
after the date on which provisional notification was ordered to be
issued and on or before a date not sooner than the date on which this
notification is received by the owner. The manufacturer shall determine
and specify both dates.
(ii) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(vii) of Sec. 577.5
shall also inform the owner that he may submit a complaint to the
Administrator if the owner believes that the manufacturer has failed to
reimburse adequately.
(3) If the manufacturer is not required under the Act to reimburse,
he shall include--
(i) A statement that he is not required to reimburse, or
(ii) When he will voluntarily reimburse, a statement of the extent
to which he will do so, including any limitations and conditions on such
reimbursement.
[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17271, Apr. 5, 1995; 80
FR 55037, Sept. 14, 2015]
Sec. 577.7 Time and manner of notification.
(a) The notification required by Sec. 577.5 shall--
(1) Be furnished no later than 60 days from the date the
manufacturer files its defect or noncompliance information report under
part 573. In the event that the remedy for the defect or noncompliance
is not available at the time of notification, the manufacturer shall
issue a second notification within a reasonable time and in accordance
with the requirements of this part once that remedy is available. The
Administrator may order a manufacturer to send the notification to
owners on a specific date where the Administrator finds, after
consideration of available information and the views of the
manufacturer, that such notification is in the public interest. The
factors that the Administrator may consider include, but are not limited
to, the severity of the safety risk; the likelihood of occurrence of the
defect or noncompliance; whether there is something that an owner can do
to reduce either the likelihood of occurrence of the defect or
noncompliance or the severity of the consequences; whether there will be
a delay in the availability of the remedy from the manufacturer; and the
anticipated length of any such delay.
(2) Be accomplished--
(i) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a motor
vehicle manufacturer, by first class mail to each person who is
registered under
[[Page 263]]
State law as the owner of the vehicle and whose name and address are
reasonably ascertainable by the manufacturer through State records or
other sources available to him. If the owner cannot be reasonably
ascertained, the manufacturer shall notify the most recent purchaser
known to the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall also provide
notification to each lessee of a leased motor vehicle that is covered by
an agreement between the manufacturer and a lessor under which the
manufacturer is to notify lessees directly of safety-related defects and
noncompliances.
(ii) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a
replacement equipment manufacturer--
(A) By first class mail to the most recent purchaser known to the
manufacturer, and
(B) (Except in the case of a tire) if decided by the Administrator
to be required for motor vehicle safety, by public notice in such manner
as the Administrator may require after consultation with the
manufacturer.
(iii) In the case of a manufacturer required to provide notification
concerning any defective or noncomplying tire, by first class or
certified mail.
(iv) In the case of a notification to be sent by a lessor to a
lessee of a leased motor vehicle, by first-class mail to the most recent
lessee known to the lessor. Such notification shall be mailed within ten
days of the lessor's receipt of the notification from the vehicle
manufacturer.
(b) The notification required by any paragraph of Sec. 577.6 shall
be provided:
(1) Within 60 days after the manufacturer's receipt of the
Administrator's order to provide the notification, except that the
notification shall be furnished within a shorter or longer period if the
Administrator incorporates in his order a finding that such period is in
the public interest; and
(2) In the manner and to the recipient specified in paragraph (a) of
this section.
(c) The notification required by Sec. 577.13 shall--
(1) Be furnished within a reasonable time after the manufacturer
decides that a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety or a
noncompliance exists. In the case of defects or noncompliances that
present an immediate and substantial threat to motor vehicle safety, the
manufacturer shall transmit this notice to dealers and distributors
within three business days of its transmittal of the Defect and
Noncompliance Information Report under 49 CFR 573.6 to NHTSA, except
that when the manufacturer transmits the notice by other than electronic
means, the manufacturer shall transmit this notice to dealers and
distributors within five business days of its transmittal of the Defect
and Noncompliance Information Report to NHTSA. In all other cases, the
notification shall be provided in accordance with the schedule submitted
to the agency pursuant to Sec. 573.6(c)(8)(ii), unless that schedule is
modified by the Administrator. The Administrator may direct a
manufacturer to send the notification to dealers on a specific date if
the Administrator finds, after consideration of available information
and the views of the manufacturer, that such notification is in the
public interest. The factors that the Administrator may consider
include, but are not limited to, the severity of the safety risk; the
likelihood of occurrence of the defect or noncompliance; the time frame
in which the defect or noncompliance may manifest itself; availability
of an interim remedial action by the owner; whether a dealer inspection
would identify vehicles or items of equipment that contain the defect or
noncompliance; and the time frame in which the manufacturer plans to
provide the notification and the remedy to its dealers.
(2) Be accomplished--
(i) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a motor
vehicle manufacturer, by certified mail, verifiable electronic means
such as receipts or logs from electronic mail or satellite distribution
system, or other more expeditious and verifiable means to all dealers
and distributors of the vehicles that contain the defect or
noncompliance.
(ii) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a
manufacturer of replacement equipment or tires, by certified mail,
verifiable electronic means such as receipts or logs from
[[Page 264]]
electronic mail or satellite distribution system, or other more
expeditious and verifiable means to all dealers and distributors of the
product that are known to the manufacturer.
(iii) In those cases where a manufacturer of motor vehicles or items
of motor vehicle equipment provided the recalled product(s) to a group
of dealers or distributors through a central office, notification to
that central office will be deemed to be notice to all dealers and
distributors within that group.
(iv) In those cases in which a manufacturer of motor vehicles or
items of motor vehicle equipment has provided the recalled product to
independent dealers through independent distributors, the manufacturer
may satisfy its notification responsibilities by providing the
information required under this section to its distributors. In such
cases, the manufacturer must also instruct those distributors to
transmit a copy of the manufacturer's notification to known distributors
and retail outlets along the distribution chain within five working days
from its receipt.
(d) Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1) of this section, where the
recall is being conducted pursuant to an order issued by the
Administrator under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), notification required by
Sec. 577.13 shall be given on or before the date prescribed in the
Administrator's order.
[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17271, Apr. 5, 1995; 69
FR 34959, June 23, 2004; 70 FR 38814, July 6, 2005; 78 FR 51422, Aug.
20, 2013; 79 FR 43678, July 28, 2014]
Sec. 577.8 Disclaimers.
(a) A notification sent pursuant to Secs. 577.5, 577.6, 577.9 or
577.10 regarding a defect which relates to motor vehicle safety shall
not, except as specifically provided in this part, contain any statement
or implication that there is no defect, that the defect does not relate
to motor vehicle safety, or that the defect is not present in the
owner's or lessee's vehicle or item of replacement equipment. This
section also applies to any notification sent to a lessor or directly to
a lessee by a manufacturer.
(b) A notification sent pursuant to Secs. 577.5, 577.6, 577.9 or
577.10 regarding a noncompliance with an applicable motor vehicle safety
standard shall not, except as specifically provided in this part,
contain any statement or implication that there is not a noncompliance,
or that the noncompliance is not present in the owner's or lessee's
vehicle or item of replacement equipment. This section also applies to
any notification sent to a lessor or directly to a lessee by a
manufacturer.
[60 FR 17272, Apr. 5, 1995]
Sec. 577.9 Conformity to statutory requirements.
A notification that does not conform to the requirements of this
part is a violation of the Act.
Sec. 577.10 Follow-up notification.
(a) If, based on quarterly reports submitted pursuant to Sec. 573.7
of this part or other available information, the Administrator decides
that a notification of a safety-related defect of a noncompliance with a
Federal motor vehicle safety standard sent by a manufacturer has not
resulted in an adequate number of vehicles or items of equipment being
returned for remedy, the Administrator may direct the manufacturer to
send a follow-up notification in accordance with this section. The
scope, timing, form, and content of such follow-up notification will be
established by the Administrator, in consultation with the manufacturer,
to maximize the number of owners, purchasers, and lessees who will
present their vehicles or items of equipment for remedy.
(b) The Administrator may consider the following factors in deciding
whether or not to require a manufacturer to undertake a follow-up
notification campaign:
(1) The percentage of covered vehicles or items of equipment that
have been presented for the remedy;
(2) The amount of time that has elapsed since the prior
notification(s);
(3) The likelihood that a follow-up notification will increase the
number of vehicles or items of equipment receiving the remedy;
(4) The seriousness of the safety risk from the defect or
noncompliance;
[[Page 265]]
(5) Whether the prior notification(s) undertaken by the manufacturer
complied with the requirements of the statute and regulations; and
(6) Such other factors as are consistent with the purpose of the
statute.
(c) A manufacturer shall be required to provide a follow-up
notification under this section only with respect to vehicles or items
of equipment that have not been returned for remedy pursuant to the
prior notification(s).
(d) Except where the Administrator determines otherwise, the follow-
up notification shall be sent to the same categories of recipients that
received the prior notification(s).
(e) A follow-up notification must include:
(1) A statement that identifies it as a follow-up to an earlier
communication;
(2) A statement urging the recipient to present the vehicle or item
of equipment for remedy; and
(3) Except as determined by the Administrator, the information
required to be included in the initial notification.
(f) The manufacturer shall mark the outside of each envelope in
which it sends a follow-up notification in a manner which meets the
requirements of Sec. 577.5(a) of this part.
(g) Notwithstanding any other provision of this part, the
Administrator may authorize the use of other media besides first-class
mail for a follow-up notification.
[60 FR 17272, Apr. 5, 1995, as amended at 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003]
Sec. 577.11 Reimbursement notification.
(a) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (e) of this section,
when a manufacturer of motor vehicles or replacement equipment is
required to provide notice in accordance with Secs. 577.5 or 577.6, in
addition to complying with other sections of this part, the manufacturer
shall notify owners that they may be eligible to receive reimbursement
for the cost of obtaining a pre-notification remedy of a problem
associated with a defect or noncompliance consistent with the
manufacturer's reimbursement plan submitted to NHTSA pursuant to
Secs. 573.6(c)(8)(i) and 573.13 of this chapter.
(b) The manufacturer's notification shall include a statement,
following the items required by Sec. 577.5 or Sec. 577.6, that
(1) Refers to the possible eligibility for reimbursement for the
cost of repair or replacement; and
(2) Describes how a consumer may obtain information about
reimbursement from the manufacturer;
(c) The information referred to in Sec. 577.11(b)(2) of this part
shall be provided in one of the following ways:
(1) In an enclosure to the notification under Sec. 577.5 or
Sec. 577.6 that provides the information described in Sec. 577.11(d),
consistent with the manufacturer's reimbursement plan; or
(2) Through a toll-free telephone number (with TTY capability)
identified in the notification that provides the information described
in Sec. 577.11(d), consistent with the manufacturer's reimbursement
plan.
(3) For notifications of defects or noncompliances in item of motor
vehicle equipment that are in a form other than a letter to a specific
owner or purchaser, if the manufacturer does not otherwise maintain a
toll-free telephone number for the use of consumers, the manufacturer
may refer claimants to a non-toll-free telephone number (with TTY
capability) if it also specifies a mailing address at which owners can
obtain the relevant information regarding the manufacturer's
reimbursement plan.
(d) The information to be provided under paragraph (c) of this
section must:
(1) Identify the vehicle and/or equipment that is the subject of the
recall and the underlying problem;
(2) State that the manufacturer has a program for reimbursing pre-
notification remedies and identify the type of remedy eligible for
reimbursement;
(3) Identify any limits on the time period in which the repair or
replacement of the recalled vehicle or equipment must have occurred;
(4) Identify any restrictions on eligibility for reimbursement that
the manufacturer is imposing (as limited by Sec. 573.13 (d) of this
chapter);
(5) Specify all necessary documentation that must be submitted to
obtain reimbursement;
[[Page 266]]
(6) Explain how to submit a claim for reimbursement of a pre-
notification remedy; and
(7) Identify the office and address of the manufacturer where a
claim can be submitted by mail and any authorized dealers or facilities
where a claimant may submit a claim for reimbursement.
(e) The manufacturer is not required to provide notification
regarding reimbursement under this section if NHTSA finds, based upon a
written request by a manufacturer accompanied by supporting information,
views, and arguments, that all covered vehicles are under warranty or
that no person would be eligible for reimbursement under Sec. 573.13 of
this chapter.
[67 FR 64065, Oct. 17, 2002]
Sec. 577.12 Notification pursuant to an accelerated remedy program.
(a) When the Administrator requires a manufacturer to accelerate its
remedy program under Sec. 573.14 of this chapter, or when a manufacturer
agrees with a request from the Administrator that it accelerate its
remedy program in advance of being required to do so, in addition to
complying with other sections of this part, the manufacturer shall
provide notification in accordance with this section.
(b) Except as provided elsewhere in this section or when the
Administrator determines otherwise, the notification under this section
shall be sent to the same recipients as provided by Sec. 577.7. If no
notification has been provided to owners pursuant to this part, the
provisions required by this section may be combined with the
notification under Secs. 577.5 or 577.6. A manufacturer need only
provide a notification under this section to owners of vehicles or items
of equipment for which the defect or noncompliance has not been
remedied.
(c) The manufacturer's notification shall include the following:
(1) If there was a prior notification, a statement that identifies
that notification and states that this notification supplements it;
(2) When the accelerated remedy program has been required by the
Administrator, a statement that the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration has required the manufacturer to accelerate its remedy
program;
(3) A statement of how the program has been accelerated (e.g., by
expanding the sources of replacement parts and/or expanding the number
of authorized repair facilities);
(4) Where applicable, a statement that the owner may elect to obtain
the recall remedy using designated service facilities other than those
that are owned or franchised by the manufacturer or are the
manufacturer's authorized dealers, and an explanation of how the owner
may arrange for service at those other facilities;
(5) Where applicable, a statement that the owner may elect to obtain
the recall remedy using specified replacement parts or equipment from
sources other than the manufacturer;
(6) Where applicable, a statement indicating whether the owner will
be required to pay an alternative facility and/or parts supplier,
subject to reimbursement by the manufacturer; and
(7) If an owner will be required to pay an alternative facility and/
or parts supplier, a statement that the owner will be eligible to have
those expenditures reimbursed by the manufacturer, and a description of
how a consumer may obtain information about reimbursement from the
manufacturer consistent with Sec. 577.11(b)(2), (c) and (d).
[67 FR 72393, Dec. 5, 2002]
Sec. 577.13 Notification to dealers and distributors.
(a) The notification to dealers and distributors of a safety-related
defect or a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard
shall contain a clear statement that identifies the notification as
being a safety recall notice, an identification of the motor vehicles or
items of motor vehicle equipment covered by the recall, a description of
the defect or noncompliance, and a brief evaluation of the risk to motor
vehicle safety related to the defect or noncompliance. The notification
shall also include a complete description of the recall remedy, and the
estimated date on which the remedy will be available. Information
required by this paragraph that is not available at the time of the
original notification
[[Page 267]]
shall be provided as it becomes available.
(b) The notification shall also include an advisory stating that it
is a violation of Federal law for a dealer to deliver a new motor
vehicle or any new or used item of motor vehicle equipment (including a
tire) covered by the notification under a sale or lease until the defect
or noncompliance is remedied.
(c) The manufacturer shall, upon request of the Administrator,
demonstrate that it sent the required notification to each of its known
dealers and distributors and the date of such notification.
[69 FR 34960, June 23, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 38815, July 6, 2005]
Sec. 577.14 Labeling for owner notification letter envelope.
(a) Purpose and scope--The purpose of this section is to supply
vehicle and equipment manufacturers, including manufacturers of tires
and child safety seats, with the label required to be shown on the
envelopes of safety recall notification letters mailed to owners
pursuant to Sec. 577.5. This label shall not be used for any purpose
other than compliance with Sec. 577.5 by any entity outside of the
Department of Transportation.
(b) Required label information and format. (1) The label depicted in
this section must be printed on the front of the safety recall owner
notification envelope. The content, format, and sequence of this label
are depicted in Figure 1 of this section. A Spanish version of this
label, for owners located in the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico or the
Canal Zone, can be found in Figure 2 of this section.
(2) The text ``IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL INFORMATION'' must be printed
in capital letters, have a minimum font size of 10 point, and be printed
in white text on a red background. Also, this text must be centered
horizontally and located near the top of the label. The text ``Issued in
Accordance With Federal Law'' must have a minimum font size of 10 point,
be printed in black text on a white background, and be located directly
beneath the preceding text, also centered horizontally within the label.
(3) The logo of the U.S. Department of Transportation must be
located at the bottom, left-hand corner of the label. The logo of the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration must be located at the
bottom, right-hand corner of the label. Each logo should be printed in
black color with a white background.
(c) Required label size--The label depicted in this paragraph must
be 1 inch in height and 3 inches in length.
[[Page 268]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28JY14.000
[79 FR 43678, July 28, 2014]
PART 578_CIVIL AND CRIMINAL PENALTIES--Table of Contents
Sec.
578.1 Scope.
578.2 Purpose.
578.3 Applicability.
578.4 Definitions.
578.5 Inflationary adjustment of civil penalties.
578.6 Civil penalties for violations of specified provisions of Title
49 of the United States Code.
578.7 Criminal safe harbor provision.
578.8 Civil penalty factors under 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301.
Authority: Pub. L. 101-410, Pub. L. 104-134, Pub. L. 109-59, Pub. L.
114-74, Pub. L. 114-94, 49 U.S.C. 30165, 30170, 30505, 32308, 32309,
32507, 32709, 32710, 32902, 32912, and 33115; delegation of authority at
49 CFR 1.81, 1.95.
Effective Date Note: At 81 FR 95492, Dec. 28, 2016, the authority
citation for 49 CFR part 578 was revised, effective Jan. 27, 2017. The
effective date of this revision was subsequently postponed numerous
times: At 82 FR 8694, Jan. 30, 2017, with a tentative effective date of
Mar. 28, 2017; at 82 FR 15302, Mar. 28, 2017, with a tentative effective
date of June 26, 2017; at 82 FR 29010, June 27, 2017, with a tentative
effective date of July 10, 2017. At 82 FR 32139, July 12, 2017, this
revision was delayed indefinitely.
For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as
follows:
Authority: Pub. L. 101-410, Pub. L. 104-134, Pub. L. 109-59, Pub. L.
114-74, Pub L. 114-94, 49 U.S.C. 32902 and 32912; delegation of
authority at 49 CFR 1.81, 1.95.
Source: 62 FR 5169, Feb. 4, 1997, unless otherwise noted.